Girlshare.ro_konica-Minolta EP 2050 Service Manual

SERVICE MANUAL

EP2050

GENERAL

1. SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1

2. SPACE REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4

3. PRECAUTIONS FOR INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5

4. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-6

5. HANDLING OF SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-7

6. SYSTEM OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-8

7. PARTS IDENTIFICATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-9

8. CONTROL PANEL KEYS AND INDICATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-118-1. Basic Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-118-2. System Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-138-3. Supplementary Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-148-4. Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-158-5. User’s Choice Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-168-6. Tech. Rep. Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-17

MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL

1. CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-1

2. COPY PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-2

3. DRIVE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-4

4. SEQUENTIAL EXPLANATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-5

5. WATCHDOG (CPU OVERRUN MONITOR) FUNCTION . . . . . . . M-85-1. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-85-2. Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-85-3. Watchdog Function Post-Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-9

6. IMAGE STABILIZATION SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-116-1. Overview of the Image Stabilization System . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-116-2. AIDC Sensor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-13

7. PC DRUM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-237-1. PC Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-237-2. Drive and Grounding for the PC Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-237-3. Drum Dehumidifying Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-24

CONTENTS

i

8. DRUM CHARGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-258-1. PC Drum Charge Corona . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-258-2. Control of the PC Drum Charge Corona . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-268-3. Ozone Filter (PC Drum Charge Corona) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-27

9. OPTICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-289-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-289-2. Exposing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-299-3. Exposure Lamp Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-309-4. Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-349-5. Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage Moving Mechanism . M-359-6. Scanner Motor M2 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-359-7. Lens Drive Mechanism/Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-399-8. 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage Positioning Mechanism/Control . . . M-44

10. ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-4810-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-4810-2. Original Size Detecting Sensors (PC115 to PC119) . . . . . . M-49

10-2-1. Construction of Each Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-4910-2-2. Original Detection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-5010-2-3. Sensor Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-51

10-3. Original Size Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-5210-3-1. Size Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-5210-3-2. Original Size Detection Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . M-53

10-4. Original Size Detection Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-54

11. IMAGE ERASE LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-5511-1. Image Erase Lamp LA2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-5511-2. Image Erase Lamp LA2 ON/OFF Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-56

11-2-1. ON/OFF Control Data Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-5611-2-2. Leading Edge Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-5611-2-3. Edge Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-5711-2-4. Trailing Edge Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-5911-2-5. Center Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-5911-2-6. 2-in-1 Erase. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-60

11-3. Image Erase Lamp LA2 Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-61

12. DEVELOPING UNIT/HOPPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-6212-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-6212-2. Developing Unit Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-6312-3. Developer Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-6412-4. Magnetic Pole Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-65

CONTENTS

ii

12-5. Developing Bias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-6712-6. ATDC Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-6812-7. Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Mechanism/Control . . . . . M-7112-8. Sub Hopper Toner Empty Detecting Mechanism/Control . . M-7212-9. Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Mechanism/Control . . . . M-7512-10. Swinging Out/In the Main Hopper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-77

13. PAPER TAKE-UP/FEED SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-7813-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-7813-2. Paper Take-Up Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-7913-3. Paper Take-Up Roll Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-80

13-3-1. Normal Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-8013-3-2. Paper Take-Up Retry Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-8113-3-3. Double Feed Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-82

13-4. Paper Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-8313-4-1. 1st/2nd Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-8313-4-2. Positioning and Locking of the Paper Drawer . . . . M-8413-4-3. Drawer-in-Position Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-85

13-5. Paper Separating Mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-8613-6. Paper Empty Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-8713-7. Paper Dehumidifying Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-8813-8. Manual Bypass Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-89

13-8-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-8913-8-2. Paper Take-Up Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-9013-8-3. Take-Up/Feed Rolls Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . M-9113-8-4. Manual Bypass Take-Up Roll Control . . . . . . . . . . . M-9213-8-5. Manual Bypass Paper Separating Mechanism. . . . M-9313-8-6. Manual Bypass Paper Empty Detection . . . . . . . . . M-94

14. VERTICAL PAPER TRANSPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-9514-1. Construction of Vertical Transport Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-9514-2. Vertical Transport Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-9614-3. Vertical Transport Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-9714-4. Detection of Right Upper Door in Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-98

15. SYNCHRONIZING ROLLERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-9915-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-9915-2. Synchronizing Roller Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-10015-3. Synchronizing Roller Drive Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-10115-4. Prevention of Low Image Density on Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-102

CONTENTS

iii

16. IMAGE TRANSFER/PAPER SEPARATOR CORONAS. . . . . . . . M-10416-1. Construction of Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas

Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-10416-2. Description of Image Transfer and Paper Separation. . . . . M-10516-3. Ozone Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-10616-4. Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas Control . . . . . . . M-107

17. CLEANING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-10817-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-10817-2. Cleaning Blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-109

17-2-1. Cleaning Blade Pressure Mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . M-10917-2-2. Cleaning Blade Moving Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . M-109

17-3. Spent Toner Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-11017-3-1. Toner Conveying/Collecting Mechanism. . . . . . . . . M-11017-3-2. Detection of Toner Collecting Box in Position . . . . M-111

17-4. PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-11317-4-1. Paper Separator Finger Swinging Mechanism . . . M-11317-4-2. Paper Separator Finger Front-to-Back Moving

Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-11417-4-3. PC Drum Paper Separator Finger Control . . . . . . . M-115

17-5. AIDC Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-11617-6. Cleaning Bias (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-117

18. MAIN ERASE LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-11818-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-11818-2. Main Erase Lamp LA3 ON/OFF Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-118

19. PAPER TRANSPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-12019-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-12019-2. Transport Section Release Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-12019-3. Suction Belt Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-12119-4. Suction Fan Motor M4 Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-122

20. FUSING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-12320-1. Construction and Drive Train . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-12320-2. Fusing Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-12420-3. Fusing Rollers Pressure Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-12420-4. Fusing Roller Cleaning Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-12520-5. Paper Separator Fingers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-12620-6. Fusing Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-127

CONTENTS

iv

21. EXIT UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-13121-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-13121-2. Exit Unit Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-13121-3. Exit/Duplex Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-132

21-3-1. Switching Mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-13221-3-2. Switching Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-132

21-4. Paper Exit Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-13321-4-1. Paper Exit Detection Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-13321-4-2. Exit Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-133

21-5. Detection of Left Upper Door in Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-134

22. TOTAL COUNTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-13522-1. Total Counter CT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-13522-2. Detection of Total Counter in Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-13622-3. CT1 Count-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-136

23. POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-137

24. MEMORY BACKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-141

CONTENTS

v

SAFETY INFORMATION

(ALL Area)CAUTION

Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the same or equivalent typerecommended by the manufacturer.Dispose of used batteries accordingto the manufacturer’s instructions.

(Denmark only)ADVARSEL!

Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri

af samme fabrikat og type.Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandøren.

(Norway only)ADVARSEL

Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri.Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende

type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten.Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens

instruksjoner.

(Sweden only)VARNING

Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent

typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens

instruktion.

(Finland only)VAROITUS

Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan

tyyppiin. Hävitä Käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeidenmukaisesti.

GENERAL

1 SPECIFICATIONS

TYPE : Desktop (with Stationary Platen)

PHOTOCONDUCTOR : Organic Photoconductor

COPYING SYSTEM : Electrostatic Dry Powdered Image Transfer to PlainPaper

PAPER FEEDINGSYSTEM

: 3-Way Feeding 1st Drawer: Fixed Paper Size Tray(500 sheets of paper)

2nd Drawer: Fixed Paper Size Tray(500 sheets of paper)

Multi Bypass Table (50 sheets of paper)

EXPOSURE SYSTEM : Mirror Scanning, Slit Exposure

DEVELOPING SYSTEM : Minolta New Micro-Toning System

CHARGING SYSTEM : Single-Wire DC Negative Corona with Scorotron System

IMAGE TRANSFERSYSTEM

: Visible Image Transfer by means of a Single-Wire DCNegative Corona with Corotron System

PAPER SEPARATINGSYSTEM

: Single-Wire AC Corona with Corotron System, plusPaper Separator Fingers

FUSING SYSTEM : Heat Roller

PAPER DISCHARGINGSYSTEM

: Charge Neutralizing Brush

MAXIMUM ORIGINALSIZE

: A3L or 11" × 17"L (L: Lengthwise)

COPY MEDIUM:

1st Drawer(Automatic

feeding)

2nd Drawer(Automatic

feeding)

Multi BypassTable

Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2) O O O

Translucent paper — — O

Transparencies — — O

Thick paper (91 to 157 g/m2) — — O

Recycled paper O O O

Maximum (Width × Length) 297 × 432 mm 297 × 432 mm 297 × 432 mm

Minimum (Width × Length) 140 × 182 mm 140 × 182 mm 100 × 140 mm

O: Permissible —: Not permissible ∗ 1: 20 sheets or less

Me

diu

mD

imen

sio

ns

*1

*1

*1

G-1

MULTIPLE COPIES : 1 to 99

WARMING-UP TIME : 150 sec. or less with room temperature of 20°C and ratedpower voltage

FIRST COPY TIME : A4C or 8-1/2" × 11"C: 6.8 sec. or less

CONTINUOUS COPY SPEED (copies/min.)(Zoom Ratio ×1.000)

AreaZoomRatio 100.0% Area

ZoomRatio 100.0%

Size Size

Metric A3L 14 Inch 11" × 17" (L) 14

A4L 19 8-1/2" × 11" (L) 20

A4C 25 8-1/2" × 11" (C) 25

B4L 16

L: Lengthwise; C: Crosswise

ZOOM RATIOS:

AreaMetric Inch

Mode

Fixed Full Size 100.0% 100.0%

Reduction 81.6% 78.5%

70.7% 73.3%

50.0% 64.7%

50.0%

Enlargement 200.0% 200.0%

141.4% 154.5%

115.4% 129.4%

121.4%

Variable 50.0% to 200.0% (in 0.1% increments)

LENS : Through Lens (F = 6.0, f = 180 mm)

EXPOSURE LAMP : Halogen Frost Tube Lamp

FUSINGTEMPERATURE

: During a copy cycle = 185°CIn Standby = 185°C

G-2

POWER/CURRENT CONSUMPTION (Copier Only):

VoltageExposureLamp(Rating)

FusingHeaterLamp(Rating)

Max. PowerConsum-ption

In Standby

Max.CurrentConsum-ption

115, 127 V 80 V230 W

115, 127 V850 W 1240 W 900 W

11.2 A(115 V)10.1 A(127 V)

120 V 80 V230 W

120 V850 W 1290 W 960 W 11.2 A

200 ~ 220 V 160 V250 W

200 V850 W

1260 ~ 1400 W

940 ~1070 W 6.7 A

220 ~ 240 V 160 V250 W

200 V850 W

1260 ~1390 W

940 ~1070 W 6.1 A

POWERREQUIREMENT

: 115 V, 120 V, 127 V, 200 V, 220 V, 230 V, 240 V; 50/60 Hz

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:

Temperature 10 to 35°C with a fluctuation of 10°C or less per hour

Humidity 15 to 85% RH with a fluctuation of 20% RH or less per hour

Ambient Illumination 3,000 lux or less

Levelness 1° (1.75 mm/100 mm)

DIMENSIONS : Width .... 620 mmDepth .... 685 mmHeight ... 602 mm (including Original Glass)

WEIGHT : 75 kg (excluding the Exit Tray, starter, toner, and copy paper)

STANDARDACCESSORIES

: Operator’s Manual, Setting-up Instructions, Starter, ExitTray, User’s Choice Card∗ 1."∗ 1. Except Europe"

G-3

2 SPACE REQUIREMENTS

To ensure easy copier operation, supply replacement, and servicemaintenance, adhere to the recommended space requirements detailedbelow.

* Be sure to allow a clearance of 150 (6") mm. or more at the back of thecopier as there is a ventilation duct.

2,165

300 200

1136O162AA

1,3501,310

1136O163AA

150

<Unit: mm>

G-4

3 PRECAUTIONS FOR INSTALLATION

Installation SiteTo ensure safety and utmost performance of the copier, the copier shouldNOT be used in a place:● Where it will be subject to extremely high or low temperature or

humidity.● Which is exposed to direct sunlight.● Which is in the direct air stream of an air conditioner, heater or

ventilator.● Which puts the operator in the direct stream of exhaust from the copier. ● Which has poor ventilation.● Where ammonia gas might be generated. ● Which does not have a stable, level floor.● Where it will be subject to sudden fluctuations in either temperature or

humidity. If a cold room is quickly heated, condensation forms insidethe copier, resulting in blank spots in the copy.

● Which is near any kind of heating device.● Where it may be splashed with water.● Which is dirty or where it will receive undue vibration.● Which is near volatile flammables or curtains.

Power SourceUse an outlet with a capacity of 115/120/127V, 13.2A or more, or200/220/240V, 8.1A or more.● If any other electrical equipment is sourced from the same power

outlet, make sure that the capacity of the outlet is not exceeded.● Use a power source with little voltage fluctuation.● Never connect by means of a multiple socket any other appliances or

machines to the outlet being used for the copier.● Make the following checks at frequent intervals:

• Is the power plug abnormally hot?• Are there any cracks or scrapes in the cord?• Has the power plug been inserted fully into the outlet?• Does something, including the copier itself, ride on the power cord?

● Ensure that the copier does not ride on the power cord orcommunications cable of other electrical equipment, and that it doesnot become wedged into or underneath the mechanism.

Grounding To prevent receiving electrical shocks in the case of electrical leakage,always ground the copier.● Connect the grounding wire to:

• The ground terminal of the outlet.• A grounding contact which complies with the local electrical standards.

● Never connect the grounding wire to a gas pipe, the grounding wire fora telephone, or a water pipe.

G-5

4 PRECAUTIONS FOR USE

To ensure that the copier is used in an optimum condition, observe thefollowing precautions.● Never place a heavy object on the copier or subject the copier to

shocks.● Insert the power plug all the way into the outlet. ● Do not attempt to remove any panel or cover which is secured while the

copier is making copies.● Do not turn OFF the Power Switch while the copier is making copies.● Provide good ventilation when making a large number of copies

continuously.● Never use flammable sprays near the copier.● If the copier becomes inordinately hot or produces abnormal noise, turn

it OFF and unplug it.● Do not turn ON the Power Switch at the same time when you plug the

power cord into the outlet.● When unplugging the power cord, do not pull on the cord; hold the plug

and pull it out.● Do not bring any magnetized object near the copier.● Do not place a vase or vessel containing water on the copier.● Be sure to turn OFF the Power Switch at the end of the workday or

upon power failure.● Use care not to drop paper clips, staples, or other small pieces of metal

into the copier.

Operating EnvironmentThe operating environmental requirements of the copier are as follows.

• Temperature: 10°C to 30°C with a fluctuation of 10°C per hour• Humidity: 15% to 85% RH with a fluctuation of 20% RH per hour

Power RequirementsThe power source voltage requirements are as follows.

• Voltage Fluctuation: AC115/120/127/200/220/240V æ10% (Copying performance assured)−15% (Paper feeding performance

assured)• Frequency Fluctuation: 50/60 Hz ±0.3%

G-6

5 HANDLING OF THE CONSUMABLES

Before using any consumables, always read the label on its containercarefully.● Use the right toner. The applicable copier model name is indicated on

the Toner Bottle.● Paper is apt to be easily damaged by dampness. To prevent

absorption of moisture, store paper, which has been removed from itswrapper but not loaded into the Drawer, in a sealed plastic bag in acool, dark place.

● Keep consumables out of the reach of children.● Do not touch the PC Drum with bare hands.● Store the paper, toner, and other consumables in a place free from

direct sunlight and away from any heating apparatus.● The same sized paper is of two kinds, short grain and long grain. Short

grain paper should only be fed through the copier crosswise, long grainpaper should only be fed lengthwise.

● If your hands become soiled with toner, wash them with soap andwater immediately.

● Do not throw away any used consumables (PC Drum, starter, toner,etc.). They are to be collected.

NOTEDo not burn, bury in the ground, or throw into the water anyconsumables (PC Drum, starter, toner, etc.).

G-7

1. Automatic Document Feeder AF-32. Duplexing Document Feeder AFR-73. Data Controller D-1024. Duplex Unit AD-55. Paper Feed Cabinet PF2D6. Paper Feed Cabinet PF-202

(Except USA, CANADA)7. Paper Feed Cabinet PF-1028. 20-Bin Sorter S-2059. Staple Sorter ST-20610. 10-Bin Sorter S-10411. Staple Sorter ST-101

6 SYSTEM OPTIONS

1

1139O0010A

11

1139O0020A

1136O061AA

3

1138O525AA

91136O059AA

6

1139O018AA

7 1139O1212A

4

1139O0030A

2

1139O0010A

10

1139O0020A

81136O059AA

5

1139O1222A

G-8

7 PARTS IDENTIFICATION

Control Panel

Manual BypassExtender

Right Door

Right Door LockRelease Lever

Original Cover Power Switch ManualBypass Table

Total Counter

Exit Tray

Left Door

Left Door LockRelease Lever

1st/2nd Drawer

◆ Outside of the CopierFront Door

Exit Tray Extender

G-9

Corona UnitCleaning Lever(Upper/Lower)

Misfeed RemovalKnob

Transport SectionRelease Lever

DehumidifierSwitch

Misfeed RemovalKnob

Original Pad

Original Width/LengthScale

Toner Bottle

Original Glass

Toner Bottle Holder

◆ Inside of the Copier

Display ContrastControl Knob

G-10

8 CONTROL PANEL KEYS AND INDICATORS8-1. Basic Panel

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 CAuto

123

Darker

A

Lighter x0.5~x2.0

Reduce Full size Enlarge

AAuto Select

PaperZoomExposure

1

2 1

2 2

1 1 2in1

1 2 2in1

Orig. Copy

2

11 2in1

12 2in1

Finishing

HolePunch

Sort

SortStaple

Group

MixedOrng.Detect

ManualSteple

Auto Count

Even

Odd

# of Origs.

1136P250DA

6 7

8 9 1 2

3 4 5 18 17 1615

14

13

10

12

11

1921 202223

1 Clip Tray A tray in which to put the paper clips used with thedocuments.

2 System Panel See "System Panel" for details.

3 Supplementary Panel The Supplementary Panel controls are revealedwhen the System Panel is opened. See"Supplementary Panel" for details.

4 System Panel (Door toSupplementary Panel)

Flip to the left to reveal the Supplementary Panelcontrols.

5 Exposure Control Key (<, Lighter)

Lowers the exposure level in the Manual Exposuremode.

6 Auto Exposure Mode Key Selects either the Auto or Manual Exposure mode.

7 Exposure Control Key (>, Darker)

Raises the exposure level in the Manual Exposuremode.

8 Display Panel See "Display Panel" for details.

9 Multi-Copy Keys [Basic function]

* Set the number of copies to be made, accessnumber (of department), and other numeric data.

[User’s Choice]

* Set the auto panel reset time, Energy Saver time,and the maximum number of copies that can beselected.

* Set the access number (of the administrator) andUser Help code.

[Tech. Rep. Mode]

* Set the Test Mode operation number, accessnumber (of the administrator), and Tech. Rep. ID.

* Set the paper size and other settings.

G-11

10 Access Mode Key (ID Key)

Permits the copier to enter or leave theAdministrator mode. The key becomes valid onlywhen "Copy Track" of the Administrator function ofthe User’s Choice has been set to "YES."

11 Energy Saver Key Sets the copier into the Energy Saver mode.

12 Interrupt Key Interrupts a current job with a different one. Asecond press returns the copier to the previous job.

13 Clear Key * Clears the number of copies selected.

* Clears the counter counts.

* Ejects a document, that has previously been fedfrom the Duplexing/Automatic Document Feederonto the Original Glass, out onto the DocumentExit Tray.

14 Panel Reset Key * Initializes the copier.

* Ejects a document, that has previously been fedfrom the Duplexing/Automatic Document Feederonto the Original Glass, out onto the DocumentExit Tray.

* Allows the copier’s to feed 1-sided copies from theDuplex Unit out onto the Exit Tray.

15 Stop Key * Stops a multi-copy cycle.

* Stops a Test Mode operation.

* Sets the copier into the Tech. Rep. or Adjust mode.

16 Start Key * Starts a copy cycle.

* Starts a Test Mode operation.

* Sets the copier into the Adjust mode.

17 Paper Select Key Selects the paper size.

18 Auto Paper Mode Key Selects the Auto Paper mode.

19 Enlargement Key Selects a fixed enlargement ratio.

20 Full Size Key Selects full size (100%).

21 Reduction Key Selects a fixed reduction ratio.

22 Zoom Up/Down Key Makes the zoom ratio larger or smaller in 0.1%increments, in the range between 50% and 200%.

23 Message Display Serves as the basic source of information showingsuch information as warning messages and copyingmode currently selected for use.

G-12

8-2. System Panel

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 CAuto

123

Darker

A

Lighter x0.5~x2.0


AAuto Select

PaperZoomExposure

1

2 1

2 2

1 1 2in1

1 2 2in1

Orig. Copy

2

11 2in1

12 2in1

Finishing

HolePunch

Sort

SortStaple

Group

MixedOrng.Detect

ManualSteple

Auto Count

Even

Odd

# of Origs.

1136P251DA

1 2

4 5 6 7

3

1 Manual Staple Key * Staples copy sets or stacks already made.

* Permits the stapling of copies as they aremanually placed in the Top or 1st Bin when thereare no copies in any of the Bins.

2 Mixed Original DetectionMode Key

Sets or cancels the Mixed Original Detection mode.

3 Original Count Mode Key Selects the appropriate original count mode todetermine whether the odd-page correction isnecessary.

4 Original>Copy TypeSelect Key II

Selects the type of 2-in-1 copying job to beperformed.

5 Original>Copy TypeSelect Key I

Selects the type of copying job making 1- or 2-sidedcopies from 1- or 2-sided originals.

6 Hole Punch Mode Key Sets the copier into the Hole Punch mode.(Possible only on A3, 11" × 17" lengthwise or A4,8-1/2" × 11" crosswise paper. The mode is notacceptable when the copier is in the Mixed OriginalDetection mode.)

7 Finishing Mode SelectKey

Selects the type of exit processing.

G-13

8-3. Supplementary Panel

Flipping the System Panel to the left reveals the Supplementary Panelcontrols.

Input

JobMemory

ZoomMemory

Auto Size

MeterCount

Toner Book 1

OHPInter-leaving

PageInsertion

Cover(Front)

Book 2

Margin 1

Margin 2

Erase 1

Erase 2

Erase 3

Erase 4

Display OK

1 2

4 5

7 8

0Auto

123

DrumDehumidify

Darker

A

Lighter x0.5~x2.0


AAuto Select

PaperZoomExposure

Cover(Front&Back)

1136P252CA

1 2

12 13 14 15

8 5 3 4 6 7

11 10 9

1 System Panel (Door toSupplementary Panel)

Flip to the left to reveal the Supplementary Panelcontrols.

2 Insertion Mode Key Sets the copier into the Insertion mode.

3 Cover Mode Key Sets the copier into the Cover mode.

4 Meter Count Key Shows on the Message Display the current countsof different electronic counters of the copier.

5 Memory Input Key Stores a copying job program or a zoom ratio in thememory.

6 Job Memory Select Key Recalls a copying job program previously stored inthe job memory.

7 Zoom Memory SelectKey

Stores a zoom ratio in, or recalls one from, thezoom memory.

8 Auto Size Mode Key Selects the Auto Size Mode.

9 Erase Mode Key Sets the copier into the Erase mode.

10 Enter Key Validates the selection made by the Select Key.

11 Select Key Selects a function from among the options shownon the Message Display.

12 File Margin Mode Key Sets the copier into the File Margin mode.

13 Book Mode Key Sets the copier into the Book Copy mode.

14 Drum Dehumidify Key Removes condensation formed on the surface ofthe PC Drum.

15 Auxiliary TonerReplenishing Key

Sets the copier into the Auxiliary TonerReplenishing mode. It does not, however, start thetoner replenishing sequence if the toner-to-carrierratio is above a predetermined level.

G-14

8-4. Display Panel

Auto

123

1136P253CA

1 2

12 13 14

8 5 3 4 6 7

11 10 9 1136P253CA

1 Monitor Display * Shows the paper source which is currentlyselected for use.

* Shows the location of a closure failure.

* Shows the location of a paper misfeed.

2 Misfeed Indicator Indicates that a paper misfeed has occurred

3 Call-Tech.-Rep. Indicator Indicates that the copier has developed amalfunction.

4 Maintenance CallIndicator

Indicates that a PM counter or Copy Kit counter hasreached a preset value.

5 Closure Failure Indicator Indicates that a Door is left open.

6 Add Toner Indicator Indicates that the Toner Bottle is running out oftoner.

7 Wait Indicator Indicates that the Fusing Unit is warming up or theLens/Mirror is in motion.

8 Multi-Copy Display Shows the number of copies set to be made.

9 Plug-In Counter Indicator Indicates that the Plug-In Counter is unplugged fromthe copier or a magnetic card removed from theData Controller.

10 Add Staple Indicator Indicates that the Staple Cartridge is running out ofstaples.

11 Toner Collecting BoxFull Indicator

Indicates that the Spent Toner counter has reacheda preset value.

12 Remove Copies Indicator Indicates that there is a copy or copies left in any ofthe Sorter Bins.

13 Add Paper Indicator Indicates that the currently selected Drawer has runout of paper.

14 Exposure InformationDisplay

Auto ExposureIndicatorExposureLevel Indicator

:

:

Indicates that the copier is now inthe Auto Exposure mode.Shows the exposure setting levelin the Manual Exposure mode.

G-15

8-5. User’s Choice Card

8-5-1. Entering the User’s Choice

1. Flip the System Panel to the left and place the User’s Choice Card shownbelow on the Supplementary Panel.

2. Hold down the Panel Reset Key more than 3 seconds.3. This sets the copier into the User’s Choice. Now, operate the panel as

instructed by the Message Display.

* For details on the User’s Choice functions and associated operatinginstructions, see the Operator’s Manual or SWITCHES ON PWBs.

Input

JobMemory

ZoomMemory

Auto Size

MeterCount

Toner Book 1

OHPInter-leaving

PageInsertion

Cover(Front)

Book 2

Margin 1

Margin 2

Erase 1

Erase 2

Erase 3

Erase 4

Display OK

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 CAuto

123

DrumDehumidify

Darker

A

Lighter x0.5~x2.0


AAuto Select

PaperZoomExposure

Cover(Front&Back)

1136P360DA

User’s Choice Card Control Panel

8-5-2. User’s Choice Functions

No. Functions No. Functions

1 Language Select 11 Intelligent Sort

2 Mixed Orig. Detection 12 Energy Saver

3 Original Thickness 13 Auto Panel Reset

4 Copy Mode Priority 14 Drum Dehumidify

5 Paper Priority 15 Special Paper

6 Exposure Priority 16 Custom 2-in-1

7 Finishing Priority 17 Custom Book

8 Auto Expo. Level 18 Custom 2-in-1 Separation

9 Manual Expo. Adjust 19 Administrator

10 Counter Removal

G-16

8-6. Tech. Rep. Card

8-6-1. Entering the Tech. Rep. Mode

1. Flip the System Panel to the left and place the Tech. Rep. Card shownbelow on the Supplementary Panel.

2. Press the Keys " " → "0" → " " → "1", in that order.3. This sets the copier into the Tech. Rep. mode. Now, operate the panel as

instructed by the Message Display.

* For details on the Tech. Rep. mode functions and associated operatinginstructions, see SWITCHES ON PWBs.

Tech. Rep.ID Code

PanelIndication

Memory

Port

PassageSensor

ControlBoad

LevelHistory

Data Load

MINOLTA CAMERA CO, LTD.

I/O Check

Data Save

InitialTransmission

CounterClear

RD Mode

Card - 2

Card - 1

Tech.Rep. Card - 2

1136P03GCA

CallCompletion

DT Setting

SecurityMode

Maintenance

Consumables

Trouble

Auto CPUReset

Paper SizeInput

Paper

Port

Jam

Retry

Tech. Rep.Choice

ADFSetting

ROMVarsion

Tech. Rep. Card - 1

SystemInput

Enter F O P

Counter

Card - 2

Card - 1

Function

1136P04GCA

8-6-2. Tech. Rep. Mode Functions

Tech. Rep. Card 1 Tech. Rep. Card 2

No. Functions No. Functions

1 Function 1 RD Mode

2 Tech. Rep. Choice 2 I/O Check

3 Paper Size Input 3 Level History

4 System Input 4 Tech. Rep. ID Code

5 Counter

6 ROM Version

7 ADF Setting

8 Security Mode

G-17


SAFETY INFORMATION

(ALL Area)CAUTIONDanger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by themanufacturer.Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

(Denmark only)ADVARSEL!Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type.Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandøren.

(Norway only)ADVARSELEksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri.Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt avapparatfabrikanten.Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner.

(Sweden only)VARNINGExplosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas avapparattillverkaren.Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.

(Finland only)VAROITUSParisto voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. HävitäKäytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.

GENERAL

1. SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1

2. SPACE REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4

3. PRECAUTIONS FOR INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5

4. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-6

5. HANDLING OF SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-7

6. SYSTEM OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-8

7. PARTS IDENTIFICATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-9

8. CONTROL PANEL KEYS AND INDICATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-118-1. Basic Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-118-2. System Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-138-3. Supplementary Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-148-4. Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-158-5. User’s Choice Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-168-6. Tech. Rep. Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-17


1. CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-1

2. COPY PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-2

3. DRIVE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-4

4. SEQUENTIAL EXPLANATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-5

5. WATCHDOG (CPU OVERRUN MONITOR) FUNCTION . . . . . . . M-85-1. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-85-2. Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-85-3. Watchdog Function Post-Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-9

6. IMAGE STABILIZATION SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-116-1. Overview of the Image Stabilization System . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-116-2. AIDC Sensor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-13

7. PC DRUM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-237-1. PC Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-237-2. Drive and Grounding for the PC Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-237-3. Drum Dehumidifying Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-24

CONTENTS

i

8. DRUM CHARGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-258-1. PC Drum Charge Corona . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-258-2. Control of the PC Drum Charge Corona . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-268-3. Ozone Filter (PC Drum Charge Corona) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-27

9. OPTICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-289-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-289-2. Exposing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-299-3. Exposure Lamp Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-309-4. Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-349-5. Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage Moving Mechanism . M-359-6. Scanner Motor M2 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-359-7. Lens Drive Mechanism/Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-399-8. 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage Positioning Mechanism/Control . . . M-44

10. ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-4810-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-4810-2. Original Size Detecting Sensors (PC115 to PC119) . . . . . . M-49

10-2-1. Construction of Each Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-4910-2-2. Original Detection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-5010-2-3. Sensor Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-51

10-3. Original Size Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-5210-3-1. Size Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-5210-3-2. Original Size Detection Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . M-53

10-4. Original Size Detection Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-54

11. IMAGE ERASE LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-5511-1. Image Erase Lamp LA2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-5511-2. Image Erase Lamp LA2 ON/OFF Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-56

11-2-1. ON/OFF Control Data Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-5611-2-2. Leading Edge Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-5611-2-3. Edge Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-5711-2-4. Trailing Edge Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-5911-2-5. Center Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-5911-2-6. 2-in-1 Erase. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-60

11-3. Image Erase Lamp LA2 Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-61

12. DEVELOPING UNIT/HOPPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-6212-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-6212-2. Developing Unit Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-6312-3. Developer Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-6412-4. Magnetic Pole Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-65

CONTENTS

ii

12-5. Developing Bias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-6712-6. ATDC Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-6812-7. Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Mechanism/Control . . . . . M-7112-8. Sub Hopper Toner Empty Detecting Mechanism/Control . . M-7212-9. Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Mechanism/Control . . . . M-7512-10. Swinging Out/In the Main Hopper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-77

13. PAPER TAKE-UP/FEED SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-7813-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-7813-2. Paper Take-Up Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-7913-3. Paper Take-Up Roll Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-80

13-3-1. Normal Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-8013-3-2. Paper Take-Up Retry Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-8113-3-3. Double Feed Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-82

13-4. Paper Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-8313-4-1. 1st/2nd Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-8313-4-2. Positioning and Locking of the Paper Drawer . . . . M-8413-4-3. Drawer-in-Position Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-85

13-5. Paper Separating Mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-8613-6. Paper Empty Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-8713-7. Paper Dehumidifying Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-8813-8. Manual Bypass Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-89

13-8-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-8913-8-2. Paper Take-Up Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-9013-8-3. Take-Up/Feed Rolls Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . M-9113-8-4. Manual Bypass Take-Up Roll Control . . . . . . . . . . . M-9213-8-5. Manual Bypass Paper Separating Mechanism. . . . M-9313-8-6. Manual Bypass Paper Empty Detection . . . . . . . . . M-94

14. VERTICAL PAPER TRANSPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-9514-1. Construction of Vertical Transport Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-9514-2. Vertical Transport Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-9614-3. Vertical Transport Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-9714-4. Detection of Right Upper Door in Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-98

15. SYNCHRONIZING ROLLERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-9915-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-9915-2. Synchronizing Roller Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-10015-3. Synchronizing Roller Drive Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-10115-4. Prevention of Low Image Density on Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-102

CONTENTS

iii

16. IMAGE TRANSFER/PAPER SEPARATOR CORONAS. . . . . . . . M-10416-1. Construction of Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas

Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-10416-2. Description of Image Transfer and Paper Separation. . . . . M-10516-3. Ozone Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-10616-4. Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas Control . . . . . . . M-107

17. CLEANING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-10817-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-10817-2. Cleaning Blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-109

17-2-1. Cleaning Blade Pressure Mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . M-10917-2-2. Cleaning Blade Moving Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . M-109

17-3. Spent Toner Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-11017-3-1. Toner Conveying/Collecting Mechanism. . . . . . . . . M-11017-3-2. Detection of Toner Collecting Box in Position . . . . M-111

17-4. PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-11317-4-1. Paper Separator Finger Swinging Mechanism . . . M-11317-4-2. Paper Separator Finger Front-to-Back Moving

Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-11417-4-3. PC Drum Paper Separator Finger Control . . . . . . . M-115

17-5. AIDC Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-11617-6. Cleaning Bias (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-117

18. MAIN ERASE LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-11818-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-11818-2. Main Erase Lamp LA3 ON/OFF Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-118

19. PAPER TRANSPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-12019-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-12019-2. Transport Section Release Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-12019-3. Suction Belt Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-12119-4. Suction Fan Motor M4 Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-122

20. FUSING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-12320-1. Construction and Drive Train . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-12320-2. Fusing Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-12420-3. Fusing Rollers Pressure Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-12420-4. Fusing Roller Cleaning Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-12520-5. Paper Separator Fingers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-12620-6. Fusing Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-127

CONTENTS

iv

21. EXIT UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-13121-1. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-13121-2. Exit Unit Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-13121-3. Exit/Duplex Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-132

21-3-1. Switching Mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-13221-3-2. Switching Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-132

21-4. Paper Exit Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-13321-4-1. Paper Exit Detection Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-13321-4-2. Exit Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-133

21-5. Detection of Left Upper Door in Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-134

22. TOTAL COUNTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-13522-1. Total Counter CT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-13522-2. Detection of Total Counter in Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-13622-3. CT1 Count-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-136

23. POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-137

24. MEMORY BACKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-141

CONTENTS

v

SAFETY INFORMATION

(ALL Area)CAUTION

Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the same or equivalent typerecommended by the manufacturer.Dispose of used batteries accordingto the manufacturer’s instructions.

(Denmark only)ADVARSEL!

Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri

af samme fabrikat og type.Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandøren.

(Norway only)ADVARSEL

Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri.Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende

type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten.Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens

instruksjoner.

(Sweden only)VARNING

Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent

typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens

instruktion.

(Finland only)VAROITUS

Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan

tyyppiin. Hävitä Käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeidenmukaisesti.

1 CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW

5 6 7 81

18

21

22

17

10 11 12 13 14

19

20

92 3 4 1615

23

25

24

26

27

28293031

35

32

33

38

34

37

39

36

1. 3rd Mirror 2. 2nd Mirror 3. 1st Mirror 4. Exposure Lamp LA1 5. Original Size Detecting Sensor

CD1 PC115 6. Original Size Detecting Sensor

CD2 PC119 7. Lens 8. Main Erase Lamp LA3 9. Cleaning Blade10. PC Drum Charge Corona11. PC Drum12. Dust-Proof Glass13. 6th Mirror14. Image Erase Lamp LA215. Sleeve/Magnet Roller16. 4th Mirror17. 5th Mirror18. Synchronizing Roller19. Transport Roller

20. Manual Bypass Feed Roll21. Manual Bypass Take-Up Roll22. Multi Bypass Table23. Manual Bypass Separator Roll24. Upper Vertical Transport Roller25. 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Roll26. Lower Vertical Transport Roller27. 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Roll28. Image Transfer Corona29. Paper Separator Corona30. Suction Belt31. Fusing Thermoswitch TS132. Lower Fusing Roller33. Upper Fusing Roller34. Fusing Heater Lamp H135. Fusing Paper Separator Finger36. 1st Paper Exit Roller37. 2nd Paper Exit Roller38. Exit/Duplex Switching Guide39. Oil Roller

M-1

10

2 3

4

5 1 9

13 12 11 8 7 MANUAL BYPASSTABLE

6 1. PC DRUM2. DRUM CHARGING3. IMAGE ERASE4. EXPOSURE5. DEVELOPING6. PAPER FEEDING7. IMAGE TRANSFER

8. PAPER SEPARATION9. CLEANING10. MAIN ERASE11. TRANSPORT12. FUSING13. PAPER EXIT

2 COPY PROCESS

1. PC DrumThe PC Drum is an aluminum cylinder coated with a photosensitive semiconductor.It is used as the medium on which a visible developed image of the original isformed.

(For more details, see p. M-23.)

2. Drum ChargingThe PC Drum Charge Corona Unit is equipped with a single wire and a ScorotronGrid to deposit a uniform negative charge across the entire surface of the PC Drum.


3. Image EraseAny areas of charge which are not to be developed are neutralized by lighting upLEDs.


4. ExposureLight from the Exposure Lamp reflected off the original is guided to the surface ofthe PC Drum and reduces the level of the negative charges, thereby forming anelectrostatic latent image.


5. DevelopingToner positively charged in the Developer Mixing Chamber is attracted onto theelectrostatic latent image changing it to a visible, developed image. A DC negativebias voltage is applied to the Sleeve/Magnet Roller to prevent toner from beingattracted onto those areas of the PC Drum which correspond to the backgroundareas of the original.


M-2

6. Paper FeedingPaper is fed either automatically from the 1st or 2nd Drawer, or manually via theManual Bypass Table (capacity 50 sheets of paper). Each Drawer has fingers thatfunction to separate the top sheet of paper from the rest at take-up.The Manual Bypass Table has a Separator Roll that functions to separate the topsheet of paper from the rest at take-up.


7. Image TransferThe single-wire Image Transfer Corona Unit applies a DC negative corona emissionto the underside of the paper, thereby attracting toner onto the surface of the paper.


8. Paper SeparationThe single-wire Paper Separator Corona Unit applies an AC corona emission to theunderside of the paper to neutralize the paper. In addition, mechanical paperseparation is provided by the two PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers fitted to theImaging Unit.


9. CleaningResidual toner on the surface of the PC Drum is scraped off by the Cleaning Blade.


10. Main EraseLight from the Main Erase Lamp neutralizes any surface potential remaining on thesurface of the PC Drum after cleaning.


11. TransportThe paper is fed to the Fusing Unit by the Suction Belts.


12. FusingThe developed image is permanently fused to the paper by a combination of heatand pressure applied by the Upper and Lower Fusing Rollers.


13. Paper ExitAfter the fusing process the paper is fed out by the Paper Exit Roller onto the ExitTray.


M-3

The Main Drive Motor provides drive for the entire mechanism of the copier. To help minimize operating noise, timing belts and plastic gears are used inlarge numbers for the drive train parts.

3 DRIVE SYSTEM

Upper Fusing RollerDrive Gear

1st Paper ExitRoller Drive Gear

Cleaning Roller Drive Gear

Suction Unit Drive Gear

Main Drive Motor Gear

Synchronizing Roller Clutch Gear

PC Drum Drive Gear

Manual Bypass Take-UpClutch Gear

1st Drawer PaperTake-Up Drive Gear

Upper VerticalTransport RollerDrive Gear

Lower Vertical Transport Roller Drive Gear

2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Drive Gear

2nd Paper Exit Roller Drive Gear

Developing Section Drive Gear

Toner Conveying Coil DriveGear (on PC Unit)

Transport Roller Clutch Gear

1136M002AA

M-4

ON

4 SEQUENTIAL EXPLANATION

*1

DC Power Supply Unit PU1 outputs DC24V for Dehumidifyingheating.

ON

ON

H2, H3OFF

Only when DrumDehumidifying Switch S3 andPaper Dehumidifying SwitchS12 are ON

Drum DehumidifyingHeater H3Paper DehumidifyingHeater H2

ON

B Power Switch S1 is turned ON.

A The power cord is plugged into the outlet.

PU1 outputs DC24V and DC5V.ON

Power Supply Board PWB-C outputs DC24V.(DC24V line: ON)

ON

Master Board PWB-A outputs DC4.7V and DC12V.ON

Control panel displayON

Approx. 1 sec. ONFusing Heater Lamp H1

Suction Fan Motor M4 turns at half speed.ON

The Lens is detected at the home position.

The Mirror is detected at thehome position.

The Scanner makes its initial motion.

The Lens is detected at thefull size position.

The Mirror is detected atthe full size position.

For details, seeOPTICAL SECTION.

The surface temperature of the Upper Fusing Roller reaches 175°C.

Main Drive Motor M1 and Original Glass Cooling Fan MotorM5 start predrive.

ON

M4 turns at full speed.ON

Developing Bias / Paper Separator CoronaON

Approx. 100 msec. ONImage Erase Lamp LA2

Approx.200 msec.

ONPC Drum ChargeCorona / Image TransferCorona

Main Erase Lamp LA3To ➀ on next page

M-5

*2

➀

After the lapse of 30 sec. or 15 sec.

* 30 sec. if the Upper Fusing Rollersurface temperature is less than 165°Cwhen S1 is turned ON and 15 sec. if thesurface temperature is 165°C or higher.

Approx. 50 msec. OFFPC Drum Charge Corona / ImageTransfer Corona

Approx. 290 msec. OFFLA2

Approx. 410 msec. OFFM1 / M5

LA3

Approx. 150 msec. OFFDeveloping Bias /Paper SeparatorCorona

Approx. 5 sec. M4 turns at half speed.

C The Start Key is pressed. (A4 crosswise paper fed from 1st Drawer, full size, single copy cycle)

The components are energized in order of *1 on the preceding page.

LA3ON

Approx. 210 msec. Exposure Lamp LA1

Paper Transport Clutch CL1ON

1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Solenoid SL2ON

Approx. 100 msec. SL2

Paper Leading Edge Detecting Sensor PC55 is blocked ( L ).

Approx. 110 msec. CL1

D PWB-A outputs a LOW SCAN signal to SCP Board PWB-J.

The Scanner initiates a scan motion.

A LOW Image Leading Edge signal is input to PWB-A.

LA2ON

Approx. 140 msec. LA2 ... Leading edge erase

ON

OFF

OFF

M-6

E PWB-J outputs a LOW TRON signal to PWB-A.

CL1ON

Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL2ON

Approx. 395 msec. ONSeparator Solenoid SL1

Approx. 265 msec. ONSL1

F PWB-J outputs a LOW SCEND signal to PWB-A.

Approx. 200 msec.

SCAN signal: H ... The Scanner stops and starts a return motion.

Approx. 243 msec.OFF

LA1

G The trailing edge of the paper moves past Transport Roller Sensor PC54(unblocked: H ).

Approx. 5 msec. OFFCL1

H The trailing edge of the paper moves past Paper Leading Edge DetectingSensor PC55 (unblocked: H ).

Approx. 210 msec. OFFCL2

I The trailing edge of the paper moves past Paper Exit Switch S53 (ON: H ).

The components are deenergized in order of *2 on the precedingpage.

M-7

5 WATCHDOG (CPU OVERRUN MONITOR) FUNCTION

5-1. Overview

The watchdog function monitors whether any of the CPUs mounted in thecopier overrun. If this function detects that a CPU overruns, the copierautomatically resets the CPU, thereby restarting the logic circuit andmechanism.

Even if a copier CPU operates erratically due to electrical noise, therefore,the copier is able to recover from the faulty condition so that the number ofvisits made by the Technical Representative for CPU overrun can beminimized.

5-2. Configuration

The copier has three printed-circuit boards each on which a CPU is mounted:* SCP (Scanner Control Processor) Board PWB-J that controls the optical

system;* MSC (Macro System Controller) Board PWB-B that controls the control

panel and system; and,* Master Board PWB-A which controls the copier, Paper Feed Cabinet and

Duplex Unit.In addition to these, each of the control boards for the Data Controller,Duplexing/Automatic Document Feeders, and Sorter/Staple Sorter isequipped with a CPU.

The watchdog functions are summarized as follows:* Each of the copier CPUs monitors whether or not it overruns.* The PWB-B monitors the communications conditions of the CPUs in the

Duplexing/Automatic Document Feeder and Data Controller. * The PWB-A monitors the communications conditions of the CPUs in the

Sorter and Staple Sorter.* The control boards for the Paper Feed Cabinet and Duplex Unit do not

have a CPU in them. Instead, the PWB-A in the copier controls theiroperations.

Data Controller

Control Board

Duplexing/Automatic Document Feeder

Control Board (PWB-A)

Copier

SCP Board PWB-J

MSC Board PWB-B

Master Board PWB-A

Paper Feed Cabinet, Duplex Unit

Sorter, Staple Sorter

Control Board (PWB-A)

Board on which aCPU is mounted

=

M-8

5-3. Watchdog Function Post-Processing

The following processing is performed if a faulty condition is detected in theCPU. The Watchdog Counter available from the Tech. Rep. mode allows theTechnical Representative to check if any faulty conditions has occurred inthe CPU. For details, see SWITCHES ON PWBs.

Faulty CPU Processing (in Standby) Processing (during Copy Cycle)

Copier

Sorter,Staple Sorter

1 : The CPU is automatically reset (i.e.,shutting down power to all CPUsincluding those on the options) assoon as a faulty CPU is detected.

1: Same as 1 on the left.

2: Since the paper is leftinside the copier, thecopier detects a misfedsheet of paper or twowhen power is turnedON again. If the MSCCPU is faulty, however,all paper in line for theexit will be ejected andall paper headed to theduplex will be stored,before restarting theCPU.

1 : When the CPU malfunctions, thecommunication to Master BoardPWB-A of the copier is cut off orfaulty data is transmitted to thePWB-A.

2 : The PWB-A detects that the CPU ofthe Sorter or Staple Sorter is faulty.

3 : The PWB-A notifies MSC BoardPWB-B that the CPU of the Sorter orStaple Sorter is faulty.

4 : As commanded by the PWB-B,Option Relay RY4C is turned OFFand ON to restart the option.

5 : The communication line from theCPU of the Sorter or Staple Sorter toPWB-A is recovered.

6 : PWB-A notifies PWB-B that the CPUof the Sorter or Staple Sorter hasrecovered from the faulty condition.

1 : Same as 1, 2, and 3 onthe left.

2 : The paper take-upsequence is stopped.

3 : All sheets of paperbeing fed through thecopier are fed out ofthe copier.


M-9

Faulty CPU Processing (in Standby) Processing (during Copy Cycle)

Other thanabove

1 : When the CPU malfunctions, thecommunication to MSC BoardPWB-B of the copier is cut off orfaulty data is transmitted to thePWB-B.

2 : PWB-B detects that the CPUmalfunctions.

3 : As commanded by the PWB-B,Option Relay RY4C is turned OFFand ON to restart the option.

4 : The communication line from theCPU to PWB-B is recovered.

5 : PWB-B detects that the CPU hasrecovered from the faulty condition.

1 : Same as 1 and 2 onthe left.

2 : The paper take-upsequence is stopped.

3 : All sheets of paperbeing fed through thecopier are fed out ofthe copier.


M-10

6 IMAGE STABILIZATION SYSTEM

6-1. Overview of the Image Stabilization System .

◆ The following image stabilization controls are provided to ensurestabilized copy image.

Quality Purpose Control

FF or F5Operation

Image density,gradation

To make an initialadjustment of gridvoltage (V0) andoptimum ExposureLamp voltage.

• After making the variationadjustment and contaminationcorrection for the AIDC Sensor,the copier produces asolid-black and halftone patternand, through AIDC Sensorcontrol, sets the initial values forthe grid voltage and optimumExposure Lamp voltage.

RegularCorrection

Image density To compensate forany drop in imagedensity due to adeteriorating PCDrum.

• After making the AIDC Sensorcontamination correction, thecopier produces a solid-blackpattern and, through AIDCSensor control, corrects the gridvoltage.

Gradation To compensate forany drop in theintensity of LA1light due to acontaminatedoptical system.

• After making the AIDC Sensorcontamination correction, thecopier produces a halftonepattern and, through AIDCSensor control, corrects theoptimum Exposure Lampvoltage.

Foggybackground

To keep a giventoner-to-carrierratio of thedeveloper in theDeveloper MixingChamber.

• The copier provides tonerreplenishing control throughATDC Sensor control.

One-ShotCorrection (When thePowerSwitch isturned ON)

Image density,gradation

To compensate forany drop in surfacepotential of the PCDrum uponpower-up in themorning.

• After making the AIDC Sensorcontamination correction, thecopier produces a solid-blackand halftone pattern and,through AIDC Sensor control,corrects the grid voltage andoptimum Exposure Lampvoltage.

M-11

◆ The following is the block diagram of the image stabilization system.

TonerReplenishing

Original Width ScaleOriginal Glass

Halftone Patch

ExposureLamp LA1

Image EraseLamp LA2

AIDC

(UN3)

EE

PU2

PWB-A

CPU

ATDC(UN4)

HV1

(PWB-H)

M-12

6-2. AIDC Sensor Control

• There are five processes performed as the AIDC Sensor control:

AIDC Sensor variation adjustment Optimum Exposure Lamp voltagecorrection (Exposure correction)

AIDC Sensor contamination correction AE Sensor gain adjustment

Grid voltage (VG) correction

◆ Control of Each Process

[1] AIDC Sensor Variation Adjustment

This adjustment is made since the regular current control cannot coverpart-to-part variations in the AIDC Sensor (installation, circuit,deterioration, etc.).

[Control] • The AIDC Sensor LED is turned ON to illuminate the erased surface on the

PC Drum.

• The 4-bit analog switch selects the load resistance.

• The output current from the AIDC Sensor goes through the load resistanceselected in step (2) and the resultant voltage is applied to Master BoardPWB-A.

• The load resistance is switched so that the above voltage becomes 1 V orless, at which time, the analog switch setting is fixed.

M-13

[2] AIDC Sensor Contamination Correction

If the Sensor is dirty with toner, it results in an error being produced in theAIDC Sensor output value. The intensity of the AIDC Sensor LED light istherefore varied.

[Control] • The AIDC Sensor LED is turned ON to illuminate the erased surface on the

PC Drum.

• The output voltage from the AIDC Sensor is applied to Master BoardPWB-A.

• The current that flows through the AIDC Sensor LED is varied so that theabove output voltage becomes 1V. When 1V is obtained, the pulse signalis fixed.

1136C01M

M-14

[3] Grid Voltage (VG) Correction

The following five different types of controls are provided for VG correction.The Machine checks the T/C Ratio before the Controls (1), (2), (3) and (4).In case of the detected T/C Ratio is within the Level (∗ 1) Controls (1), (2),(3) and (4) will not run.

∗ 1: Min. (Setting Level on the Service Mode: 4.5% to 8%) − 2%Max. 7%

(1) The grid voltage is adjusted at the initial setup or when the PC Drum hasbeen replaced with a new one.

[Control]• Master Board PWB-A outputs a pulse signal to obtain a grid voltage of

550 V when the first F5 or FF test operation is run after the DrumCounter has been cleared.

• With Exposure Lamp LA1 turned OFF, Image Erase Lamp LA2 is keptOFF for a given period of time to produce a solid-black pattern.

• The AIDC Sensor output voltage is applied to PWB-A.

• The grid voltage is varied so that the above voltage becomes 4.2 V ormore, thereby setting the pulse signal for VG.

(2) The correction is made to compensate for any drop in the surfacepotential of a deteriorating PC Drum.

[Control] • Whenever the cumulative time over which the PC Drum has turned

exceeds the level equivalent to 400 copies, PWB-A outputs a pulsesignal for the voltage corrected last at the end of the last copy cycle forthe above event.

• With LA1 turned OFF, LA2 is kept OFF for a given period of time toproduce a solid-black pattern.


• The grid voltage is varied so that the above voltage falls within therange between 4.2 V and 4.4 V, thereby setting the pulse signal for VG.

(3) The correction is made to compensate for any drop in the surfacepotential of a cold PC Drum immediately after the copier is turned ON inthe morning.

[Control]• During predrive after the Power Switch has been turned ON, PWB-A

outputs a pulse signal for the voltage corrected last.



• The grid voltage is varied so that the above voltage becomes 4.2 V ormore, thereby setting the pulse signal for VG.

M-15

(4) The one-shot correction is canceled as the inside temperature of thecopier rises.

[Control] • Upon completion of the copy cycle for every 100 copies made after the

Power Switch has been turned ON, PWB-A outputs a pulse signal forthe corrected voltage before one-shot correction.



• These operations are repeated at every 100 copies made until theabove voltage becomes 4.2 V or more. If, however, 600 or more copiesare made or a standby period of 120 minutes or more elapses after thePower Switch has been turned ON, the one-shot correction is canceled.

(5) A correction is made by increasing the grid voltage by 30 V each time thecumulative time over which the PC Drum has turned exceeds 2,800minutes if the copier has previously determined that the AIDC Sensor isfaulty.

1136C02M

M-16

[4] Optimum Exposure Lamp Voltage Correction (Exposure Correction)

The following five different types of controls are provided for the optimumExposure Lamp voltage correction. The Machine checks the T/C Ratiobefore the Controls (1), (2), (3) and (4). In case of the detected T/C Ratiois within the Level (∗ 1) Controls (1), (2), (3) and (4) will not run.

∗ 1: Min. (Setting Level on the Service Mode: 4.5% to 8%) − 2%Max. 7%

(1) The optimum Exposure Lamp voltage is adjusted at the initial setup orwhen the PC Drum has been replaced with a new one.

[Control]• PWB-A outputs a pulse signal to obtain an optimum Exposure Lamp

voltage of 58 V when the first F5 or FF test operation is run after theDrum Counter has been cleared.

• LA1 is turned ON to illuminate the halftone patch on the back of theOriginal Width Scale and LA2 is kept OFF for a given period of time toproduce a halftone pattern.


• The Exposure Lamp voltage is varied according to the differencebetween the above voltage and the target median. (This is done bychanging the pulse signal for the Exposure Lamp voltage.)

(2) The correction is made when the F5 test operation is run after theExposure Lamp has been cleaned or the SCH-70 (Exposure Lampvoltage adjustment) setting changed.

[Control] • When the second or subsequent F5 test operation is run, PWB-A

outputs a pulse signal for the Exposure Lamp voltage set at the lastexposure correction.



• The Exposure Lamp voltage is varied according to the differencebetween the above voltage and the target median. (This is done bychanging the pulse signal for the Exposure Lamp voltage.)

M-17

(3) The correction is made to compensate for any drop in the reducedintensity of LA1 light occurring due to a contaminated optical system.

[Control]• Whenever the cumulative time over which the copier has run exceeds

the level equivalent to 5 K copies, PWB-A outputs a pulse signal for theExposure Lamp voltage corrected last at the end of the last copy cyclefor the above event.



• The Exposure Lamp voltage is varied so that the above voltage will fallwithin the target range. (This is done by changing the pulse signal forthe Exposure Lamp voltage.)

(4) A correction is made for the intensity of LA1 light equivalent to thechanges made in VG by one-shot correction.

[Control] • After VG has been corrected in one-shot correction, PWB-A outputs a

pulse signal for the Exposure Lamp voltage set at the last exposurecorrection.



• The Exposure Lamp voltage is varied so that the above voltage will fallwithin the target range. (This is done by changing the pulse signal forthe Exposure Lamp voltage.)

M-18

(5) When the copier has found that the AIDC Sensor is faulty, the intensity ofLA1 light is increased by 1V each time the time over which the copier hasrun exceeds 700 minutes. The intensity of LA1 light is also varied inproportion to the changes made in grid voltage varied according to thecumulative time over which the PC Drum has turned.

1136C03M

M-19

[5] AE Sensor Gain Adjustment

The following two different types of controls are provided for the AESensor gain adjustment.

(1) The AE Sensor gain is adjusted when the F5 or FF test operation is run.

[Control]• When the F5 or FF test operation is run, the Exposure Lamp is turned

ON to illuminate a blank sheet of paper placed on the Original Glasswith an optimum Exposure Lamp voltage.

• The AE Sensor output voltage is applied to PWB-A.

• The AE Sensor gain is varied so that the above voltage becomes 1.8 V±0.05, thereby setting the pulse signal for the gain.

• The Exposure Lamp is turned ON to illuminate the halftone patch on theback of the Original Width Scale with the optimum Exposure Lampvoltage.

• The AE Sensor output voltage is applied to PWB-A and stored inmemory.

(2) The AE Sensor gain is corrected as necessary according to the ExposureLamp voltage changed as a result of "exposure correction."

[Control] • After the "exposure correction" has been made, the Exposure Lamp is

turned ON to illuminate the halftone patch on the back of the OriginalWidth Scale with the optimum Exposure Lamp voltage.

• The AE Sensor output voltage is applied to PWB-A.

• The AE Sensor gain is adjusted so that the above voltage becomes thevoltage value stored in memory when F5 was run.

M-20

◆ Control Processing Timing

➀ : AIDC Sensor variation adjustment➁ : AIDC Sensor contamination correction➂ : VG correction ➃ : Exposure correction➄ : AE Sensor gain adjustment

Processing

Condition Timing ➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄

When F5 orFF testoperation isrun (Initialsetting)

At the initial setup, orwhen the first F5 orFF test operation isrun after the PCDrum has beenreplaced.

O O O O O

The second orsubsequent F5 testoperation is runwhen the SCH-70(Exposure Lampvoltage adjustment)setting is changed orthe Exposure Lampcleaned.

O O − O O

Regularcorrection

The cumulative timeover which the PCDrum has turnedreaches a levelequivalent to 400copies.

If furthercorrectionisnecessary after ➁

O O

If VG hasbeenvaried by➂

If theexposurelevel hasbeenvaried by➃

The cumulative timeover which thecopier has runreaches a levelequivalent to 5 Kcopies.


O − O


When thePowerSwitch isturned ON

During predrive afterthe Power Switchhas been turned ON(one-shot correction).


O O

If VG hasbeenvaried by➂


The copier has made100 copies after thePower Switch hasbeen turned ON.


O O − -

O: Performed −: Not performed

M-21

Processing

Condition Timing ➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄

When theAIDCSensor isfaulty

The grid voltage isincreased by 30 Veach time thecumulative time overwhich the PC Drumhas turned reaches2,800 minutes.

− − −∗ 1

−∗ 2 O

The optimumExposure Lampvoltage is increasedby 1 V each time thecumulative time overwhich the copier hasrun reaches 700minutes.

− − − −∗ 3 O

∗ 1: VG is corrected, not by the AIDC Sensor, but according to the time overwhich the PC Drum has turned.

∗ 2: If VG has been corrected by ∗ 1, the corresponding exposure level is alsochanged.

∗ 3: The optimum Exposure Lamp voltage is corrected, not by the AIDCSensor, but according to the time over which the copier has run.

O: Performed −: Not performed

M-22

7 PC DRUM7-1. PC Drum

* The photoconductive drum used in this copier is the organicphotoconductor (OPC) type.

* The drum is made up of two distinct, semiconductive materials on analuminum alloy base. The outer of the two layers is called the ChargeTransport Layer (CTL), while the inner layer is called the ChargeGenerating Layer (CGL).

* The PC Drum measures φ80 mm × 350 mm.

Handling Precautions• This photoconductor exhibits greatest light fatigue after being exposed to

light over an extended period of time. It must therefore be protected fromlight by a clean, soft cloth whenever the PC Unit has been removed fromthe copier.

• Further, use utmost care when handling the PC Drum to prevent it frombeing contaminated.

PC Drum

7-2. Drive and Grounding for the PC Drum

* When the PC Unit is slid into the copier, the Coupling Gear, driven by atiming belt and gear from Main Drive Motor M1, is engaged with the flangeof the PC Drum. This connects the drive train for the PC Drum.

* The PC Drum is grounded to the frame of the copier through the GroundPoint inside the rear of the PC Drum and the Drum Holding Shaft. Whenthe PC Unit is slid into the copier, the Drum Holding Shaft contacts theGround Point inside the PC Drum. This provides for assured grounding ofthe PC Drum. Conductive grease has been applied to the Ground Point.

ConductiveGrease

Ground Plate

Drum Holding Shaft

Ground Point

Coupling GearDrive Gear

PC DrumCross-Sectional View

CTLCGL

AluminumCylinder

M-23

7-3. Drum Dehumidifying Heater

• Drum Dehumidifying Heater H3 is located under the Lower SynchronizingRoller. It is a panel heater that prevents condensation from forming on thesurface of the PC Drum.

• H3 operates when:* The power cord is plugged into the wall outlet.* Power Switch S1 is in the OFF position.* Drum Dehumidifying Switch S3 is in the ON position.

Lower Synchronizing Roller

Drum DehumidifyingHeater H3

Drum DehumidifyingSwitch S3

1136C05M

M-24

8 DRUM CHARGING

8-1. PC Drum Charge Corona

• The PC Drum Charge Corona in this copier is equipped with a ScorotronGrid which ensures that a DC negative charge is evenly deposited acrossthe entire surface of the PC Drum.

• The grid voltage applied to the Grid Mesh of the PC Drum Charge Coronais varied to compensate for any drop in V0 which could occur with age orunder low temperatures in the morning. This ensures stabilized imagequality. (For more details, see "6. IMAGE STABILIZATION SYSTEM.")

• The Constant-Voltage Circuit in High Voltage Unit HV1 maintains the gridvoltage in the range between DC-550V and DC-850V according to the GridControl pulse (PWM) output from Master Board PWB-A.

PC DrumCharge Corona

Grid Mesh

1136M005AA

HV1PWB-A

<How Scorotron Works>

Constant-VoltageCircuit

Vc

ICHV1

PC

1136M161AA

When High Voltage Unit HV1 turnsON, a corona emission from theCorona Wire begins.

A grid voltage according to the GridControl pulse is being applied to theGrid Mesh.

Since there is a potential differencebetween the Grid Mesh and PC Drum,the negative charges of the coronaemission flow through the Grid Meshto the surface of the PC Drum. Thisresults in the surface being negativelycharged.

When the potential of the Grid Meshbecomes equal to that of the PC Drum(i.e., when the potential of the PCDrum becomes the grid voltage set bythe Grid Control pulse), the negativecorona current flows from the GridMesh through HV1 to the ground.

Constant-VoltageCircuit

Vc

ICHV1

PC

M-25

1136T30MCA

Image Erase Lamp(LA2)

Approx.50msec.

Approx. 200msec.

H

L

ONOFF

ONOFF

Paper Exit Switch (S53)

PC Drum Charge/ImageTransfer Coronas

8-2. Control of the PC Drum Charge Corona

• The PC Drum Charge Corona is turned ON and OFF by the DrumCharge/Image Transfer Corona ON signal output from pin 83 (BPA5) ofIC4A. The Grid Control pulse signal is output after the Power Switch hasbeen turned ON.

<Operation>The Image Erase Lamp LA2 MODE signal is output.

Approx. 200 msec. later

The Drum Charge/Image Transfer Corona output from High Voltage UnitHV1 is turned ON.

Paper Exit Switch S53 is actuated (when the trailing edge of the papermoves past S53).

Approx. 50 msec. later

The Drum Charge/Image Transfer Corona output from HV1 is turned OFF.

The HIGH Drum Charge/Image Transfer Corona ON signal is output frompin 83 (BPA5) of IC4A.

Master Board PWB-A

The LOW Drum Charge/Image Transfer Corona ON signal is output frompin 83 (BPA5) of IC4A.

Master Board PWB-A

M-26

1136C06M

8-3. Ozone Filter

• Ozone produced by the PC Drum Charge Corona is absorbed by theOzone Filter, as the air is drawn out of the copier by Suction Fan Motor M4through the Duct located to the left of the PC Drum Charge Corona.

PC Drum ChargeCorona

Ozone Filter

Suction FanMotor M4

Duct

M-27

9 OPTICAL SECTION

9-1. Construction

• As the Scanner is moved by Scanner Motor M2, the light from ExposureLamp LA1 is reflected off the original and guided through the six Mirrorsonto the surface of the PC Drum to form the electrostatic latent image.

1

2

5 76

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

43

1. Scanner Reference PositionSensor PC81

2. Original Glass Cooling FanMotor M5

3. Scanner4. Lens5. Scanner Motor M26. Scanner Shaft7. Mirror Motor M78. 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage9. 4th Mirror

10. 5th Mirror11. 6th Mirror12. Lens Motor M613. AE Sensor Board PWB-H14. Exposure Lamp LA115. 1st Mirror16. 2nd Mirror17. 3rd Mirror18. 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage

M-28

9-2. Exposing

2Book 3

Original Glass

1st Mirror6

5

4

1

1. Auxiliary Reflector : The Auxiliary Reflector reflects light onto the areas thatExposure Lamp LA1 cannot illuminate when an originalthat does not lie flat on the Original Glass (such as abook) is being used. It functions to reduce shadowswhich would otherwise be transferred to the copy.

2. Intensity CorrectionMirror

: The intensity of the light emitted by LA1 remains flat.The intensity is slightly attenuated at the very ends,which is corrected by the Intensity Correction Mirrorsfitted on the front and rear ends of the Scanner.

3. Aperture Plates : The four Aperture Plates regulate the amount of LA1light illuminating the original surface.

4. Exposure LampThermal Fuse TF2 : Exposure Lamp Thermal Fuse TF2 becomes electrically

open (blows) if the temperature in the area surroundingthe Main Reflector exceeds 128°C, thus cutting off thecircuit to LA1.

5. Main Reflector : The Main Reflector ensures that light from LA1 exposesall areas of the original.

6. Exposure Lamp LA1 : This copier uses a halogen frost lamp for ExposureLamp LA1. Its light distribution characteristics keep theintensity of the light remaining flat.

M-29

9-3. Exposure Lamp Control

• The voltage applied to Exposure Lamp LA1 is controlled by changing theduty ratio of the pulse width of the Exposure Lamp Control signal (AVRPWM) output from Master Board PWB-A.

• For possible contamination of the Optical System and to incorporate anycorrection made in the grid voltage, the copier automatically varies theoptimum intensity of the Exposure Lamp light and adjusts AE Sensorgain to ensure stabilized image quality. (See "6. IMAGESTABILIZATION SYSTEM.")

1136T31MCB

<To lower the image density, the Lamp voltage is increased>

t

H

L

T<To raise the image density,

the Lamp voltage is reduced.>

t' (t<t')

t' (t>t')

Period T - Pulse Width t

Period TDuty Ratio (%) =

(1) Automatic Exposure Control<Overview>• The copier is provided with the Auto Exposure mode in which the

voltage applied to Exposure Lamp LA1 is automatically increased ordecreased as necessary so that copies of consistent quality areproduced regardless of whether, for example, the original has a darkbackground or is a pencil line drawing.

• AE Sensor Board PWB-H (beside the Lens) measures the intensity ofthe light reflected off the 3rd Mirror, which results in the black/white ratioof an area of 210 mm (W) × 6 mm (L) of the original being measured. Asthe original is being scanned in the Auto Exposure mode, PWB-Hsenses the image density of the original (or the intensity of the lightreflected) on a real-time basis.

• In this mode, the copier either increases or decreases the ExposureLamp voltage according to the difference between the AE Sensor outputand reference voltage during the period between when the ImageLeading Edge signal (BASE) is output and when LA1 is turned OFF.

Original

3rd Mirror

AE Sensor Board PWB-H

Exploded View

3rd Mirror Surface of Original

210mm6mmScan Direction

A Given Distance

SlitAE SensorBoard PWB-H This area corresponds to a

210-mm-wide band across the original.

M-30

A pulse signal is sent from pin 17 (P50/TA1) of IC1A to light up LA1 for thecenter manual exposure setting (EXP5). A LOW Exposure Lamp ON signalis output from pin 49 (APA1) of IC4A.

Master Board PWB-A

<Operation>

The pulse signal is input to pin 3 of PJ19 and PU2 sets the Lamp voltageaccording to that signal.

Power Supply Unit PU2

LA1 turns ON.

During the copy cycle, a LOW Image Leading Edge signal (BASE) is outputand the automatic exposure control begins.

PD1H detects the intensity of the light striking it and PWB-H converts thelight intensity to a corresponding voltage value, outputting it via pin 7 ofIC1H. (The higher the intensity of the light striking PD1H, the lower theoutput voltage.)

AE Sensor Board PWB-H

The analog voltage from PWB-H is input to pin 1 (AN0) of IC1A.

PWB-A compares the input voltage with the reference voltage andincreases the Lamp voltage if the input voltage is higher than the reference,and decreases it if the input is lower than the reference. This isaccomplished by varying the duty ratio of the pulse signal output from pin17 (P50/TA0) of IC1A.

Master Board PWB-A

* The reference voltage value varies depending on the "Auto Expo. Level"setting of the User’s Choice. It also depends on the optimum ExposureLamp voltage under that setting.

Optimum Exposure Lamp Voltage 56V or Less 57V to 63V 64V or More

Choice

Lighter 1.45 1.53 1.59

Normal 1.80 1.80 1.80

Darker 2.15 2.07 2.01

(Unit: V)

M-31

(2) Manual Exposure Control• When either one of the Exposure Control Keys on the control panel is

pressed, it sets the copier into the Manual Exposure mode. In this mode,the copier permits the user to vary the Lamp voltage (i.e. the exposurelevel) in nine different steps.

<Operation>

Press the Exposure Control Key as necessary.

The exposure level data is sent from the control panel to IC1A via MSCBoard PWB-B through MINET communications.

The exposure level data is then converted in IC1A to a pulse signal andoutput from pin 17 (P50/TA0) of IC1A. A LOW Exposure Lamp ON signal isoutput from pin 49 (APA1) of IC4A.

Master Board PWB-A

The pulse signal is input to pin 3 of PJ19. According to this signal, PU2sets the Lamp voltage (which can be varied in nine steps according to theexposure setting.)

Power Supply Unit PU2

The intensity of the light emitted by Exposure Lamp LA1 becomes greater orsmaller accordingly.

(3) Exposure Lamp LA1 ON/OFF Control◆ Exposure Lamp ON Timing

• Exposure Lamp LA1 is turned ON T msec. after the PC Drum ChargeCorona and Image Transfer Corona have been turned ON following thepress of the Start Key. The Lamp ON timing varies for each differentpaper source.

• During a multi-copy cycle, LA1 is turned ON again approx. 90 msec.after it has been turned OFF.

◆ Exposure Lamp OFF Timing• LA1 is turned OFF approx. 243 msec. after the SCEND signal, which is

being input to Master Board PWB-A from SCP Board PWB-J, has gonefrom HIGH to LOW.

1136T32MCA

PC Drum Charge Corona/Image Transfer Corona

Approx. 243msec.Tmsec.

H

L

ONOFF

SCEND Signal

Exposure Lamp LA1

Approx. 90msec.

2nd Copy1st Copy

ONOFF

M-32

1136C07M

M-33

9-4. Intensity Correction

(1) Because of the nature of the Lens, the intensity of the Exposure Lamplight after passing through the Lens tends to be higher at the center andlower towards both ends. To solve this problem, there is a Lens ApertureCover installed at the back of the Lens. It limits the amount of light at thecenter to ensure that an even amount of light strikes the surface of thePC Drum.

(2) When a zoom ratio is large, it results in the intensity of light striking thesurface of the PC Drum decreasing. To correct the varying intensity ofthe light striking the surface of the PC Drum in different zoom ratios, theLamp voltage is increased according to the set zoom ratio in the ManualExposure mode and a correction is made for the AE Sensor input voltageto increase the Lamp voltage in the Auto Exposure mode.

Zoom RangeManual Exposure Correction

CoefficientAuto Exposure Correction

Coefficient

Lamp Voltage (V) Equivalent Lamp Voltage (V)

0.500~0.549 +2 +2

0.550~0.949 +1 +1

0.950~1.099 ±0 ±0

1.100~1.399 +1 +1

1.400~1.749 +2 +2

1.750~2.000 +4 +4

M-34

9-5. Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage Moving Mechanism

• The Scanner and the 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage are driven by ScannerMotor M2 through the Scanner Drive Cable, gears and timing belt.

• Both the Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage slide along the ScannerShaft in the rear of the copier. While at the front end, there is a SlideCollar attached to each of the bodies and that Collar slides over theSlide Rail. The speed of the Scanner varies with different zoom ratios(150.0 mm/second in the full size mode).

• Scanner Reference Position Sensor PC81 detects the home position ofthe Scanner. It determines the reference position for the scan motion.

Scanner ReferencePosition Sensor PC81

Scanner Motor M2

Rear

2nd/3rd MirrorsCarriage

Front

Collar

Scanner

Scanner Shaft

9-6. Scanner Motor M2 Control

<Overview>• A DC servomotor is used for Scanner Motor M2. The pulse width

modulation, or PWM, control is employed in which the average voltage iscontrolled by varying the width of the Scanner drive pulse which is thevoltage input to the Motor.

• A photosensor and a pulse disk are built into M2. Their function is toconvert the Motor shaft speed into the corresponding series of pulses.This pulse signal is input to SCP Board PWB-J.

• PWB-J then calculates the Motor speed using the period of the pulsesignal applied to it and controls the Scanner drive pulse which is to beapplied to the Motor. This effectively stabilizes the Motor speed.

• The pulse signal applied to PWB-J is also used to determine thedistance over which the Scanner should travel. This distance isrepresented by the number of pulses corresponding to each paper sizeand zoom ratio.

M-35

<Scan/Return Switching and Braking of Scanner Motor M2>• Scanner Motor M2 is turned forward to move the Scanner in the scan

direction, turned backward to move the Scanner in the return direction,or braked by the Motor Forward and Motor Backward signals input frompins 13 and 15 of IC3J on SCP Board PWB-J. Details are as follows.

Motor Forward Signal(Pin 13 of IC3J)

Motor Backward Signal(Pin 15 of IC3J)

Turns Forward H L

Turns Backward L H

Braked (in Scan Motion) L H

Braked (in Return Motion) H L

• The brake control in the return motion is provided as follows, since M2builds up its speed to the maximum level during the return motion. TheMotor Backward signal is first alternated between HIGH and LOW statesto reduce the input voltage to M2 to a low level. After M2 is deceleratedto a given speed through this operation, the above brake control isperformed.

1136T33MCB

Motor Forward Signal (Pin 13 of IC3J)

Deceleration BrakingBraking

Forward Rotation (Scan)

Backward Rotation (Return)

Motor Backward Signal (Pin 15 of IC3J)

Scanner Motor M2

<Scanner Speed Control>• The speed of Scanner Motor M2 is controlled by varying the width of the

Scanner drive pulse which is output from pin 38 of IC2J on SCP BoardPWB-J. (This means that the current flowing through M2 is varied.)

Scanner Drive Pulse (Pin 38 of IC2J) Output Waveform

High-SpeedRotation

Low-SpeedRotation

Period T

Pulse Width t 1136T34MCA

Period T

Pulse Width t' 1136T35MCA

M-36

<Scan/Return Motion>◆ These are the signals used during the scan and return motion:

• ENABLE signal : Input from the master CPU to SCP. Enables the operation ofeach load of the optical system when LOW and disables theoperation of all loads when HIGH.

• SCAN signal : Input from the master CPU to SCP and requests a scan motionwhen LOW.

• BASE signal : Input from the SCP to master CPU and indicates the imageleading edge position. Serves also as the reference for settingthe scan length.

• TRON signal : Input from the SCP to master CPU and controls the start of theSynchronizing Roller when LOW.

• SCEND signal : Input from the SCP to master CPU and gives an advance noticeof the completion of a scan motion when LOW.

• SHOME signal : Input from Scanner Reference Position Sensor PC81 to SCPand detects the Scanner at the home position when LOW.Serves also as the reference for a scan motion.

◆ Here is the timing chart for scan and return motions.

SCEND Signal

Lens/Mirrors Motion

TRON Signal

BASE Signal

SCAN Signal

ENABLE Signal

Scanner ReferencePosition Sensor PC81

Scanner Motor M2

Scan Speed

Move MoveInitial Operation

Scan Return Scan Return

1

23

1136T48MCA

∗ 1 : The LOW BASE signal is output after a given distance is traveled after thePC81 output has gone HIGH.

∗ 2 : The LOW TRON signal is output after the lapse of a given period of time pluscorrection [A-4 (Lens Full Size Position Adjustment), A-5 (Lens PositionReduction Registration), and A-11 (Lens Position Enlargement Registration)of Adjust Mode] after the BASE signal has gone LOW.

∗ 3 : The LOW SCEND signal is output approx. 200 msec. before the Scanningfinish.

M-37

1136C08M

M-38

9-7. Lens Drive Mechanism/Control

(1) Lens Drive Mechanism• The Lens is moved by the Lens Drive Cable to which drive is transmitted

from Lens Motor M6.• A two-phase stepping motor is used for M6. The Motor is turned forward

or backward by the pulse signals output from SCP Board PWB-J, thusmoving the Lens in either the reduction or enlargement direction.

• When a zoom ratio is selected, pulse signals from PWB-J are input tothe Lens Motor. The Motor’s shaft turns 7.5° per step, which isequivalent to approx. 0.2 mm of linear Lens movement.

Lens

Shaft

Lens Moving Plate

Roll

Lens PositionCorrection Cam

Lens Holder

Lens

Lens ReferencePosition Sensor PC90

Lens Motor M6

• In this copier, registration for the original is determined at the rear leftcorner, while that for the PC Drum is at the front side. For this reason,there is a Lens Position Correction Cam that moves the Lens slantwise.

• The Lens Moving Plate moves linearly on a shaft, while the Lens Holderis movable on the Lens Moving Plate.

• The one roll of the Lens Holder is fitted in the groove of the LensPosition Correction Cam via slits in the Lens Moving Plate. This meansthat the Lens Holder moves along a curved trajectory which is drawn bythe Lens Position Correction Cam, though the Lens Moving Plate makesa linear motion.

M-39

(2) Lens Reference Position Detection• Lens Reference Position Sensor PC90 is used to detect the Lens at the

reference position when the copier is turned ON.• The Lens should be at the reference position when the Sensor output

goes from LOW (enlargement side) to HIGH (reduction side). The Lensmoves from this position a distance equivalent to the correction [AdjustMode A-1 (Lens Full Size Position Adjustment)] to arrive at the full sizeposition.

◆ Operation When Power is Turned ON• When the Lens is located on the enlargement side (PC90 is LOW)

➀ Lens Motor M6 turns forward to move the Lens in the reduction direction.

➁ M6 stops and starts turning backward when the PC90 output goes from LOW to HIGH.

➂ After being driven 32 steps from when the PC90 output goes from HIGH to LOW, M6 stops and starts turning forward.

➃ M6 stops turning when the PC90 output goes from LOW to HIGH. (The Lens is now at the home position.)

➄ The Scanner makes the initial motion.

➅ After the Scanner has completed the initial motion, M6 starts turning backward to move the Lens in the enlargement direction.

➆ After being driven 100 steps from when the PC90 output goes from HIGH to LOW, M6 stops and starts turning forward.

➇ After being driven 200 steps, M6 stops and starts turning backward.

➈ After being driven 32 steps from when the PC90 output goes from HIGH to LOW, M6 stops and starts turning forward.

➉ M6 temporarily stops turning when the PC90 output goes from LOW to HIGH.

11 M6 starts turning forward again and moves the Lens a distance equivalent to the correction. It then stops. (The Lens is now at the full size position.)

• When the Lens is located on the reduction side (PC90 is HIGH)

➀ M6 turns backward to move the Lens in the enlargement direction.

➁ The subsequent operations are the same as those in ➂ to 11 above.

M-40

◆ Operation When Zoom Ratio is Changed• For a reduction ratio

M6 is driven through the number of steps according to the setting ofAdjust Mode A-1 to move the Lens in the reduction direction.

• For an enlargement ratioM6 is driven through the number of steps according to the setting ofAdjust Mode A-1 plus 32, to move the Lens in the enlargement direction.M6 is then driven another 32 steps to move the Lens in the reductiondirection.

NOTES: • To enhance Lens positioning accuracy, the Lens is alwaysbrought to the full size position from the enlargement side. Thiscompensates for the error produced by backlash in the drivegears and part-to-part variations in the Lens Moving Plate.

• The operations from ➅ through ➉ are performed to check forpossible binding of the Lens moving mechanism. (Theseoperations are not performed when the Front Door is closed.)

Scanner Initial Operation

Forward Rotation

2

34

2 1 Backward Rotation

34

5

76

9

10

8

Home Position(PC90)

Reduction Direction(PC90 HIGH)

Enlargement Direction(PC90 LOW)

1

11 Full SizePosition 1136T37MCB

1136T37MCA

M-41

(3) Lens Motor M6 Control

• Lens Motor M6 has four Coils, each being energized or deenergized in agiven sequence (sequence of pulse signals output from pins 2, 7, 10,and 15 of IC5J on SCP Board PWB-J) to determine the direction ofrotation.

• When M6 is turned forward (reduction direction), the outputs from pins 2,7, 10, and 15 are in the order of step 4, step 3, step 2, and step 1.

• When M6 is turned backward (enlargement direction), the outputs fromthese pins are in the order of step 1, step 2, step 3, and step 4.

1136H48MCA

IC5JOperation Order

Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4

Pin 2

Pin 7

Pin 10

Pin 15

Lens Moving in Reduction Direction.

L L H H

H L L H

H H L L

L H H L

Lens Moving in Enlargement Direction.

ForwardRotation

BackwardRotation

M-42

1136C09M

M-43

9-8. 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage Positioning Mechanism/Control

(1) 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage Positioning Mechanism

• To ensure that a focused image of the original is reproduced on thesurface of the PC Drum when in an enlargement or reduction mode, thedistance between the original and the surface of the PC Drum(conjugation distance) must be greater than that when in the full sizemode. To accomplish this, the 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage is moved in thedirection of a greater conjugation distance (+ direction).

• The 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage is moved by the rack gear fitted to the4th/5th Mirrors Guide Plate, which is in mesh with the pinion gear. MirrorMotor M7 gives drive to this pinion gear.

• M7 is a two-phase stepping motor. The Motor is turned forward orbackward by the pulse signals output from SCP Board PWB-J, thusmoving the Carriage in the required direction.

• When a zoom ratio is selected, pulse signals from PWB-J are input toM7. The Motor’s shaft turns 7.5° per step, which is equivalent to approx.0.09 mm of linear Mirrors Carriage movement.

Mirror Motor M7

4th/5th MirrorsGuide Plate

Mirror Reference Position Sensor PC86

+ Direction− Direction

PinionGear M7

Rack Gear 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage

(2) 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage Reference Position Detection

• Mirror Reference Position Sensor PC86 detects the home position of the4th/5th Mirrors Carriage when the power is turned ON.

• The 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage is at the home position when the PC86output goes from LOW (− side) to HIGH (+ side). The carriage movesfrom this position a distance equivalent to the correction [Adjust ModeA-2 (Mirror Full Size Position Adjustment)] to arrive at the full sizeposition.

M-44

◆ Operation When Power is Turned ON

• When the 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage is located on the + side (PC86 is HIGH)

➀ After the Lens has been detected at its home position, Mirror Motor M7 turns backward to move the 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage in the − direction.

➁ M7 stops and starts turning forward when the PC86 output goes from HIGH to LOW.

➂ M7 stops turning when the PC86 output goes from LOW to HIGH. (Thecarriage is now at the home position.)

➃ The Scanner makes the initial motion.

➄ After the Lens has been detected at its home position, M7 turns forward100 steps before stopping and then starting to turn backward.

➅ After being driven 3 steps from when the PC86 output goes from HIGH toLOW, M7 stops and starts turning forward.

➆ M7 temporarily stops turning when the PC86 output goes from LOW toHIGH.

➇ After the Lens has been detected at the full size position, M7 startsturning forward again and moves the carriage a distance equivalent tothe correction. It then stops. (The carriage is now at the full size position.)

• When the 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage is located on the − side (PC86 is LOW)

➀ After the Lens has been detected at its home position, M7 turns forwardto move the carriage in the + direction.

➁ The subsequent operations are the same as those in ➂ to ➆ above.

◆ Operation When Zoom Ratio is Changed

• For the + directionM7 turns forward the required number of steps before stopping.

• For the − directionM7 turns backward the required number of steps plus 3, then turnsforward 3 steps before stopping.

M-45

NOTES: • To enhance positioning accuracy, the 4th/5th Mirrors Carriage isalways brought to the full size position from the − side. Thiscompensates for the error produced by backlash in the drivegears.

• The operations from ➄ through ➆ are performed to check forpossible binding of the carriage moving mechanism. (Theseoperations are not performed when the Front Door is closed.)

Scanner Initial Operation

Forward Rotation 1

23

3

1 Backward Rotation

4

5

67

Reference Position(PC86)

Direction (PC86 HIGH)Direction (PC86 Low)

After Lens Has BeenDetected at Home Position

After Lens Has BeenDetected at Full Size Position

8Full SizePosition

1136T38MCB1136T38MCA

M-46

(3) Mirror Motor M7 Control

• Mirror Motor M7 has four Coils, each being energized or deenergized ina given sequence (sequence of pulse signals output from pins 2, 7, 10,and 15 of IC6J on SCP Board PWB-J) to determine the direction ofrotation.

• When M7 is turned forward (+ direction), the outputs from pins 2, 7, 10,and 15 are in the order of step 1, step 2, step 3, and step 4.

• When M7 is turned backward (− direction), the outputs from these pinsare in the order of step 4, step 3, step 2, and step 1.

1136H49MCA

IC6JOperation Order

Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4

Pin 2

Pin 7

Pin 10

Pin 15

Mirrors Moving in Direction.

L L H H

H L L H

H H L L

L H H L

Mirrors Moving in Direction.

ForwardRotation

BackwardRotation

NOTE: See "Lens Motor M6 Control" for circuit diagram (p. M-43).

M-47

10 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTING SYSTEM

10-1. Construction

Original Size DetectingBoard UN2

Original GlassCooling Fan

Original Cover AngleDetecting Sensor PC111

Original CoverAngle Detecting

Lever

Original SizeDetecting Sensor FD3

PC118 (Option)

Original Size DetectingSensor FD2 PC117

Original SizeDetecting Sensor

FD1 PC116

Size ResetSwitch S108

Control Panel

Original SizeDetecting Sensor

CD2 PC119(Option)

Original Size DetectingSensor CD1 PC115

M-48

10-2. Original Size Detecting Sensors (PC115 to PC119)

10-2-1. Construction of Each Sensor

• The original size detecting sensors determine the distance between thesensor and the original, which enables the detection of originals with highimage density (Original density up to 0.6).

• All sensors are fixed to the Optical Base Plate, enhancing measuringaccuracy. A movable sensor had a problem of false detection due to itsposition being moved.

• Each sensor has two LEDs and one photo receiver (PSD). Since the CD(crosswise) sensors (PC115, 119) are installed at a height different fromFD (feeding-direction) sensors (PC116, 117, 118), each type has adifferent setting distance as detailed below. CD sensors: Setting distance 115 mmFD sensors: Setting distance 60 mm

CD Sensor FD Sensor

PSDLED1

LED2 LED2

LED1PSD

• Each sensor has a built-in signal processing circuit that outputs 8-bit serialdata to Original Size Detecting Board UN2.

Regulator

SignalProcessingCircuit

Vcc

Sensor Drive Signal

Data Output

LED Selector Signal

GND

PSD

LED1

LED2

LED Drive Signal

4

3

1

5

2

1136M153CA

M-49

10-2-2.Original Detection Method

• When the photo receptor receives the reflected light of the two LEDs at anintensity that exceeds a predetermined level, the detection systemdetermines that an original is placed within the Setting Distance of theSensor.

Original

Original Glass

Setting Distance

Light Being Emitted

Light BeingReceived

M-50

10-2-3. Sensor Locations

• Three original size detecting sensors are located at the following places todetect originals of various sizes.

• Two additional sensors can be optionally installed to cover more originalsizes that can be detected.

(Metric Area) Standard: CD1 (PC115), FD1 (PC116), FD2 (PC117)Optional: CD2 (PC119), FD3 (PC118)

(Inch Area) Standard: CD1 (PC115), FD2 (PC117)Optional: FD1 (PC116), FD3 (PC118)

NOTE: If the optional sensors are installed, set Jumper Connector JP2 onUN2 as illustrated below and run the F7 operation.

Length (Inch) Letter C Letter L Legal 11" × 17"

FD3 (Option)FD 2FD 1

Width (Metric)

A5L

Width (Inch)

Legal,Letter L

Letter C,11" × 17"

Original Size Detecting Board UN2

L: Lengthwise;C: Crosswise

B5L

A4L

B4L, B5C

A3L, A4C

CD2 (Option) CD 1

Length (Metric) B5C A4C,A5L

B5L A4L B4L A3L

CN 1

JP 1

JP 2

CN 4

CN 3

CN 2LED 1 LED 2

FLS

Invoice

Position ofJP1

Position ofJP2

FD1 is notmountedFD1 is mounted

CD2 and FD3 arenot mounted

CD2 and FD3are mounted

M-51

10-3. Original Size Detection

10-3-1. Size Detection

• Original Size Detecting Board UN2 reads the output data provided by theoriginal size detecting sensors (PC115 to 119). By comparing the data fromeach sensor with the threshold level, it determines whether there is anoriginal placed on the Original Glass. UN2 then determines the size of theoriginal according to the combination of the data.

(Metric Area)

FD1 FD2 FD3 CD1 CD2

OriginalSize

Size Determinedby UN2 LED2 LED1 LED2 LED1 LED2 LED1 LED2 LED1

A3L A3T (A3L) O O O O(O) O(● ) O O O(O)B4L B4T (B4L) O O O O(O) O(● ) ● O ● (● )A4L A4T (A4L) O O O ● (● ) ● (● ) ● ● ● (● )A5L A5T (A5L) O ● ● ● (● ) ● (● ) ● ● ● (● )A4C A4Y (A4C) O ● ● ● (● ) ● (● ) O O O(O)Letter L:8-1/2" × 11" Letter L (Letter L) O O ● ● (● ) ● (● ) l ● ● (● )

11" × 17" 11" × 17" (A3L) O O O O(O) O(● ) O O ● (O)Legal:8-1/2" × 14" Legal (A4L) O O O O(● ) O(● ) ● ● ● (● )

FLS: 8-1/2" × 13" FLS (A4L) O O O O(● ) ● (● ) ● ● ● (● )

Letter C:11"×8-1/2" Letter C (A4C) O ● ● ● (● ) ● (● ) O O ● (O)

No Original No Original ● ● ● ● (● ) ● (● ) ● ● ● (● )

(Inch Area)

FD1 FD2 FD3 CD1

Original Size Size Determinedby UN2 LED2 LED1 LED2 LED1 LED2 LED1 LED2

11" × 17" 11" × 17" (11" × 17") O(O) O O O(O) O(O) O OLegal: 8-1/2" × 14" Legal (Legal) O(O) O O O(O) O(O) ● ●

Letter L: 8-1/2" × 11" Letter L (Letter L) O(O) O ● ● (● ) ● (● ) ● ●

Letter C: 11"×8-1/2" Letter C (Letter C) O(O) ● ● ● (● ) ● (● ) O OFLS: 8-1/2" × 13" FLS (Legal) O(O) O O O(O) ● (O) ● ●

Invoice:5-1/2" × 8-1/2" Invoice (No Original) O(● ) ● ● ● (● ) ● (● ) ● ●

No Original No Original ● (● ) ● ● ● (● ) ● (● ) ● ●

* O: Original Present ● : Original Not Present

* If no optional sensors are mounted, data is processed as indicated in ( )and the original sizes determined by UN2 are as indicated in ( ).

* UN2 does not use the data provided by LED1 of Original Size DetectingSensor FD1 (PC116) and LED2 of CD2 (PC119) for the determination ofthe original size.

* Any non-standard size is rounded off to the nearest standard size.

M-52

10-3-2. Original Size Detection Processing

• The copier performs different processing for the detection of the originalsize under different copier conditions as follows.

Copier Condition Original Size Detection Processing

1 The Original Cover is leftopen.

LEDs of Original Size Detecting Sensors PC115 to119 project light onto the original and the photoreceivers of the sensors receive the reflected light totransmit the corresponding data to Original SizeDetecting Board UN2.

UN2 determines the original size based on thecombination of the output data from the original sizedetecting sensors.

UN2 divides the original size data into two parts andtransmits 4-bit parallel data to Master Board PWB-Aapprox. every 73 msec.

PWB-A combines the 4-bit original size data back into8-bit data and stores it in memory.

* Original Cover AngleDetecting SensorPC111 remainsdeactivated.

2 The Original Cover islowered to an angle lessthan 15°.

The original size data is latched when PC111 isactivated and the original size is set.

* PC111 is activated.

3 The Original Cover iscompletely lowered.

The copier selects the appropriate paper size basedon the set original size data and selects the papersource loaded with paper of that size, with the papersize indicated on the control panel (when in the AutoPaper or Size mode).

If the copier is unable to find the target paper size, itlights up the Add Paper Indicator.

* The magnets fitted tothe Original Coveractuate Size ResetSwitch S108.

4 The Original Cover israised to an angle lessthan 15°

The set original size data and selected paper size arereset.

* S108 is deactuated.

* PC111 remainsactivated.

5 The Original Cover israised to an angle morethan 15°.

The copier proceeds with the next original sizedetection sequence.

* PC111 is deactivated.

* If the Start Key is pressed with the Original Cover raised (PC111 isdeactivated and S108 deactuated), UN2 transmits the original size dataavailable when the Start Key is pressed to Master Board PWB-A for theselection of the paper size.

M-53

10-4. Original Size Detection Circuit

1136C11M

M-54

11 IMAGE ERASE LAMP11-1. Image Erase Lamp LA2

Any areas of charge which are not to be developed along the leading,trailing, front, and rear edges are neutralized by lighting up 40 LEDs ofImage Erase Lamp LA2. This effectively prevents non-image areas frombeing dirtied and economizes on toner consumption.

PC Drum Charge Corona 6th Mirror

6th Mirror Filter

Image Erase Lamp LA2

PC Drum

M-55

11-2. Image Erase Lamp LA2 ON/OFF Control

11-2-1. ON/OFF Control Data Output

Master Board PWB-A outputs 32-bit ON pattern data (DATA) to ImageErase Lamp LA2 to turn ON and OFF particular LEDs of LA2.The ON pattern data is divided into four blocks of data (each 8 bits) outputevery 5 msec.

Signals sent from PWB-A are as follows:DATA: Indicates which LED to turn ON or OFF of LA2.

CLK: Synchronizing signal to transmit data serially.

MODE: Latches the LED ON/OFF data sent from PWB-A.

STROBE: Outputs the latched LED ON/OFF data to turn ON thecorresponding LEDs.

11-2-2. Leading Edge Erase

All LA2 LEDs are turned ON and kept ON for a given period time afterSCP Board PWB-J has generated an Image Leading Edge signal (BASE)to erase the image along the leadingedge.

The erase time varies depending on whether SCH-20 (Leading EdgeErase) of the Tech. Rep. Choice is set to "Erase" or "Not Erase" and onthe control panel setting. See Table below.

FunctionSCH-20 "Erase"

(4 mm) "Not Erase" FrameErase

Punch HoleErase

Normal File Margin Normal File Margin

EraseWidthSetting

10 15 20 10 15 20 10 10 15 20

ImageEraseWidth

4 14 19 24 0 10 15 20 10 10 15 20

Timer 140 205 240 275 115 180 215 250 180 180 215 250

Unit: Erase width = mm, Timer = msec.

M-56

11-2-3. Edge Erase

The 40 LEDs of LA2 are turned ON and OFF as follows according to thezoom ratio or paper size to erase unnecessary charges along both thefront and rear edges of the image.

∗ The LEDs are turned ON according to the paper size in the full size mode.∗ In any zoom ratio other than full size, LEDs are turned ON according to the

paper size or zoom ratio whichever causes more LEDs to light up.∗ LEDs are turned ON according to the zoom ratio in manual bypass

copying which circumvents paper size detection.

The 40 LEDs are classified into 32 groups as follows and they are turnedON or OFF by groups for edge erase.

Group No. LED No. ImageWidth (mm)

0 1 300

1 2 292

2 3 284

3 4 277

4 5 267

5 6 260

6 7 251

7 8 244

8 9 235

9 10 229

10 11 220

11 12 212

12 13 203

13 14 194

14 15 184

15 16 174

Group No. LED No. ImageWidth (mm)

16 17 166

17 18 158

18 19 150

19 20 142

20 21 153

21 22 126

22 23 116

23 24 107

24 25 99

25 26 93

26 27∼∼∼∼ 35 −−−−

27 36 −−−−

28 37 −−−−

29 38 −−−−

30 39 −−−−

31 40 −−−−

∗ Numbers are assigned to the LEDs so that the front LED is 40, looking atthe copier from the front.

∗ The "image width" refers to the unexposed image area between the LEDsnumbered from 1 to the corresponding opposite ones that are turned ON.

M-57

LA2 LEDs ON/OFF Pattern

ZoomRatio

PaperWidth(mm)

LED Group No.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 31

~99 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O100~107 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O108~116 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O117~126 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O127~135 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O136~142 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

~0.449 143~149 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O0.500~0.550 150~158 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O0.551~0.576 159~166 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O0.577~0.610 167~173 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O0.611~0.642 174~184 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O0.643~0.672 185~195 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O0.673~0.698 196~203 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O0.699~0.728 204~211 O O O O O O O O O O O O O0.729~0.758 212~220 O O O O O O O O O O O O0.759~0.776 221~229 O O O O O O O O O O O0.777~0.806 230~235 O O O O O O O O O O0.807~0.830 236~244 O O O O O O O O O0.831~0.854 245~251 O O O O O O O O0.855~0.882 252~258 O O O O O O O0.883~0.914 259~267 O O O O O O0.915~0.938 268~277 O O O O O0.939~0.964 278~284 O O O O0.965~0.990 285~292 O O O

0.991~ 293~298 O O

O = LED that turns ON

LA2 LEDs ON/OFF Pattern (Frame Erase, erase width 10 mm)

PaperWidth(mm)

LED Group No.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 30 31

~105 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O106~113 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O114~121 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O122~130 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O131~140 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O141~149 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O150~156 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O157~164 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O165~172 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O173~180 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O181~188 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O189~198 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O199~208 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O209~217 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O218~225 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O226~234 O O O O O O O O O O O O O235~243 O O O O O O O O O O O O244~249 O O O O O O O O O O O250~258 O O O O O O O O O O259~265 O O O O O O O O O266~272 O O O O O O O O273~281 O O O O O O O282~291 O O O O O O292~298 O O O O O299~ O O O O

O = LED that turns ON

M-58

11-2-4. Trailing Edge Erase

All LA2 LEDs are turned ON and kept ON for a given period time after thelapse of a certain time after SCP Board PWB-J has generated a SCENDsignal to erase the image along the trailing edge.

The erase start timing varies depending on whether SCH-21 (TrailingEdge Erase) of the Tech. Rep. Choice is set to "Erase" or "Not Erase" andon the control panel setting. See Table below.

FunctionSCH-20 "Erase"

(7 mm) "Not Erase" FrameErase

Punch HoleErase

Normal File Margin Normal File Margin

EraseWidthSetting

10 15 20 10 15 20 10 10 15 20

ImageEraseWidth

7 17 22 27 0 10 15 20 10 10 15 20

Timer 290 225 190 155 335 270 235 200 270 270 235 200

Unit: Erase width = mm, Timer = msec.

11-2-5. Center Erase

All LA2 LEDs are turned ON after the lapse of a certain time after SCPBoard PWB-J has generated an Image Leading Edge signal (BASE) toerase the image at the center of the paper.

The erase start timing varies for different paper sizes and erase widths asshown below. The erase time depends on the erase width.

Erase Start Timing

Paper Size A4C A4L A3L A5C B4L B5L B5C 8.5" 11" 17"

Paper Length 210 297 420 149 364 257 182 216 279 432

EraseStartTiming

10mm 800 1090 1500 600 1315 960 710 820 1030 1540

15mm 785 1075 1485 580 1300 940 690 805 1015 1525

20mm 770 1060 1470 565 1280 925 675 790 1000 1510

Unit: Paper Length = mm, Erase Start Timing = msec. L: Lengthwise; C: Crosswise

Erase Time

Erase Width Erase Time

10 mm 45 msec.

15 mm 80 msec.

20 mm 115 msec.

M-59

11-2-6. 2-in-1 Erase

When only a single original is placed on the Original Glass in the 2-in-1mode (using Duplexing/Automatic Document Feeder), the copier erasesthe area where no originals are present.

Different controls are provided depending on whether "Odd" is specifiedon the control panel for the number of originals to be used.

If "Odd" is specified, all LEDs are turned ON and kept ON for a givenperiod of time after SCP Board PWB-J has generated an Image LeadingEdge signal (BASE) to erase the first half page of the last original.


Paper Length 210 297 420 149 364 257 182 216 279 432

Erase Time 815 1105 1515 610 1330 970 720 835 1045 1555

Unit: Paper Length = mm, Timer = msec. L: Lengthwise; C: Crosswise

If "Odd" is not specified, all LEDs are turned ON after the lapse of a givenperiod of time after PWB-J has generated a BASE signal to erase the lasthalf page of the first original.


Paper Length 210 297 420 149 364 257 182 216 279 432

Timer 835 1125 1535 630 1350 990 740 855 1065 1575

Unit: Paper Length = mm, Timer = msec. L: Lengthwise; C: Crosswise

M-60

1136C12M

11-3. Image Erase Lamp LA2 Circuit

M-61

12 DEVELOPING UNIT/HOPPER

12-1. Construction

◆ Developing Unit• This copier employs the New Micro-Toning developing system which

supplies toner from the Developing Unit to the electrostatic latent image onthe surface of the PC Drum to form a visible, developed toner image of theoriginal.

One part of the Magnet Roller provides a very weak magnetic force, whicheffectively prevents developer from being compacted and clogging at theDoctor Blade.

Toner MixingScrew

Developer ConveyingScrew

Bucket RollerDoctor BladeToner Scattering

Prevention Plate

Sleeve/Magnet Roller

ATDC Sensor

◆ Hopper• Toner is supplied to the Developing Unit by turning the Toner Bottle to drop

toner down into the Sub Hopper. As Main Hopper Toner ReplenishingMotor M8 turns, toner in the Toner Bottle is fed to the Sub Hopper which, inturn, conveys the toner to the Developing Unit using the drive from SubHopper Toner Replenishing Motor M9.

Toner Bottle CouplingToner Bottle Home

Position Sensor PC35

Main Hopper TonerReplenishing Motor M8

Sub Hopper Toner EmptyDetecting Magnet

Toner Conveying ScrewSub Hopper Toner

Replenishing Motor M9

Sub Hopper TonerEmpty Detecting Lever

M-62

12-2. Developing Unit Drive Mechanism

• Drive is transmitted from the copier to the Developing Unit by CouplingGears 1 and 2 when they mesh with each other.

• Coupling Gear 2 is spring-loaded. If the protruding part of Coupling Gear 1makes contact with that of Coupling Gear 2 when the PC Unit is slid intothe copier, spring-loaded Coupling Gear 2 is pushed back toward the rearof the copier allowing the PC Unit to be slid into position. When drive islater transmitted to the Developing Unit, Coupling Gear 2 is pushed to thefront by the tension of the spring to mesh positively with Coupling Gear 1.

Drive from Main Drive Motor M1 is transmitted via Timing Belt B to Gear A.

Gear C is turned by Gear B, causing Coupling Gear 2 to turn clockwise.

Copier

As Coupling Gear 1 turns clockwise, the Bucket Roller mounted on thesame shaft as Coupling Gear 1 is turned.

Developing Unit

Gear D is turnedclockwise by anintermediate gear.

The Sleeve/MagnetRoller is turnedclockwise.

The Bucket Roller isturned clockwise.

Gears E and F areturned counterclockwiseby intermediate gears.

The DeveloperConveying and TonerMixing Screws areturned counterclockwise.

Developer Conveying ScrewToner Mixing Screw

Gear FGear E

Gear CGear B

Gear A

Timing Belt B

Main Drive Motor M1

Coupling Gear 2

Coupling Gear 1

Gear D


Bucket Roller

M-63

Toner is supplied through the TonerSupply Port from the Sub Hopper.

The Toner Mixing Screw agitates thetoner, while conveying it from the frontto the rear end of the Unit.

The Developer Conveying Screwmixes the toner with the developer,conveying them from the rear to thefront end.

The ATDC Sensor senses thetoner-to-carrier ratio of the developermixed and conveyed by the DeveloperConveying Screw.

The developer conveyed to the frontend of the Unit is then conveyed ontothe Bucket Roller.

The Bucket Roller agitates andtriboelectrically charges the developer,supplying it to the Sleeve/MagnetRoller.

Part of the developer fed to the rearend of the Unit by the Bucket Roller isguided back onto the DeveloperConveying Screw.

12-3. Developer Flow

• The developer and toner flow inside the Developing Unit as the TonerMixing Screw, Developer Conveying Screw, Bucket Roller, andSleeve/Magnet Roller are turned.

Sleeve/MagnetRoller

Bucket Roller

DeveloperConveying Screw

Toner Mixing Screw

ATDCSensorRear of

Copier

Toner Supply Port

Front of Copier

M-64

12-4. Magnetic Pole Positioning

• The Magnet Roller of the Sleeve/Magnet Roller of this copier has thefollowing magnetic characteristics.

N1 : The principal magnetic polehaving the strongest magneticflux density. Therefore, whentoner is attracted to the latentimage, the carrier is firmlyheld onto the Sleeve Roller.

S1, N2: The height of the developerbrush is held low so that thedeveloper can be smoothlyrecycled. These poles alsoprevent the developer fromscattering.

N3 : This pole causes thedeveloper bristles on thesurface of the Sleeve Roller tostand up straight so that theirheight will be regulated evenlyby the Doctor Blade.

S2a : Since the gap between N3and N1 is wide, this poleensures that the developer ispositively conveyed to thepoint of development.

S2b : This pole provides a veryweak magnetic force. Ifdeveloper is compacted andclogs at the Doctor Blade and,as a result, part of thesurfaces of theSleeve/Magnet Roller is notcovered with developer, thenearby developer around S2bgoes to those uncoveredsurfaces because of its weakmagnetic force. This helpsprevent blank lines fromoccurring on the copy.

Pole Having WeakMagnetic Force


UncoveredSurface

Areas of WeakMagnetic Force

Moving

Developer

M-65

• Since the Developing Unit and PC Drum are housed in the PC Unit in thiscopier, the Magnet Roller has been made movable: the Bushing is pressedby compression springs thereby pressing the Positioning Collars on bothends of the Magnet Roller against the PC Drum. This ensures a givendistance between the PC Drum and the Sleeve/Magnet Roller.

Movable Bushing

Compression Spring

Fixed Bushing

PC Drum Rear of Copier

M-66

12-5. Developing Bias

• A negative voltage (Vb = Developing Bias voltage) is applied to the SleeveRoller to prevent a foggy background on the copy. The amount of tonerattracted onto the surface of the PC Drum depends on how much lower thePC Drum surface potential (Vi) is than Vb (i.e., the potential difference).

• Because the Magnet Roller of this copier is movable, a flat spring is fittedto the Bias Terminal, allowing the Bias Terminal to follow the movement ofthe Magnet Roller.

◆ Here is the control timing chart.

Flat Spring

Bias Terminal

Sleeve/MagnetRoller

ONOFF

ONOFF

ONOFF

Start Key

Main Drive MotorM1

Developing Bias

Approx. 150msec.

1136T33MCA

1136C13M

M-67

Pin 1 of IC23A outputs an initial voltage when the F8 operation is started.

The output voltage from the ATDC Sensor is applied toAnalog Port AN1 of IC1A.

The output voltage from pin 1of IC23A is varied.The voltage is decreased ifthe input voltage is 2.5 V ormore.The voltage is increased ifthe input voltage is less than2.5 V.

The voltage is NOT 2.5 V.The voltage is 2.5 V.

The output voltage from pin 1 ofIC23A is fixed as the referencevoltage.

IC1A checks to see whether the voltage input to it is 2.5 V.

12-6. ATDC Sensor

◆ ATDC Sensor• ATDC Sensor UN4 installed on the underside of the Developer Mixing

Chamber detects the varying toner-to-carrier ratio of the developer,which is circulated by the Developer Conveying Screw, as changes inthe magnetic flux density. The magnetic flux density is converted to acorresponding voltage value which is applied to the analog port of IC1Aon Master Board PWB-A.

• IC1A compares the ATDC Sensor output voltage with the referencevoltage for 6% toner-to-carrier ratio [which can be varied by the ATDCDetection Level Mode (Tech. Rep. Choice SCH-90)] to control tonerreplenishment.

◆ ATDC Sensor Automatic Adjustment/Detection Circuit• The sensitivity of the ATDC Sensor is automatically adjusted to the

starter with a 6% T/C when the F8 test operation is run after fresh starterhas been loaded.

The ATDC Sensor sensitivity isadjusted to the initial starter T/C (6%).

The Sensor output voltage applied to IC1A is compared with the referencevoltage (2.5 V ±SCH-90 setting) and, if it is higher than the reference, SubHopper Toner Replenishing Motor M9 is energized.

M-68

1136C14M

Toner-to-C

arrierR

atio of Developer

LowN

ormal

High

3456

1 Reference W

ave2 O

utput Wave

1

2

Reference V

oltage

AT

DC

Output V

oltage

Set T/C Reference Voltage

4. 0 % 2. 943 V

4. 5 % 2. 825 V

5. 0 % 2. 717 V

5. 5 % 2. 608 V

6. 0 % 2. 500 V

6. 5 % 2. 391 V

7. 0 % 2. 283 V

7. 5 % 2. 174 V

M-69

◆ ATDC Sensor Control Sequence

➀ The ATDC Sensor reads the toner-to-carrier ratio data at the followingtiming to provide the basis for toner replenishing control:The ATDC Sensor takes the reading for a 500-msec. period at 5-msec.intervals 20 msec. after a LOW Image Leading Edge signal (BASE) fromSCP Board PWB-J has been input to Master Board PWB-A for each copymade.

➁ The mean value of the readings sampled is compared with the voltage(target value) corresponding to the T/C set by SCH-90 and the result isclassified as follows:

a) The mean value is lower than the target value and represents a T/Cratio that is higher than the set ratio by 1% or more.

b) The mean value is lower than the target value and represents a T/Cratio that is higher than the set ratio by less than 1%.

c) The mean value is higher than the target value and represents a T/Cratio that is lower than the set ratio by less than 0.5%.

d) The mean value is higher than the target value and represents a T/Cratio that is lower than the set ratio by 0.5% or more.

➂ Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M9 is energized for a period oftime which depends on the category (a to d) the result of sampling fits intoand the paper size being used.

Paper Size

b) Fixed AmountReplenishing

c) Small AmountReplenishing

d) Large AmountReplenishing

ReplenishingTime (msec.)



A3 220 500 2000

A4 110 250 1000

A5 55 125 500

B4 165 375 1500

B5 85 190 750

11" × 17" 215 485 1940

Legal 135 310 1235

Letter 105 245 970

Invoice 60 120 485

∗ a) No toner replenishing takes place.

M-70

After the ATDC Sensor detection

M9 is kept energized for a given periodof time. [A LOW Remote signal isoutput from pin 50 (APA2) of IC4A onPWB-A.]

Gear A mounted on the M9 shaft is turned counterclockwise.

Gear C is turned counterclockwise viaGear B.

The Toner Conveying Screw turnscounterclockwise, causing toner to fallinto the Toner Supply Port through theToner Supply Hole.

The Toner Mixing Screw then conveysthe toner fallen onto it to the rear endof the Developing Unit.

12-7. Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Mechanism/Control

• Toner supplied from the Main Hopper is temporarily kept in the Sub Hopperbefore being fed to the Developing Unit. This is done to stabilizereplenishing of toner and detection of a toner-empty condition.

• The toner replenishing time (the period of time during which Sub HopperToner Replenishing Motor M9 is kept energized) is determined according tothe ATDC Sensor output level (which varies in three steps).

From MainHopper

Toner EmptyDetecting Lever

TonerConveying

Screw

TonerSupplyHole Toner

SupplyPort

Toner MixingScrew Rear

Gear AGear B

Gear C

Sub HopperToner

Replenishing Motor M9

Toner MixingLever

Sub Hopper

1136M031AA

Front

1136C15M

M-71

12-8. Sub Hopper Toner Empty Detecting Mechanism/Control

• A toner-empty condition of the Sub Hopper is detected by the magnet fittedto the Sub Hopper Toner Empty Detecting Lever and Sub Hopper TonerEmpty Switch S106.

• The S106 ON signal is used to energize Main Hopper Toner ReplenishingMotor M8.

<Mechanism>• The Sub Hopper Toner Empty Detecting Lever rides over the eccentric cam

installed at the rear end of the Sub Hopper Toner Mixing Lever. When drivefrom M9 is transmitted to the Sub Hopper Toner Mixing Lever, the TonerEmpty Detecting Lever is moved up and down.

• When the amount of toner in the Sub Hopper remains more than thepredetermined level:Since the Toner Empty Detecting Lever is on the Toner, it does notmake an up-and-down motion, keeping S106 deactuated. Hence, thecopier does not determine that toner is empty.

• When the amount of toner in the Sub Hopper is less than thepredetermined level:The Toner Empty Detecting Lever is moved up and down by theeccentric cam, which repeatedly actuates and deactuates S106. WhenS106 is turned on continuously more than 10 times, the copierdetermines that toner is empty in the Sub Hopper.

Sub Hopper Toner EmptyDetecting Lever

Magnet

Sub Hopper TonerEmpty Switch S106

FrontSub Hopper TonerMixing Lever

EccentricCam

Rear

M-72

<Control>• Toner Empty Detection Control

The Sub Hopper toner empty detection sequence is carried out while SubHopper Toner Replenishing Motor M9 remains energized.

Sub Hopper Toner Empty Switch S106 is actuated.

A LOW Sub Hopper Toner Empty signal is input to pin 57 (APB1) of IC4A.

Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8 is energized to turn the TonerBottle one turn, thus replenishing toner from the Main Hopper to SubHopper.

A toner-empty condition is detected at the timing at which M9 is nextenergized.

The above operations are repeated and, if the Sub Hopper Toner Emptysignal does not go LOW even after the Toner Bottle has been turned tenturns, the Toner Bottle is not turned again.

The copier determines that there is a toner-empty condition in the SubHopper, lighting up the Add Toner Indicator on the control panel.

Master Board PWB-A

• Control After Toner Empty Detection

The Front Door is swung down, Toner Bottlereplaced, and the Front Door closed.

M8 is energized to turn continuously the Toner Bottle so that toner issupplied from the Main Hopper to Sub Hopper.

M9 is energized once and kept so for approx. 1.7 seconds for every threeturns of the Toner Bottle. The Sub Hopper toner empty detection sequenceis carried out a maximum eight times.

As soon as the signal from S106 goes HIGH, M8 is deenergized to stopthe Toner Bottle.

The Add Toner Indicator on the control panel goes out.

Master Board PWB-A

M-73

Toner Empty Detection

1136T34MCA

Sub Hopper TonerReplenshing Motor M9

TT

Toner Bottle Turned10 Turns

T:Time Over which Toner Bottle is Turned 1 Turn

Toner Empty Detection

ONOFF

L

TSub Hopper Toner

Empty Switch S106

ONOFF

Main Hopper TonerReplenshing Motor M8

After Toner Empty Detection

1136T35MCA

3 Times 3 Times

L

HFront Door Interlock

Switch S21

Main Drive Motor M1ON

OFF

Main Hopper TonerReplenshing Motor M9

ONOFF

Sub Hopper TonerReplenshing Motor M9

ONOFF

L

HSub Hopper Toner

Empty Switch S106

Add Toner Indicator.ON

OFF

1136C16M

M-74

12-9. Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Mechanism/Control

• When Sub Hopper Toner Empty Switch S106 is actuated, it energizes MainHopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8 to turn the Toner Bottle one turn,thereby supplying toner from the Main Hopper to Sub Hopper.

<Mechanism>

Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8 is energized.

The Home Position Detecting Plate on the M8 shaft is turned and, at thesame time, the Coupling is turned.

Since the two pins on the Toner Bottle fit into the slots in the Coupling, theCoupling and Toner Bottle are turned together.

When the indentation on the Toner Bottle moves past the protrusion on theToner Bottle Holder, the Toner Bottle is vibrated to prevent some of the tonerfrom remaining unconsumed in the Bottle.

Since the Toner Supply Port in the Toner Bottle is aligned with the TonerSupply Hole in the Coupling, toner in the Toner Bottle drops down as theSupply Hole becomes located at the bottom.

Toner Bottle

Toner Supply Port

Toner SupplyHole

Home PositionDetecting Plate

Main Hopper TonerReplenishing Motor M8

Coupling

Toner BottleHome PositionSensor PC35

Toner BottleHolder

Toner Bottle

M-75

<Control>• Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor PC35 ensures that the Toner Bottle is

stopped so that its Toner Supply Port is located at the top.

Sub Hopper Toner Empty Switch S106 is actuated.

Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8 is energized.

Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor PC35 is unblocked.

PC35 is blocked.

M8 is deenergized.

A LOW M8 ON signal is output from pin 51 (APA3) of IC4A.

Master Board PWB-A

A HIGH Non-Home Position signal is input to pin 56 (APB0) of IC4A. (Thismeans that M8 has turned.)

Master Board PWB-A

A LOW Home Position signal is input to pin 56 (APB0) of IC4A.

The M8 ON signal from pin 51 (APA3) of IC4A goes from LOW to HIGH.

Master Board PWB-A

1136C17M

M-76

12-10. Swinging Out/In the Main Hopper

• To replace an empty Toner Bottle, the user first needs to swing the TonerBottle Holder out 40° to the front. There is a flat spring installed on the SubHopper Holder, which causes the Toner Bottle Holder to click out of, andinto, the locked position.

• The Holder pivots about the Toner Supply Port as it is swung out or in,which effectively prevents toner from spilling when the Holder is swung outor in. The Coupling is provided with a locking mechanism that prevents theToner Bottle from turning when it is removed or installed.

<When the Toner Bottle Holder is in Position>• Since the flat spring fits into the front ^ notch of the Toner Bottle Holder,

the Holder is locked in position. At this time, the bottom of the CouplingLock Lever is pushed in by a part (∗ ) of the Sub Hopper, keeping theCoupling free.

Coupling LockLever

Flat Spring

Front

Toner Bottle Holder

Rear

∗

<When the Toner Bottle Holder is Swung Out>• The Toner Bottle Holder pushes the flat spring down and moves over it

until the flat spring then fits into the rear ^ notch. This locks the TonerBottle Holder in position. At this time, the Coupling Lock Lever is freeand the spring acts to lock the Coupling in position with the Lock Lever.

CouplingToner Bottle

Front

Flat Spring

Coupling LockLever

Rear

M-77

13 PAPER TAKE-UP/FEED SECTION

13-1. Construction

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9

10

11

12

13

14

151617181920

No. Name No. Name

1 1st Drawer 11 Lower Vertical Transport Roller

2 1st Drawer Paper Lifting Plate 12 2nd Drawer Paper Take-UpSensor Actuator

3 1st Drawer Paper Lifting Spring 13 2nd Drawer Paper Take-UpSensor PC57

4 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Roll 14 2nd Drawer Paper SeparatorFinger

5 1st Drawer Paper Empty SensorActuator 15 2nd Drawer Paper Lifting Spring

6 1st Drawer Paper Empty SensorPC101 16 2nd Drawer Paper Empty Sensor

Actuator

7 1st Drawer Paper Take-UpSensor PC56 17 2nd Drawer Paper Empty Sensor

PC102

8 Upper Vertical Transport Roller 18 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Roll

9 1st Drawer Paper Take-UpSensor Actuator 19 2nd Drawer Paper Lifting Plate

10 1st Drawer Paper SeparatorFinger 20 2nd Drawer

M-78

13-2. Paper Take-Up Roll

∗ Both for the 1st and 2nd Drawers, the Paper Take-Up Roll is semicircularwith the circular part of the Roll turned to the top at times other thantake-up. This prevents paper from being caught by the Roll when theDrawer is slid out of the copier.

∗ Each drawer has two Paper Take-Up Rolls. The position of the rear PaperTake-Up Roll must be changed according to the size of the paper loadedin the drawer. (For details of Roll positions, see "DIS/REASSEMBLY,ADJUSTMENT.")

∗ The Paper Take-Up Roll is grooved to keep good friction even underheavy loading.

∗ A small roll is built into one edge of the take-up Portion of the Roll. Itreduces stress otherwise applied to the paper as the Paper Take-Up Rollhits against the paper.

∗ Drive for the Paper Take-Up Rolls comes from Main Drive Motor M1 viathe timing belt and gear train. The Paper Take-Up Solenoid (1st Drawer:SL2; 2nd Drawer: SL3) and Spring Clutch control the turning of the PaperTake-Up Rolls.

Ratchet

Spring Clutch

Spring

Paper Take-Up RollPaper Take-Up Solenoid

Ratchet

Turning Direction

Roll Paper Take-Up Roll

M-79

13-3. Paper Take-Up Roll Drive Control

13-3-1. Normal Control

When the Paper Take-Up Solenoid signal from PWB-A (1st Drawer: pin11 of PJ12AA; 2nd Drawer: pin 11 of PJ12AB) drops from 24 V to 0 V, thePaper Take-Up Solenoid (1st Drawer: SL2; 2nd Drawer: SL3) is energizedto turn the Paper Take-Up Rolls one turn, taking up a sheet of paper fromthe Drawer. The Paper Take-Up Sensor (1st Drawer: PC56; 2nd Drawer:PC57) detects a sheet of paper which has been taken up from the Drawer.

Here is the control timing chart.<Feeding 3 Sheets of Paper>

1136T36MCB

100msec. 100msec.

5msec.5msec.

100msec.

ONOFF

ONOFF

ONOFF

ONOFF

ONOFF

Main Drive MotorM1

Paper TransportClutch CL1

Transport RollerSensor PC54

1st/2nd Drawer PaperTake-up Sensor PC56/57

1st/2nd Drawer PaperTake-up Solenoid SL2/3

1136C18M

M-80

13-3-2. Paper Take-Up Retry Control

To minimize occurrence of paper misfeed due to a slippery PaperTake-Up Roll, the Paper Take-Up Solenoid is energized a second time if asheet of paper fails to reach the Paper Take-Up Sensor within 1,325msec. after the Solenoid has first been energized. (This is called thepaper take-up retry function.)

A paper misfeed results if a sheet of paper does not reach the PaperTake-Up Sensor even after two paper take-up sequences.

Here is the control timing chart.

Upper/Lower VerticalTransport Roller

1st/2nd Drawer Paper Take/UpSolenoid SL2/3

Transport Roller SensorPC54

1st/2nd Drawer PaperTake/Up Sensor PC56/57

Approx. 100msec. Approx. 100msec.

Approx. 1,325msec. Approx. 1,250msec.

*2

1136T37MCA

ONOFF

ONOFF

ONOFF

ONOFF

*2: The copier determines that there is a paper misfeed if the Paper Take-UpSensor is not activated after the lapse of approx. 1,250 msec. after thepaper take-up retry motion.

M-81

13-3-3. Double Feed Control

Even if the Paper Take-Up Rolls take up two sheets of paper at one time,the double feed control uses the second sheet of paper for the next copycycle without causing a paper misfeed. It eliminates a paper misfeed thatwould otherwise result when two sheets of paper are taken up at once.

If the second sheet of paper is stationary, keeping the Paper Take-UpSensor (1st Drawer: PC56; 2nd Drawer: PC57) activated, when thetrailing edge of the first sheet of paper moves past Transport RollerSensor PC54, the copier determines that it is a double feed condition andprovides double feed control.

If, however, the second sheet of paper has reached the Vertical TransportRoller (paper feeding from the 1st Drawer: Upper; paper feeding from the2nd Drawer: Lower), the double feed control is not provided since thepaper is fed further into the copier by the Vertical Transport Roller. Thiscould result in a paper misfeed or the second sheet of paper being fedthrough the copier with the first one.

If double feed control is provided, it results in the paper take-up intervaltimer becoming longer. That means longer intervals between twosuccessive paper take-up motions, resulting in a decreased cpm(productivity).

Paper Path

Transport Roller SensorDetection Point

Transport Roller

Upper Vertical Transport Roller

1st Drawer Paper Take-UpSensor Detection Point

Lower Vertical Transport Roller

2nd Drawer Paper Take-UpSensor Detection Point

(Leading Edge Position of 2nd Sheet of Paper)

Double Feed Control

(Not Provided)

(Provided)Paper Feedingfrom 1st Drawer

(Not Provided)

(Provided)Paper Feedingfrom 2nd Drawer

1st/2nd Drawer PaperTake-Up clutch SL2/3

Transport Roller Seneor PC54

1st/2nd Drawer PaperTake-Up Sensor PC56/57

1136T38MCA

600msec.Paper Take-Up Interval Timer When Double Feed Control is Provided

ONOFF

ONOFF

ONOFF

Here is the control timing chart.

M-82

13-4. Paper Drawer

13-4-1. 1st/2nd Drawer

Each of the two paper drawers (1st and 2nd Drawers) can hold up to 500sheets of paper.

It is a fixed paper size type and the following steps must be performedwhen changing the paper size.

1. Change the positions of Edge Guides I and II and the Trailing Edge Stop.2. Change the type and positions of the Paper Lifting Springs under the

Paper Lifting Plate. (∗ 1, ∗ 3)3. Change the position of the Paper Take-Up Roll in the rear. (∗ 1)4. Enter the new paper size using the Paper Size Input mode under the

Tech. Rep. mode. (∗ 2)

∗ 1: For the detailed job steps, see "DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT."∗ 2: For the detailed job steps, see "SWITCHES ON PWBs."∗ 3: The type and positions of the Paper Lifting Springs are changed to

ensure better paper separation and prevent the Paper Lifting Plate fromflexing, thus eliminating the possibility of changing paper take-uppressure.

Trailing Edge Stop Edge Guide IIEdge Guide I

Paper Lifting Plate

Paper Lifting Springs

M-83

13-4-2. Positioning and Locking of the Paper Drawer

The drawer is positioned when its ribs fit into the slots in the rail locatedon the paper take-up end of the copier. See the illustration below.The drawer is locked into position when the magnet mounted in theMagnet Mounting Bracket is attracted by the metal plate fitted to thecopier frame. The drawer reference position is adjusted by moving theMagnet Mounting Bracket to the front or rear. For details, see"DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT."

Drawer Front Cover

Paper Drawer Rail on Copier

Copier Frame

Magnet Mounting Bracket

Drawer Front Cover

Magnet

Metal Plate

M-84

13-4-3. Drawer-in-Position Detection

When the drawer is slid into the copier, the flap of the Magnet MountingBracket blocks the Drawer Set Sensor (1st Drawer: PC61; 2nd Drawer:PC62) mounted on the metal plate that attracts the magnet. Then, thecopier determines that the drawer has been slid into position.

Drawer Front Cover

Magnet Mounting BracketDrawer Set Sensor

Metal Plate

1136C19M

M-85

13-5. Paper Separating Mechanism

Each drawer has Fingers that function to separate the top sheet of paperfrom the rest of the paper stack at paper take-up. The Fingers are fitted tothe right front and rear corners of the drawer. When the Paper Take-UpRolls start turning to take up the top sheet of paper, their turning force isdirectly transmitted to the top sheet of paper as it is in direct contact withthe Paper Take-Up Rolls. That force overcomes the block of the Fingers,causing the top sheet of paper to ride over the Fingers and be fed out ofthe drawer into the copier.As to the second sheet of paper, the paper transport force obtainedthrough friction with the top sheet of paper is weak and does not allow thesecond sheet of paper to ride over the block of the Fingers. Hence, thesecond sheet of paper remains stationary with the rest of the paper stackin the drawer.

When there are two sheets of paper left in the drawer, the bottom sheetcan be fed with the top one if the friction of the Paper Lifting Plate isweak. The Friction Plate affixed to the Paper Lifting Plate prevents thisfrom happening.

Paper Take-Up Roll

Paper

Separator Finger

Paper Lifting PlateFriction Plate

M-86

13-6. Paper Empty Detection

When the drawer runs out of paper, the Actuator for the Paper EmptySensor drops into the cutout in the Paper Lifting Plate. This activates thePaper Empty Sensor and the copier will know that the drawer has run outof paper.

The Paper Lifting Plate is raised at all times by the Paper Lifting Springs.To prevent the Actuator for the Paper Empty Sensor (1st Drawer: PC101;2nd Drawer: PC102) from being caught by the paper stack when thedrawer is slid out of the copier, therefore, it is tilted slightly. This,however, results in the operating stroke of the Actuator becoming small,which increases the possibility of the Actuator activating the Sensor bythe flexing of a sheet of paper as it is taken up and fed in. To prevent thisfalse detection of a paper-empty condition, the paper empty detection isenabled only when the Paper Take-Up Rolls are in the retracted position.

Paper Empty Sensor

Actuator

1136C20M

M-87

13-7. Paper Dehumidifying Heater

Paper Dehumidifying Heater H2 is mounted on the copier base frameunder the 2nd Drawer. It prevents the paper in the drawer from growingdamp in highly humid weather.

It works when the following conditions are met:∗ The power cord is plugged in the power outlet.∗ Power Switch S1 is in the OFF position.∗ Paper Dehumidifying Switch S12 is in the ON position.

Paper Dehumidifying Heater H2

Copier Base FramePaper Dehumidifying Switch S12

1136C21M

M-88

13-8. Manual Bypass Table

13-8-1. Construction

The Manual Bypass Table is fitted to the Right Door of the copier,integrated into the copier. It is constructed as follows.

LeverRight Cover

Right Door Cover

Manual Bypass Table

Paper Take-Up Clutch

Paper Take-Up Solenoid

Manual Bypass Take-Up Roll

Paper Empty Sensor

Paper Stoppers

Manual BypassTake-Up Roll

Paper Empty SensorActuator

Paper Stopper

Upper Transport Roller

Lower Transport Roller

Manual Bypass Feed

Manual Bypass Separator Roll

Paper Empty Sensor

Manual Bypass Table

M-89

13-8-2. Paper Take-Up Mechanism

The Paper Take-Up Rolls are normally in their raised (retracted) positionso that they will not hamper proper loading of paper. When the Start Keyis pressed, Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Solenoid SL4 is deenergizedcausing the Manual Bypass Take-Up Rolls to press the paper stackdownward and take up a sheet of paper.

There are the Paper Stoppers provided that block the leading edge of thepaper stack as it is loaded on the Table, preventing any portion of theleading edge of the paper from getting inside. These Stoppers areunlocked at paper take-up, allowing paper into the copier.

(In Standby)

Paper Stoppers

Lever

Rack Gear

Manual FeedPaper Take-UpSolenoid SL4

Lock Levers

(At Take-Up)

M-90

13-8-3. Take-Up/Feed Rolls Drive Mechanism

Drive is transmitted to the Multi Bypass Table as follows.

The gear mounted on the Lower Transport Roller shaft is turned by the drivefrom Main Drive Motor M1. ... (1)

The drive is transmitted to the idle gear mounted to the copier frame. ... (2)

When the Right Door is closed, the idle gear on the Multi Bypass Tablemeshes with gear (2) and drive is transmitted to the Multi Bypass Table.... (3)

Drive is transmitted to the gear on Manual Feed Paper Take-Up Clutch CL3.... (4)

The Manual Bypass Feed Roll mounted on the same shaft as CL3 is turned.Drive is then transmitted via the gear on the same shaft as the ManualBypass Feed Roll and idle gear to the Manual Bypass Take-Up Rolls. ... (5)

∗ The gears in the following illustration are keyed to the description of theoperations given above.

(1)

(2)(3)

(4)(5)

Manual Bypass Take-Up Roll

Manual Bypass Feed Roll Manual Feed Paper Take-Up

M-91

13-8-4. Manual Bypass Take-Up Roll Control

The Manual Bypass Take-Up Rolls are pressed against, and releasedfrom, the paper stack and the Manual Bypass Take-Up/Feed Rolls areturned by operating the clutches and solenoids with the signals fromMaster Board PWB-A. See the circuit diagram below.Operation timing is as follows.

Paper Leading EdgeDetecting Sensor PC55 1136T39MCB

25msec.

250msec.

145msec.

250msec.

25msec. 25msec.

500msec.

145msec.

5msec. 25msec.

5msec.

500msec. 500msec.


Synchronizing Roller ClutchCL2

Paper TransportClutch SL1

Manual Feed PaperTake-Up Clutch SL3

Manual Feed PaperTake-Up Solenoid SL4 UP

Manual Feed PaperTake-Up Solenoid SL4 Down

Main Drive MotorM1

TRON for 1st Sheet of Paper TRON for 2nd Sheet of Paper

500msec.

OFFON

OFFON

OFFON

OFFON

OFFON

OFFON

OFFON

OFFON

1136C22M

M-92

13-8-5. Manual Bypass Paper Separating Mechanism

The paper separating mechanism ensures that only the top sheet of paperis fed in by separating the second sheet of paper from the top one. This isaccomplished by the Torque Limiter fitted to the Separator Roll shaftwhich stops the Separator Roll when there is a change in friction betweenthe Feed and Separator Rolls.

1. At the Time of Double Feed:The top sheet of paper is fed into the copier by the Feed Roll. Since thecoefficient of friction between the top and second sheets of paper issmaller than that between the second sheet of paper and the SeparatorRoll, the two sheets of paper slip and the second sheet of paper is not fedinto the copier. The driving force of the Feed Roll is at this timeneutralized by the two slipping sheets of paper and not transmitted to theSeparator Roll which is stopped by its Torque Limiter. In other words, theforce of the Torque Limiter is greater than the driving force of the FeedRoll as it is transmitted through the two sheets of paper.

Feed Roll

Separator Roll* Stationary in this condition.

2. Normal Feeding:The friction coefficient on the top side of the paper is equivalent to that onthe underside. Hence, the driving force of the Feed Roll is directlytransmitted to the Separator Roll through the paper, causing theSeparator Roll to be turned by the Feed Roll. In other words, the force ofthe Torque Limiter is smaller than the driving force of the Feed Roll as it istransmitted through the paper.

M-93

Manual Feed PaperEmpty Sensor PC51

Actuator

Paper Stopper

Manual BypassTake-Up Roll

13-8-6. Manual Bypass Paper Empty Detection

The Manual Bypass Table is equipped with Manual Feed Paper EmptySensor PC51 which detects a sheet of paper on the Multi Bypass Table.Since PC51 is used to determine that a paper stack is placed in positionon the Manual Bypass Table, it is activated when the leading edge of thepaper stack is pressed against the Paper Stoppers.

1136C23M

M-94

14 VERTICAL PAPER TRANSPORT14-1. Construction of Vertical Transport Section

Upper Transport Roller

Right Upper DoorInterlock Switch S22

Right Upper Door SetSensor PC40

Charge NeutralizingBrushes

Transport Roller Sensor PC54

Upper Vertical Transport Roller

Lower Vertical Transport Roller

Lower Transport Roller

M-95

14-2. Vertical Transport Drive Mechanism

The Transport Roller (drive-end) is turned by Main Drive Motor M1 via atiming belt and gear train. Since the Transport Roller is coupled by way ofan idle gear to the Vertical Transport Roller (drive-end), the VerticalTransport Roller is turned as the Transport Roller turns.

Lower VerticalTransport Roller Drive

Timing Belt

Upper VerticalTransport Roller DriveGear

Idle Gear

Paper TransportClutch CL1

Paper Transport Clutch GearTransport Roller(driven-end)

Transport Roller(drive-end)

Upper VerticalTransport Roller(drive-end)

Upper VerticalTransport Roller(driven-end)

Lower VerticalTransport Roller(drive-end)

Lower VerticalTransport Roller(driven-end)

M-96

14-3. Vertical Transport Drive Control

The Transport Roller and Vertical Transport Roller are turned when PaperTransport Clutch CL1 is energized by Master Board PWB-A as shown inthe circuit diagram below.

The output from Transport Roller Sensor PC54 is used for the control ofpaper take-up timings.

CL1 is energized and deenergized at the following timings.

1136T40MCAApprox. 110msec.

ONOFF

Paper Transport ClutchCL1


Main Drive Motor M1

Transport Roller SensorPC54

TRON

ONOFF

ONOFF

ONOFF

ONOFF

ONOFF


5msec.

Paper Leading Edge DetectingSensor PC55

1136C24M

M-97

14-4. Detection of Right Upper Door in Position

Right Upper Door Set Sensor PC40, fitted to the copier body, detects theRight Upper Door when closed. The Vertical Transport Rollers (drive-end)and Multi Bypass Table are mounted to the Right Upper Door.Right Upper Door Interlock Switch S22 is also installed just as with theFront Door.When the Right Upper Door is closed, the ribs on the dooractivate/actuate PC40/S22.

Right Upper Door

Ribs

Right Upper DoorInterlock Switch S22

Right Upper Door SetSensor PC40

1136C25M

M-98

15 SYNCHRONIZING ROLLERS15-1. Construction

The Upper Synchronizing Roller is a metal roller covered with a polyvinylchloride tubing. It is secured to the front and rear frames of the copier.The Lower Synchronizing Roller, a rubber roller, is fitted to the TransportAssy. Pivoting about its rear end, the Lower Roller can be swungdownward to facilitate clearing of paper misfeeds.

Paper Dust Remover

Guide Plates

Upper Synchronizing Roller


Paper Leading EdgeDetecting Sensor PC55

Upper Synchronizing Roller


Torsion Spring

M-99

15-2. Synchronizing Roller Drive Mechanism

The Upper Synchronizing Roller receives drive from Main Drive Motor M1via a gear train and timing belt. The Upper Roller drives the lower one.The Synchronizing Rollers are started as Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL2is energized.

Upper SynchronizingRoller

Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL2

To Main Drive Motor M1

Timing Belt

3-Gear Unit

M-100

15-3. Synchronizing Roller Drive Control

The Synchronizing Rollers are started as Synchronizing Roller Clutch CL2is energized upon reception of a signal from Master Board PWB-A asshown in the circuit diagram below. The start of the Rollers issynchronized with the Registration signal (TRON).∗ The TRON signal is output from SCP Board PWB-J at a given time after

the Image leading Edge signal (BASE) has been output.∗ The BASE signal is output when the Scanner reaches a given point in

its scan motion.(For detailed timings of the TRON and BASE signals, see "8. OPTICALSECTION.")

The Synchronizing Rollers are stopped at a given time after the paper hasmoved past Paper Leading Edge Detecting Sensor PC55.

Here is the drive timing of the Synchronizing Rollers.

1136T41MCA

ONOFF


Main Drive MotorM1


TRON

ONOFF

ONOFF

ONOFF

ONOFF

Approx. 210msec.

Paper Leading Edge DetectingSensor PC55


1136C26M

M-101

15-4. Prevention of Low Image Density on Copy

During conditions of high humidity when the paper is damp, chargeswould tend to flow from the Image Transfer Corona through the paper andguide plates to the ground. This results in low image density on the copies.To prevent this from occurring, a plastic spacer is installed between thecopier frame and each guide plate around the Synchronizing Rollers sothat it remains insulated. Instead of using the plastic spacer, anelectrodeposition coating has been applied to some of those guide plates.If, however, the resistance with the ground is made infinity, the guideplate would build up charges and a spark can occur with other guideplates, resulting in a malfunction. To prevent this, an 82-megohm resistorand a 1-kV varistor are connected to the guide plates. The guide platesare connected by flat springs as illustrated below.

➆

A

B ➁

➃

C

➀ D ➂

➄

E

➅

Varistor

Resistor

Manual BypassFeed/Separator Rolls

TransportRollers

Upper VerticalTransport Rollers

Synchronizing Rollers

No. Guide Plate Name Insulation Method

➀ Upper Pre-Synch Guide Plate Plastic Spacer

➁ Lower Pre-Synch Guide Plate Plastic Spacer

➂Upper Transport Roller GuidePlate None [Fitted to top of guide plate no. ➃ ]

➃Lower Transport Roller GuidePlate Plastic Spacer

➄ Manual Bypass Guide Plate Electrodeposition Coating

➅ Vertical Transport Guide Plate Plastic Spacer

➆ Pre-Image Transfer Guide Plate Fitted to plastic holder of ImageTransfer/Paper Separator Coronas

M-102

Flat Spring Connection

A Between varistor-and-resistor and guide plate ➆

B Between varistor-and-resistor and guide plate ➁

C Between guide plates ➁ and ➃

D Between guide plates ➁ and ➀

E Between guide plates ➃ and ➅

M-103

16 IMAGE TRANSFER/PAPER SEPARATOR CORONAS

16-1. Construction of Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas Unit.

Image TransferCorona Wire

Pre-Image TransferGuide Plate

Image Transfer/PaperSeparator Coronas Unit Rail

Image Transfer CoronaWire Cleaner

MylarGuide

Paper SeparatorCorona Wire

Resistor

Corona Housing

Pre-Image Transfer Guide Plate

Cleaner

Cleaner Lever

Corona Wires

Guides

M-104

16-2. Description of Image Transfer and Paper Separation

Image TransferThe Image Transfer Corona applies a DC negative corona emission to theunderside of the paper thereby attracting the positively charged toner ontothe surface of the paper to form a visible, developed image of the original.The Corona Unit is provided with a Corona Wire cleaning mechanism: theoperator has only to pull out the lever on which the Cleaner is mountedfrom the front of the copier, which cleans the Wire.The mylar strips affixed to the housing of the Image Transfer Coronaminimize current that flows to the housing, thereby reducing the amountof ozone that is produced.

Paper SeparationThe Paper Separator Corona showers the underside of the paper withboth positive and negative charges so that the paper can be easilyseparated from the PC Drum. In addition, two Paper Separator Fingersphysically peel the paper off the surface of the PC Drum. (For details, see"PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers.")

Note: The Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas Unit is provided witha Pre-Image Transfer Guide Plate that determines the angle atwhich the paper comes into contact with the PC Drum and keeps anoptimum distance between the paper and the PC Drum so that theimage may be properly transferred onto the paper.

Note: The Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas Unit and ImageTransfer/Paper Separator Coronas Unit Rail are insulated from thecopier body. In addition, a 3.5-megohm resistor is connected to theunit rail. This improves the charge application efficiency from theCoronas Unit to the PC Drum and economizes on the output currentfrom High Voltage Unit HV1.

M-105

16-3. Ozone Filter

Ozone produced by the Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas isabsorbed by the Ozone Filter on the back of the copier. It is absorbedfrom the air being drawn out of the copier through the Duct under theSuction Deck by Suction Fan Motor M4.

In this copier, this Ozone Filter absorbs ozone produced by not only theImage Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas but also the PC Drum ChargeCorona.

Duct

Ozone Flow

(Front of Copier) To Ozone Filter

Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas

M-106

16-4. Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas Control

The Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas are turned ON and OFF byturning ON and OFF High Voltage Unit HV1. HV1 is turned ON and OFFby the signal from Master Board PWB-A as shown in the circuit diagrambelow.

Here is the timing chart for the operation of the Image Transfer/PaperSeparator Coronas.

1136T42MCA

ONOFF

Paper Exit SwitchS53

Image Erase LampLA2 MODE Signal

ONOFF

ONOFF

ONOFF

ONOFF

Paper SeparatorCorona

Approx. 410msec.

Approx. 150msec.

Approx. 290msec.

Approx. 50msec.Approx. 200msec.

Approx. 100msec.

Main Drive MotorM1

Image TransferCorona

1136C27M

M-107

17 CLEANING UNIT17-1. Construction

Cleaning Blade

AIDC Sensor PC Unit

Blade TensionSpring

Toner Conveying CoilPC Drum Paper Separator Finger

Blade Moving Pin

Toner Conveying Coil Drive Gear

Back of PC Unit

M-108

17-2. Cleaning Blade

17-2-1. Cleaning Blade Pressure Mechanism

The Cleaning Blade is pressed tightly against the surface of the PC Drumand scrapes off any toner remaining on the surface after image transfer.The Blade Tension Spring, hooked onto the Cleaning Blade AssyMounting Bracket, gives an appropriate tension to the Cleaning Blade asit is held against the surface of the PC Drum.

Cleaning BladeAssy Mounting

Bracket

Blade Tension Spring

Pivot Cleaning Blade Assy

(Pressed)

Residual Toner

PC Unit Frame

17-2-2. Cleaning Blade Moving Mechanism

The Cleaning Blade is moved to the front and rear while the PC Drum isturning. This is done to ensure that all residual toner is scraped cleanly offthe surface of the PC Drum and prevent the Blade edge from deteriorating.The eccentric cam fitted to a shaft of the copier is turned, which pushesthe Blade Moving Pin on the Cleaning Blade Assy Mounting Bracket. Thisresults in the Cleaning Blade being moved to the front and rear.

To Main Drive Motor M1

Timing BeltEccentric Cam

Blade Moving Pin

Cleaning Blade Assy Mounting Bracket

M-109

17-3. Spent Toner Collection

17-3-1. Toner Conveying/Collecting Mechanism

The toner which has been scraped off the surface of the PC Drum by theCleaning Blade is conveyed by the Toner Conveying Coil towards the rearof the copier and falls into the Toner Collecting Box at the back of thecopier through the pipe.

The Toner Antispill Mylar is affixed under the Cleaning Blade to receivetoner, thus preventing any toner from falling down onto the surface of thecopy paper or the paper path.

Toner Conveying Coil

Spent Toner Flow

Toner Conveying Coil DriveGear (Copier)

Toner Conveying Coil DriveGear (PC Unit)

Pipe

Cleaning Blade

Residual Toner

Toner Antispill Mylar

Toner Conveying Coil

M-110

17-3-2. Detection of Toner Collecting Box in Position

Toner Collecting Box Set Sensor PC107 detects that the Toner CollectingBox is installed in position. When the optional Large Capacity TonerCollecting Box is installed in the Cabinet, Large Capacity Toner CollectingBox Set Sensor PC31 on the Cabinet detects the Box in position. (Data istransferred between the Cabinet and copier through serialcommunication.)

When the Toner Collecting Box is changed from the standard to largecapacity type, Key 2 of DIP Switch S1 on Master Board PWB-A of thecopier should be switched to ON. This enables the copier to detect theLarge Capacity Toner Collecting Box. The combination in which S1-2,PC107, PC31 are ON or OFF determines how the copier regards thecurrent situation. See below.

NOTE: The Large Capacity Toner Collecting Box is available for use in theUSA, Canada and Europe only.

S1-2 PC107 PC31 Copier:

OFF

ON ON Regards that the standard Toner Collecting Box isplaced in position.

ON OFF Regards that the standard Toner Collecting Box isplaced in position.

OFF ON Inhibits copying (Toner Collecting Box not yet in place).

OFF OFF Inhibits copying (Toner Collecting Box not yet in place).

ON

ON ON Inhibits copying (Toner Collecting Box not yet in place).

ON OFF Inhibits copying (Toner Collecting Box not yet in place).

OFF ON Regards that the Large Capacity Toner Collecting Box isplaced in position.

OFF OFF Inhibits copying (Toner Collecting Box not yet in place).

Spent TonerPipe

Toner Collecting Box

Change the pipe to thelong type when theLarge Capacity TonerCollecting Box is used.

Large Capacity TonerCollecting Box

Actuator

PC31

Actuator

PC107

PWB-A

M-111

1136C28MCA

M-112

17-4. PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers

17-4-1. Paper Separator Finger Swinging Mechanism

After image transfer, an AC corona emission is applied to the underside ofthe paper by the Paper Separator Corona to neutralize the paper so that itcan be easily separated from the PC Drum. To further ensure that thepaper is positively separated from the PC Drum, there are two PaperSeparator Fingers installed. They physically peel the paper off the surfaceof the PC Drum. (For details of AC corona emission, see "16. IMAGETRANSFER/PAPER SEPARATOR CORONAS.")The Paper Separator Fingers are swung up and down by SeparatorSolenoid SL1.

Pawl (A)

ReturnSpring

FingerOperating Lever

Pivot

Swash Plate Cam

Separator Solenoid SL1

PC Drum PaperSeparator Finger Shaft

PC Drum PaperSeparator Finger

M-113

17-4-2. Paper Separator Finger Front-to-Back Moving Mechanism

To prevent the Paper Separator Fingers from damaging the surface of thePC Drum, they are moved over a given distance to the front and rear sothat they will contact wider areas of the surface of the PC Drum, thuspreventing localized damage of the PC Drum surface.

The Swash Cam mounted on the Pivot Pin of the Finger Operating Leveris moved through steps by means of the Ratchet and SL1, causing theSwash Cam to push the Finger Shaft.

The lateral movement of the Paper Separator Fingers is 3.5 mm (which isequivalent to 60 times energization and deenergization operations of SL1).

SL1 Energized

Pawl (A) is raised.

The Swash Plate is locked inposition by Pawl (B).

Ratchet Wheel

Paper Separator Finger Shaft

Swash Cam

Pawl (A) pushes the Swash Camdownward to turn it one notch.

SL1 Deenergized

M-114

17-4-3. PC Drum Paper Separator Finger Control

The PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers are moved by energizing anddeenergizing Separator Solenoid SL1 as commanded by a signal fromMaster Board PWB-A.

The operation timing is as follows.

1136T43MCA


ONOFF

ONOFF

Approx. 395msec. Approx. 265msec.Separator Solenoid

SL1


TRONTRON

1136C29M

M-115

17-5. AIDC Sensor

To provide image stabilization control, this copier has AIDC Sensor UN3fitted to the Cleaning Unit of the PC Unit. The sensor is used to detect thetoner density and background level on the PC Drum. The copier checks tosee if the detection level of UN3 is up to the target level and corrects, asnecessary, the PC Drum Charge Corona voltage (Vg) and ExposureLamp level. For more details, see "IMAGE STABILIZATION SYSTEM."

Operation1: The UN3’s LED projects approx. 940-nm infrared light onto the surface of

the PC Drum.2: The UN3’s phototransistor detects the amount of light reflected back.3: The phototransistor outputs a voltage corresponding to the intensity of the

light reflected back.

Shown below is the relationship between the toner density on the PCDrum and Phototransistor output.

Toner Density Output

High Low

Low High

Note: The toner density is inversely proportional to the output, becausethe higher the toner density, the more the projected light isabsorbed by toner.

Surface of PC Drum

LED PowerSupplyOutputInput

M-116

17-6. Cleaning Bias (Option)

∗ Except USA, CANADA, EUROPE

A Cleaning Bias Seal can be installed optionally. It minimizes damage tothe PC Drum from acid paper.

PC Drum

Toner Antispill Mylar

Cleaning Bias Seal

1136T44MCA

Main DriveMotor M1

Approx.150msec.Cleaning Bias

OFFON

OFFON

1136C30M

M-117

18 MAIN ERASE LAMP18-1. Construction

Main Erase Lamp LA3 consists of ten tungsten-filament lamps mountedside-by-side on a board. A filter is installed between LA3 and the PCDrum to protect LA3 from contamination. LA3 projects light onto thesurface of the PC Drum to neutralize any surface potential remaining afterimage transfer.

Main EraseLamp Board

Main Erase Lamp LA3

Filter

18-2. Main Erase Lamp LA3 ON/OFF Control

LA3 is turned ON and OFF by the signal from Master Board PWB-A asshown in the circuit diagram below.

A faulty LA3 is detected by the signal input to IC4A as shown in the circuitdiagram below.

The ON/OFF timing of LA3 is as follows.

1136T45MCA

ONOFF


Image Erase LampLA2 MODE Signal

ONOFF

ONOFF

ONOFF

Approx. 410msec.

Approx. 200msec.

Approx. 100msec.

Main Drive MotorM1

Main Erase LampLA3

Approx. 340msec.

M-118

1136C31M

M-119

19 PAPER TRANSPORT19-1. Construction

Suction Fan

Suction Drive Gear

Ozone Filter

Suction Belts

Transport Section Release Lever

19-2. Transport Section Release Mechanism

Pulling the Transport Section Release Lever down swings the TransportSection down, pivoting at the rear of the copier. This facilitates clearing ofmisfeeds.

1. Pull down the Transport Section Release Lever.2. The Transport Section Support Lever, coupled via gears to the Transport

Section Release Lever, swings down toward the rear of the copier.3. The front part of the Transport Section pivots at the rear of the

copier to swing downward.

Spring

3

1

2

M-120

19-3. Suction Belt Drive Mechanism

The Suction Belts are driven by Main Drive Motor M1 through a timingbelt and gear train.

Suction Belt

Suction Belt Drive Roller

Suction Drive Gear

Timing Belt

Main Drive Motor Gear

M-121

19-4. Suction Fan Motor M4 Drive Control

Suction Fan Motor M4 turns at low speed in the standby state and at highspeed during a copy cycle. The speed is switched by the signal fromMaster Board PWB-A as shown in the circuit diagram below.

A faulty M4 is detected by the signal input to IC4A as shown in the circuitdiagram below.

M4 is energized at the following timing.

1136T46MCA

ONOFF


High SpeedLow Speed

ONOFF

Suction Fan MotorM4

Approx. 750msec.

Approx. 5,150msec.

Main Drive MotorM1

1136C32M

M-122

20 FUSING UNIT

20-1. Construction and Drive Train

• The Upper Fusing Roller and Lower Fusing Roller together apply heat andpressure to the toner and paper to permanently fix the developed image tothe paper. The Cleaning Roller is installed for the cleaning of the FusingRollers.

• Drive for the Upper Fusing Roller and Cleaning Roller is transmitted fromMain Drive Motor M1 to the Upper Fusing Roller Drive Gear and CleaningRoller Drive Gear via Timing Belt C and a gear train. The Lower FusingRoller is driven by the Upper Fusing Roller in contact with it.

Upper FusingRoller

Lower FusingRoller

Main DriveMotor M1

Timing Belt C


Cleaning Roller Drive Gear

Cleaning Roller

Upper Fusing PaperSeparator Finger

Cleaning RollerFusing Front/RearThermistor TH1/2

Fusing ThermoswitchTS1

Fusing Heater Lamp H1

Upper Fusing Roller

Lower Fusing Roller

Lower Fusing PaperSeparator Finger

Pressure Spring

1st Paper Exit Roller

M-123

20-2. Fusing Rollers

<Upper Fusing Roller>• Employed is a teflon-coated roller which features wear resistance and

makes for improved fusing performance. It also repels the adherence ofmelted toner. Further, a conductive coating has been applied to thesurface of the Upper Fusing Roller, thereby neutralizing any charges.

<Lower Fusing Roller>• An elastic silicone rubber is used for the Lower Fusing Roller, offering a

wider area of contact between the two Fusing Rollers. Since the roller iscleaned only indirectly, the silicone rubber is covered with a teflontubing. This contributes to preventing smear on the Roller.

Upper Fusing RollerAluminum Cylinder

Teflon Coating

Lower Fusing Roller

Teflon Tubing

Silicone Rubber

20-3. Fusing Rollers Pressure Mechanism

• To ensure that there is a certain width of area of contact between theUpper and Lower Fusing Rollers, the Pressure Springs are hooked onto thePressure Holders at the front and rear ends of the Lower Fusing Roller.

• The other end of each of the Pressure Springs is hooked to the PressureLever, into which a Pressure Screw is installed. When the Pressure Screwsare tightened, the Pressure Holders are raised. As a result, the LowerFusing Roller is brought into tight contact with the Upper Fusing Roller.

Front

Pressure Screw

Rear

Pressure Lever

Pressure Spring

Pressure Holder

Lower Fusing Roller

Upper Fusing Roller

M-124

20-4. Fusing Roller Cleaning Mechanism

• The Cleaning Roller is held pressed against the Upper Fusing Roller toremove toner and paper dust from the Upper Fusing Roller.

• The Cleaning Roller turns in the direction opposite to the Upper FusingRoller and toner and paper dust on the surface of the Upper Fusing Rollerstick to the brush of the Cleaning Roller. It also supplies silicone oil to thesurface of the Upper Fusing Roller, thereby helping the Roller repel theadherence of melted toner and preventing paper from being wound aroundit.

Silicone Oil Aluminum Pipe

Paper

Brush

• The Cleaning Roller is a hollow aluminum pipe into which silicone oil hasbeen packed. The surface of the aluminum pipe has many holes. Paper iswrapped around this aluminum pipe to hold the silicone oil and is coveredwith an oil-impregnated brush.

Cleaning Roller

Upper Fusing Roller

Lower Fusing Roller

M-125

20-5. Paper Separator Fingers

• Each of the two Fusing Rollers is provided with Paper Separator Fingersthat strip the paper from the surface of the Rollers.

◆ Upper Fusing Paper Separator Fingers• The Upper Fusing Paper Separator Fingers have been coated with

teflon so that they will not be contaminated with toner.• The tip of each Separator Finger is at all times pressed against the

surface of the Upper Fusing Roller by a pressure spring. The fingers arelaid out as illustrated below, as paper registration is to one side in thiscopier.

Upper Fusing PaperSeparator Finger

Upper Fusing Roller

Front

Rear

◆ Lower Fusing Paper Separator Fingers• The Lower Fusing Paper Separator Fingers are flat springs to enhance

paper separating performance and ensure that the paper would not bewedged if a misfeed occurs.

• The Fusing Lower Guide/Lower Fusing Paper Separator Fingers Assy ismoved down as the Exit Unit is swung down, facilitating clearing ofmisfeeds.

Fusing Lower Guide/Lower FusingPaper Separator Fingers Assy

Lower Fusing PaperSeparator Finger

Set Spring

Front

Rear Exit Unit

M-126

20-6. Fusing Temperature Control

<Overview>• Fusing Front Thermistor TH1 and Fusing Rear Thermistor TH2 detect

changes in the surface temperature of the Upper Fusing Roller at itsfront and rear ends. The Thermistors input the corresponding analogvoltages to pins 78 (TH1) and 77 (TH2) of IC1A on Master Board PWB-Aso that PWB-A can control the surface temperature of the Upper FusingRoller.

• TH1 is usually used to provide 185°C temperature control.• TH2 is provided to monitor the temperature at the rear that could rise

when paper of a small size is fed through the copier.• Both thermistors are located where paper of a small size does not move

past.

1136M080AA

Fusing Front Thermistor TH1

Fusing Rear Thermistor TH2

Fusing Thermoswitch TS1

• To avoid a current surge when the copier is turned ON, Fusing HeaterLamp H1 is turned ON with a time lag of 1 second after S1 has beenturned ON.

• To protect H1 from being repeatedly turned ON and OFF, it is kept ONor OFF for a period of 1 second.

• While the copier is warming up, the Fusing Rollers are turned so that theLower Fusing Roller receives heat. This ensures good fusingperformance immediately after the warm-up.

1136M158CB

200 C

185 C

180 C

175 C

S1 ONPredrive Start

2 minutes and30 seconds or less

Warm-up Completed

Time

Start KeyON

Copy CycleCompleted

Energy SaverON

Energy Saver OFF

1Sec

M-127

<Temperature Control When Small Size Paper is Fed Through>• TH2 detects the surface temperature of the rear end of the Upper Fusing

Roller. When detecting a temperature of 225°C or more, TH2 comes intoplay to provide the temperature control.

• If TH1 detects a temperature of 165°C or less, then TH1 is used, insteadof TH2, to provide the temperature control.

• H1 is turned ON and OFF under different temperatures detected by TH1and TH2 as detailed below.

Temperature Detected byTH1

Temperature Detected byTH2 H1 ON/OFF

Less than 185°C Less than 225°C ON

185°C or more Less than 225°C OFF

165°C or more 225°C or more OFF

Less than 165°C 225°C or more Turned OFF if currently ONTurned ON if currently OFF

1136M159CA

225 C

185 C

165 C

Start Key

Control by TH2 with lowertemperature monitored by TH1Normal Control by TH1

• The Table below shows the relationship between the analog voltageapplied to pins 77 and 78 (AN3 and 4) of IC1A on PWB-A and the UpperFusing Roller surface temperature.

Temperature°C

InputVoltage toIC1A-77, 78

Temperature°C


Temperature°C


100 Approx. 3.21 150 Approx. 1.60 200 Approx. 0.65




140 Approx. 1.89 190 Approx. 0.78

M-128

<Predrive>• Predrive is performed at the following timing.

TH1 detects the surface temperature of the Upper Fusing Rollerimmediately before H1 is turned ON.

Predrive begins when the temperature detected by TH1 reaches 175°C,provided that the Predrive Inhibit signal is LOW.

Predrive is completed in 30seconds and the copier becomesready to make copies when thetemperature detected by TH1reaches 185°C....

Predrive is completed in 15seconds and the copier becomesready to make copies when thetemperature detected by TH1reaches 185°C....

If temperature is less than 165°C If temperature is 165°C or more

• H1 has the following light distribution characteristic. That is, the intensityat the rear of the Lamp is lower than the front end by about 30% toprevent the temperature of the rear end of the Upper Fusing Roller fromincreasing.

Front EndCenterRear End

50

70

100

(%)

<Detection of Abnormally High Temperature>• H1 is turned ON and OFF by the signal output from pin 16 (P51) of IC1A

on PWB-A. It is turned ON by a LOW signal and OFF by a HIGH signal.• When TH1 detects an abnormally high temperature, the output from pin

7 of IC20A on PWB-A goes from LOW to HIGH. The Self Holding signalgoes LOW causing RY1C to turn OFF. This causes RY1 to turn OFF,which cuts off power to H1, turning it OFF.

M-129

1136C33M

M-130

21 EXIT UNIT

21-1. Construction

Left Door

Drive Gear

Exit/Duplex SwitchingPlate


Exit/DuplexSolenoid SL5

Paper ExitSwitch S53

21-2. Exit Unit Drive Mechanism

Drive for the Exit Unit comes from the Fusing Unit by way of a gear train,turning the 1st and 2nd Paper Exit Rollers.

Driven Roll

2nd Paper Exit RollerDrive Gear

Driven Roll (in Fusing Unit)



M-131

21-3. Exit/Duplex Switching

21-3-1. Switching Mechanism

The Exit/Duplex Switching Plate in the Exit Unit is operated to feed the paperinto Duplex Unit AD-5 when the copier is in the 2-sided copying mode.

2nd PaperExit Roller


Exit/DuplexSwitching Plate

21-3-2. Switching Control

The Exit/Duplex Switching Plate is swung up and down when SL5 isenergized and deenergized by the signal from Master Board PWB-A asshown in the circuit diagram below.

The plate is operated at the following timing.

1136T47MCA

Synchronizing RollerClutch CL2

Approx. 1,350msec.Exit/Duplex Solenoid

Clutch CL2

TRONTRON

Approx. 2,770msec.

ONOFF

ONOFF

1136C34M

M-132

21-4. Paper Exit Detection

21-4-1. Paper Exit Detection Mechanism

Paper Exit Switch S53 detects a sheet of paper that is being fed out of thecopier. Instead of a photosensor, a reed switch is used for S53 for itsheat-resistance. The switch must be located near the Fusing Unit which getshot. When the paper moves the S53 actuator, the magnet fitted to theactuator is pulled away from the reed switch and the switch contacts open.This means that S53 is turned OFF.

Magnet

Actuator

Reed Switch 2nd PaperExit Roller

Driven Roll


( ON )

Magnet

Contacts

ReedSwitch

( OFF )

21-4-2. Exit Detection

The S53 detection result is sent to Master Board PWB-A and the copierknows that a sheet of paper has been fed out of the copier.Here is the paper exit detection circuit.

1136C35M

M-133

21-5. Detection of Left Upper Door in Position

Left Upper Door Set Sensor PC41 fitted to the copier body detects the LeftUpper Door when closed. The Exit Unit is fitted to the Left Upper Door.Left Upper Door Interlock Switch S23 is also installed just as with the FrontDoor. When the Left Upper Door is closed, the rib on the Exit Unit pushesthe Lever, which activates/actuates PC41/S23.

Left Upper Door

Left Upper DoorInterlock Switch S23

Left Upper DoorSet Sensor PC41

Lever


1136C36M

M-134

22 TOTAL COUNTER22-1. Total Counter CT1

Total Counter CT1 is installed on the right side panel of the copier. It countsthe number of sheets of paper that have been fed through the copier or thenumber of copy cycles that have been completed.

Note: The count-up conditions can be set using the Tech. Rep. mode. Fordetails, see "SWITCHES ON PWBs."

Front Door

Right Door

Power Switch S1

Total Counter CT1

M-135

22-2. Detection of Total Counter in Position

This copier is designed to detect a Total Counter placed in position. Itensures that the copier can keep track of its usage by eliminating thepossibility of a copy cycle being run without the Total Counter being inposition. As shown in the circuit diagram below, the copier inhibits theinitiation of a new copy cycle if it continuously detects a Total Counter out ofposition for a 400-msec. period. At this time, the copier keeps the Start Keyblinking, warning the operator that the Total Counter is not in position.

22-3. CT1 Count-Up

The signal from IC1A on Master Board PWB-A turns ON Transistors Q1Aand Q13A under the following conditions, which results in CT1 counting up.See the circuit diagram below.* The trailing edge of the copy moves past Paper Exit Switch S53.* The trailing edge of the copy moves past the Sorter Exit Sensor of the

Sorter if the copier is equipped with a Sorter.* When a copy is to be stored in the Duplex Unit in a 2-sided copying mode,

the trailing edge of the copy moves past the Duplex Paper Entry Sensor ofthe Duplex Unit.

1136C37M

M-136

21 EXIT UNIT

21-1. Construction

Left Door

Drive Gear

Exit/Duplex SwitchingPlate




21-2. Exit Unit Drive Mechanism

Drive for the Exit Unit comes from the Fusing Unit by way of a gear train,turning the 1st and 2nd Paper Exit Rollers.

Driven Roll


Driven Roll (in Fusing Unit)



M-131

21-3. Exit/Duplex Switching

21-3-1. Switching Mechanism

The Exit/Duplex Switching Plate in the Exit Unit is operated to feed the paperinto Duplex Unit AD-5 when the copier is in the 2-sided copying mode.

2nd PaperExit Roller


Exit/DuplexSwitching Plate

21-3-2. Switching Control

The Exit/Duplex Switching Plate is swung up and down when SL5 isenergized and deenergized by the signal from Master Board PWB-A asshown in the circuit diagram below.

The plate is operated at the following timing.

1136T47MCA

Synchronizing RollerClutch CL2

Approx. 1,350msec.Exit/Duplex Solenoid

Clutch CL2

TRONTRON

Approx. 2,770msec.

ONOFF

ONOFF

1136C34M

M-132

21-4. Paper Exit Detection

21-4-1. Paper Exit Detection Mechanism

Paper Exit Switch S53 detects a sheet of paper that is being fed out of thecopier. Instead of a photosensor, a reed switch is used for S53 for itsheat-resistance. The switch must be located near the Fusing Unit which getshot. When the paper moves the S53 actuator, the magnet fitted to theactuator is pulled away from the reed switch and the switch contacts open.This means that S53 is turned OFF.

Magnet

Actuator

Reed Switch 2nd PaperExit Roller

Driven Roll


( ON )

Magnet

Contacts

ReedSwitch

( OFF )

21-4-2. Exit Detection

The S53 detection result is sent to Master Board PWB-A and the copierknows that a sheet of paper has been fed out of the copier.Here is the paper exit detection circuit.

1136C35M

M-133

21-5. Detection of Left Upper Door in Position

Left Upper Door Set Sensor PC41 fitted to the copier body detects the LeftUpper Door when closed. The Exit Unit is fitted to the Left Upper Door.Left Upper Door Interlock Switch S23 is also installed just as with the FrontDoor. When the Left Upper Door is closed, the rib on the Exit Unit pushesthe Lever, which activates/actuates PC41/S23.

Left Upper Door

Left Upper DoorInterlock Switch S23

Left Upper DoorSet Sensor PC41

Lever


1136C36M

M-134

22 TOTAL COUNTER22-1. Total Counter CT1

Total Counter CT1 is installed on the right side panel of the copier. It countsthe number of sheets of paper that have been fed through the copier or thenumber of copy cycles that have been completed.

Note: The count-up conditions can be set using the Tech. Rep. mode. Fordetails, see "SWITCHES ON PWBs."

Front Door

Right Door

Power Switch S1

Total Counter CT1

M-135

22-2. Detection of Total Counter in Position

This copier is designed to detect a Total Counter placed in position. Itensures that the copier can keep track of its usage by eliminating thepossibility of a copy cycle being run without the Total Counter being inposition. As shown in the circuit diagram below, the copier inhibits theinitiation of a new copy cycle if it continuously detects a Total Counter out ofposition for a 400-msec. period. At this time, the copier keeps the Start Keyblinking, warning the operator that the Total Counter is not in position.

22-3. CT1 Count-Up

The signal from IC1A on Master Board PWB-A turns ON Transistors Q1Aand Q13A under the following conditions, which results in CT1 counting up.See the circuit diagram below.* The trailing edge of the copy moves past Paper Exit Switch S53.* The trailing edge of the copy moves past the Sorter Exit Sensor of the

Sorter if the copier is equipped with a Sorter.* When a copy is to be stored in the Duplex Unit in a 2-sided copying mode,

the trailing edge of the copy moves past the Duplex Paper Entry Sensor ofthe Duplex Unit.

1136C37M

M-136

23 POWER SUPPLY

The Power supply Sequence from when the Power Cord is Plugged in andthe Power ON/OFF Switch (S1) is turned ON is as below.

1. When Power Cord is Plugged in.

Power Cord: Plugged in.

DC Power Supply Unit (PU1): ON

DC24V: Output

Power Supply Board(PWB-C)

RY2C: OFF RY3: OFF

DrumDehumidifyingHeater (H3):ON

PowerDehumidifyingheater (H2):ON

RY1C: OFFRY3C: OFFRY4C: OFF

DC24V is notSupplied (Include Options)

Main Relay (RY1): OFF

AC Power is not supplied.

DC5V REM: L (SIC: A)

DC5V is not Supplied

∗ 1 ∗ 1

∗ 2

∗ 1: When Drum Dehumidifying Switch (S3) and Paper Dehumidifying Switch(S12) are OFF, DC24V is not supplied to H2 and H3.

∗ 2: When S1 on Power Supply Board (PWB-C) is set to "A", the DC5V REMSignal which enters PU1 is L . Therefore DC5V is not supplied.

RY1C: Normal OpenRY2C: Normal CloseRY3C: Normal Open

RY4C: Normal OpenRY3: Normal Close

M-137

2. Power ON/OFF Switch (S1) is turned ON.

Power ON/OFF Switch (S1) ON

Power Supply Board (PWB-C)RY-1C: ON

RY3: ON

DC5V REM H : Output RY2C: ON Power ON Signal L : Output

DC5V from PU1: Output DrumDehumidifyingHeater (H3):OFFDC5V: Supplied

Paper DehumidifyingHeater (H2): OFF

Master Board (PWB-A)

RY1 REM L : Output

RY1: ON

Option REM L : Output

RY3C: ONRY4C: ON

DC5V is converted toDC4.7V by VR1 andZD1A on MasterBoard (PWB-A)

DC24V issupplied fromPower SupplyBoard

Supplied ACPower toHeater Lampetc.

DC24C is supplied toOptions

DC4.7V is Supplied

Master Board (PWB-A)

DC24V is Converted to DC12V byIC6A on Master Board (PWB-A)

DC12V is supplied.

RY1C: Normal OpenRY2C: Normal CloseRY3C: Normal OpenRY4C: Normal OpenRY1: Normal CloseRY3: Normal Open

M-138

M-139

1136C0RM

M-140

24 MEMORY BACKUP

IC1 (RAM) of RAM Board PWB-R connected to Master Board PWB-A storesthe setting/adjustment values set in the Tech. Rep. modes as well as thecounter counts. Backup Battery BAT1 is mounted on PWB-R to prevent thecontents of memory from being lost when the power cord is unplugged orPWB-R removed from the copier. BAT1 requires a voltage of 2 V or more toretain the contents of memory.

ImportantAs noted above, the RAM stores critical data. If PWB-R has beenreplaced with a new one, memory must first be cleared and then allsettings be made again. It should also be noted that PWB-R should not bereplaced at the same time when PWB-A is replaced.

1136C38M

M-141

MINOLTA CO., LTD. 1136-7991-11 94075480Printed in Japan

Copyright1994 MINOLTA CO., LTD

Printed in Japan

Use of this manual shouldbe strictly supervised toavoid disclosure ofconfidential information.

EP2050

DIS/REASSEMBLY,ADJUSTMENT

1.

1-1. Precautions for Disassembly/Adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11-2. Instructions for Handring the PWBs with MOS ICs . . . . . . . . D-21-3. Handring of the PC Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-21-4. Parts which must not be Touched. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4

2.

2-1. Doors, Covers, and Exterior Parts Identification and Removal Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5

2-2. Removal of PWBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-72-3. Paper Take-Up/Transport Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9

(1) Removal of the Upper Paper Take-Up Unit . . . . . . . . . . . D-9(2) Removal of the Lower Paper Take-Up Unit . . . . . . . . . . . D-11(3) Removal of the Paper Take-Up Rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12(4) Cleaning of the Paper Take-Up Rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12(5) Cleaning of the Synchronizing Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12(6) Replacement/Cleaning of Paper Dust Remover. . . . . . . . D-12(7) Removal of the Suction Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13(8) Disassembly of the Suction Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14(9) Disassembly of the Multi Bypass Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15

• Cleaning of the Paper Take-Up Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18• Cleaning of the Feed Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18• Cleaning of the Paper Separator Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18

2-4. Optical Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-19(1) Cleaning of the Original Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-19(2) Cleaning of the Scanner Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-19(3) Cleaning of the Scanner Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-19(4) Removal of the Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-20(5) Cleaning of the Exposure Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-20(6) Removal of the Thermal Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-21(7) Cleaning of the 1st/2nd/3rd Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-21(8) Cleaning of the Lens and 4th/5th Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-22(9) Winding of the Lens Drive Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-23(10) Winding of the Scanner Drive Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-24(11) Cleaning of the 6th Mirror Protection Filter . . . . . . . . . . . D-25(12) Cleaning of the Cooling Fan Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-25

2-5. PC Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-26(1) Removal of the PC Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-26(2) Disassembly of the PC Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-26

CONTENTS

1 SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS

2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY

i

(3) Replacement of the PC Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-31(4) Replacement/Cleaning of the Toner Scattering

Prevention Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-31(5) Cleaning of the Ds Positioning Collars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-31(6) Cleaning of Toner Antispill Trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-31(7) Replacement of the Cleaning Blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-32(8) Replacement of the Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-32(9) Cleaning of the AIDC Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-33(10) Cleaning of the PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers . . . . D-33(11) Replacement/Cleaning of the Toner Antispill Seal . . . . . D-33(12) Cleaning of the Toner Antispill Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-34(13) Cleaning of the Main Erase Lamp Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-34(14) Cleaning of the Image Erase Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-34(15) Replacement of the Ozone Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-35(16) Replacement of the Toner Collecting Box . . . . . . . . . . . D-35

2-6. PC Drum Charge Corona/Image Transfer Corona Unit . . . . D-36(1) Cleaning/Replacement of the Drum Charge Corona

Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-36(2) Cleaning of the PC Drum Charge Corona Grid Mesh . . . D-37(3) Cleaning of the PC Drum Charge Corona Housing . . . . . D-37(4) Cleaning/Replacement of the Image Transfer

Corona Wire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-37(5) Cleaning/Replacement of the Paper Separator Corona

Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-38(6) Cleaning of the Image Transfer/Paper Separator Corona

Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-39(7) Cleaning of the Image Transfer Guide Plate. . . . . . . . . . . D-39

2-7. Fusing Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-40(1) Removal of the Fusing Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-40(2) Disassembly of the Fusing Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-40(3) Replacement/Cleaning of the Upper Paper Separator

Fingers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-43(4) Cleaning of the Lower Paper Separator Fingers . . . . . . . D-44(5) Cleaning of the Lower Guide Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-44(6) Cleaning of the Thermistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-44(7) Cleaning of the Thermal Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-44(8) Replacement/Cleaning of the Cleaning Roller . . . . . . . . . D-45(9) Replacement/Cleaning of the Upper Fusing Roller . . . . . D-45(10) Replacement/Cleaning of the Lower Fusing Roller . . . . D-45(11) Removal of the Exit/Duplex Switching Unit. . . . . . . . . . . D-46

CONTENTS

ii

(12) Disassembly of the Exit/Duplex Switching Unit . . . . . . . D-46

3

3-1. Jigs and Tools Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-493-2. Adjustment Requirement List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-503-3. Adjustments of Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-51

(1) Adjustment of Front Door Interlock Switch S21 . . . . . . . . D-523-4. Adjustment of Belt Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-53

(1) Adjustment of Paper Take-Up Unit Timing Belt . . . . . . . . D-53(2) Adjustment of Developing Unit Timing Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . D-53(3) Adjustment of Fusing Unit Timing Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-53(4) Adjustment of PC Unit Timing Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-53(5) Adjustment of Scanner Drive Motor Timing Belt. . . . . . . . D-54

3-5. Electrical/Image Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-55(1) Adjustment of the Original Size Detecting Board . . . . . . . D-55(2) Adjustment of the ATDC Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-56(3) Adjustment of the Aperture Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-57(4) Adjustment of Exposure Level in the Auto Mode . . . . . . . D-58(5) Adjustment of Exposure Level in the Manual mode . . . . . D-59(6) Adjustment of Crosswise Magnification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-61(7) Adjustment of Feed Direction Magnification . . . . . . . . . . . D-63(8) Adjustment of the Manual Bypass Table Reference

Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-65(9) Adjustment of the 1st/2nd Drawer Reference

Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-66(10) Adjustment of the Leading Edge Registration . . . . . . . . D-67

Full size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-67Enlargement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-68Reduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-69

(11) Adjustment of Single-Sided Book second page Leading Edge Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-71

(12) Adjustment of the Image Leading Edge Erase Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-73

(13) Adjustment of the Image Trailing Edge Erase Width . . . D-75(14) Adjustment of the Image Erase

Lamp Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-773-6. Other Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-78

(1) Focus-Positioning of the Scanner and Mirrors Carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-78

CONTENTS

3 ADJUSTMENT

iii

(2) Adjustment of the Gap Between the Doctor Blade and Sleeve Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-79

(3) Adjustment of the PC Drum Paper Separator Finger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-80

(4) Adjustment of the Paper Lifting Plate Springs (1st and 2nd Drawers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-81Replacement of Springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-82

4

4-1. Installation of Plug-in Counter (Option) Mounting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-83

4 MISCELLANEOUS

CONTENTS

iv

1 SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS

1-1. PRECAUTIONS FOR DISASSEMBLY/ADJUSTMENTSObserve the following precautions whenever servicing the copier.

• Be sure to unplug the copier from the outlet before attempting to service the copier.• The basic rule is not to operate the copier anytime during disassembly.

If it is absolutely necessary to run the copier with its covers removed, use care not to allow yourclothing to be caught in revolving parts such as the Timing Belt and gears.

• Be sure to use the Interlock Switch Actuating Jig whenever it is necessary to actuate the InterlockSwitch with the covers left open or removed.

• Do not plug in or unplug print jacks on the Board or connect or disconnect the Board connectorswhile power is being supplied to the copier.

• Do not use flammable spray around the copier in operation.• The Magnet Roller of the Imaging Unit generates strong magnetic force. Do not bring it near a

cathode-ray tube or watch.• A used lithium cell should be disposed of according to the local regulations and never be

discarded casually or left unattended at the user’s premises.• Do not use an air gun or vacuum cleaner for cleaning the ATDC Sensor and other sensors, as

they can cause electrostatic destruction. Use a blower brush and cloth. If a unit containing thesesensors is to be cleaned, first remove the sensors from the unit.

• When handling the PWBs with MOS ICs, observe "1-2. Instructions for Handling the PWBs withMOS ICs."

• When handling the PC Drum, observe precautions given in "1-3. Handling of the PC Drum."• Note that replacement of a PWB may call for readjustments or resetting of particular items.• Use the right screw in the right place at reassembly. Note that some are longer and some are

thicker than others.• A toothed washer is used with the screw that secures the ground wire to ensure positive

conduction. Do not forget to insert this washer at reassembly.• To reassemble the copier, reverse the order of disassembly unless otherwise specified.• If it becomes necessary to replace the thermal fuse or any other fuse mounted on a board, be sure

to use one of the rating marked on the blown fuse.Always note the rating marked on the fuse, as the rating and mounting site or number used aresubject to change without notice.

• Do not pull out the Toner Hopper while the Toner Bottle is turning, as a damaged TonerReplenishing Motor or locking mechanism could result.If the copier is to be run with the Front Door swung down, make sure that the Toner Hopper is inthe locked position.

CAUTION: DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY REPLACED. REPLACEONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER.DISCARD USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS.

ADVARSEL!: Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering. Udskiftning må kun skemed batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandøren.

D-1

1-2. INSTRUCTIONS FOR HANDLING THE PWBs WITH MOS ICs The following precautions must be observed when handling P.W. Boards with MOS (MetalOxide Semiconductor) ICs.

During Transportation/Storage:• During transportation or when in storage, new P.W. Boards must not be indiscriminately removed

from their protective conductive bags. • Do not store or place P.W. Boards in a location exposed to direct sunlight. • When it becomes absolutely necessary to remove a Board from its conductive bag or case,

always place it on its conductive mat in an area as free as possible from static electricity. • Do not touch the pins of the ICs with your bare hands.

During Replacement: • Before unplugging connectors from the P.W. Boards, make sure that the power cord has been

unplugged from the outlet.• When removing a Board from its conductive bag or conductive case, do not touch the pins of the

ICs or the printed pattern. Place it in position by holding only the edges of the Board.• Before plugging connectors into the Board, make sure that the power cord has been unplugged

from the power outlet.

During Inspection: • Avoid checking the IC directly with a multimeter; use connectors on the Board. • Never create a closed circuit across IC pins with a metal tool.• When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the Board, be

sure to ground your body.

1-3. HANDLING OF THE PC DRUM During Transportation/Storage: • Use the specified carton whenever moving or storing the PC Drum. • The storage temperature is in the range between −20°C and +40°C. • In summer, avoid leaving the PC Drum in a car for a long time.

Handling: • Ensure that the correct PC Drum is used. • Whenever the PC Drum has been removed from the copier, store it in its Container or protect it

with a Drum Cloth. • The PC Drum exhibits greatest light fatigue after being exposed to strong light over an extended

period of time. Never, therefore, expose it to direct sunlight. • Use care not to contaminate the surface of the PC Drum with oilbase solvent, fingerprints, and

other foreign matter.• Do not scratch the surface of the PC Drum. • Do not apply chemicals to the surface of the PC Drum. • Do not attempt to wipe clean the surface of the PC Drum unless its surface is contaminated with

fingerprints.

D-2

If the surface is contaminated with fingerprints, clean it using the following procedure.

2. Gently wipe the residual toner off the surface of thePC Drum with a dry, dust-free cotton pad.

a) Rotate the PC Drum so that the area of its surfaceon which the line of toner left by the Cleaning Bladeis present is facing staright up. Wipe the surface inone continuous movement from the rear edge of thePC Drum to the front edge and off the surface of thePC Drum.

b) Rotate the PC Drum sligh6tly and wipe the newlyexposed surface area with a clean face of thedust-free cotton pad. Repeat this procedure untilthe entire surface of the PC Drum has beenthoroughly cleaned.

* Always use a clean face of the dry dust-free cottonpad until no toner is evident on the face of the padafter wiping.

3. Soak a small amount of either ethyl alcohol orisopropyl alcohol into a clean, unused dust-free cottonpad which is folded over into quarters. Now, wipe thesurface of the PC Drum in one continuous movementfrom its rear edge to its front edge and off its surfaceone to two times.

* Never move the pad back and forth.

4. Using the same face of the pad, repeat the procedureexplained in the latter half of step 3 until the entiresurface of the PC Drum is wiped. Always overlap theareas when wiping. Two complete turns of the PCDrum would be appropriate for cleaning.

• The Organic Photoconductor Drum is softer than CdS and Selenium Drums and is thereforesusceptible to scratches.

• Even when the PC Drum is only locally dirtied, wipe the entire surface.• Do not expose the PC Drum to direct sunlight. Clean it as quickly as possible even under

interior illumination. • If dirt remains after cleaning, repeat the entire procedure from the beginning one more time.

NOTES

1. Place the PC Drum into one half its container.

D-3

1-4. PARTS WHICH MUST NOT BE TOUCHED

(1) Red Painted Screws

Red painted screws show that assembly or unit secured by which can only be adjusted or setat the factory and shall not be readjusted, set, or removed in the field.Note that when two or more screws are used on the part in question, only one representativescrew may be marked with red paint.

Purpose of Application of Red Paint

(2) Variable Resistors on Board

Do not turn the variable resistors (potentiometers) on boards to which no adjusting instrcutionsare given in "ADJUSTMENT".

(3) Other ScrewsAlthough not marked with red paint, the following screws must not be loosened or readjusted.

One screw on the ScannerRoller Height Adjusting Plate Three screws on Scanner Rail

Two screws on the Lens RailTwo screws on the LowerPre-Image Transfer Guide Plate

Two screws on the Mirror MotorUnit

D-4

2-1. Doors, Covers, and Exterior Parts: Identification and RemovalProcedures

2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY

D-5

No. Part Name Removal Procedure

1 Front DoorOpen the Front Door; remove two Front Door HingeShafts; remove the Belt Mounting screw inside the FrontDoor.

2 Control PanelOpen the Front Door; remove the Right Door; remove theUpper Left Cover; remove four screws that secure theControl Panel.

3 Original Width ScaleRemove two screws that secure the Scale.

4 Original Glass

5 Rear Upper Cover (small)Remove the Original Cover; remove one screw thatsecures the Rear Upper Cover (small).

6 Left Hinge CoverRemove the Original Cover and then one screw thatsecures the Left Hinge Cover.

7 Rear Upper Cover

Remove the Original Cover; remove the Right and LeftHinge Covers; remove the Rear Upper Cover (small);remove the Right Cover; remove one screw that securesthe Rear Upper Cover.

8 Right Hinge CoverRemove the Original Cover; remove one screw thatsecures the Right Hinge Cover.

9 Right CoverRemove the Right Door and then four screws that securethe Right Cover.

10 Right DoorOpen the Right Door; remove the harness from thewiring saddle; unplug three connectors; remove twoscrews that secure the Right Door.

11 Counter Cover Remove the Counter Cover by snapping it off.

12 2nd DrawerSlide out the 2nd Drawer and remove one screw thatsecures the Stopper at the rear left corner.

13 1st DrawerSlide out the 1st Drawer and remove one screw thatsecures the Stopper at the rear left corner.

14 Original Cover Remove the Original Cover by pulling it up.

15 Upper Left Cover Remove six screws that secure the Upper Left Cover.

16 Left Door

Remove the Upper Left Cover; open the Left Door;unplug two connectors; remove the E-ring from the RearHinge Shaft; remove two screws that secure the FrontHinge Shaft Mounting Plate; remove one screw thatsecures the belt inside the Right Door.

17 Middle Left CoverRemove the Upper Left Cover and then four screws thatsecure the Middle Left Cover.

18 Rear Cover Remove six screws that secure the Rear Cover.

D-6

2-2. Removal of PWBs• When removing a PWB, first review "PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE PWBs" described

in SWITCHES ON PWBs and use the removal procedures given on the pages that follow.• Replacement of a PWB may call for readjustment or resetting of particular items.• In general, removal procedures omit steps to unplug connectors and remove the PWB from the

PWB support.• When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the

Board, be sure to ground your body.

◆ Readjustment/Resetting involved in replacement of PWB-R, UN2, UN3 and UN4

• When PWB-R (RAM board) is replaced:Carry out Memory Clear and then make the Tech. Rep. Choice, User’s Choice, and Adjustsettings again.

• When UN2 (Original Size Detecting Board) is replaced:Adjust the Original Size Detecting Board by referring to p. D-55.

• When UN3 (AIDC Sensor) is replaced:Adjust the Exposure Level in the Auto Mode by referring to p. D-58.

• When UN4 (ATDC Sensor) is replaced:Discard the developer which was used until the ATDC Sensor was replaced, charge theDeveloping Unit with fresh developer, and adjust the ATDC by referring to p. D-56.

D-7

Symbol Name Removal Procedure

PWB-A Master Board Remove the Rear Cover.

PWB-B MSC BoardOpen the Front Door. Remove the B Board ProtectionCover.

PWB-C Power Supply Board Remove the Rear Cover and then the Master Board.

PWB-D Noise Filter BoardRemove the Rear Cover, Master Board, Power SupplyUnit Cover and then DC Supply Unit Cover.

PWB-H AE Sensor BoardRemove the Original Width Scale and then the OriginalGlass.

PWB-ITech. Rep. Setting SwitchBoard

Open the Front Door. Remove the B Board ProtectionCover.

PWB-J SCP Board Remove the Rear Cover.

PWB-R RAM Board Remove the Rear Cover.

UN1 Control Panel Open the Front Door.

UN2Original Size DetectingBoard

Remove the Rear Cover.

UN3 AIDC Sensor Open the Front Door. Remove the PC Unit, ChargeCorona Unit, PC Drum and then the Paper SeparatorGuide Unit.

UN4 ATDC Sensor Open the Front Door. Remove the PC Unit.

PU1 DC Power Supply UnitRemove the Rear Cover, Master Board and then thePower Supply Unit Cover.

PU2 Power Supply UnitRemove the Rear Cover, Master Board and then theADF Connector Unit.

HV1 High Voltage UnitRemove the Rear Cover, SCP Board Mounting Plateand then the High Voltage Unit Cover.

D-8

2-3. Paper Take-Up/Transport Sections

(1) Removal of the Upper Paper Take-Up Unit1. Remove the Right Door, Right Cover and Rear Cover.2. Slide out the 1st and 2nd Drawers.3. Open the Front Door.4. Swing the Transport Section Release Lever down.5. Remove two screws and the PC Unit.

6. Remove two screws and the B Board Protection Cover.

7. Remove three screws that secure the Upper Take-UpUnit at the front of the copier.

8. Remove one screw that secures the Supporting Plate.

9. Remove one screw and the plate spring.10. Remove one screw that secures the Paper Take-Up

Connector Unit.

11. Slide out the Guide Plate in the direction of the arrow.

D-9

12. Unplug the Bias Cord from connector CN on the HighVoltage Unit.

13. Unplug connector CN (7P) on the High Voltage Unit.

14. Remove the High Voltage Unit mounting screw.15. Unplug the Paper Take-Up Connector mounting screw.

16. Open the High Voltage Unit and Paper Take-UpConnector Unit in the direction of the arrow.

17. Unplug the connector CN (8P) on the Upper PaperTake-Up Unit.

18. Remove three screws that secure the Upper PaperTake-Up Unit at the rear of the copier.

19. Remove two screws and the Tension Lever.20. Remove the C-clip and the Synchronizing Belt.

21. Remove the Upper Paper Take-Up Unit.

D-10

(2) Removal of the Lower Paper Take-Up Unit1. Remove three screws that secure the Lower Take-Up

Unit at the front of the copier.

2. Slide out the Guide Plate in the direction of the arrow.

3. Remove the Toner Collecting Box.

4. Unplug the connector CN (8P) on the Lower PaperTake-Up Unit.

5. Remove three screws that secure the Lower Take-UpUnit at the rear of the copier.

6. Remove one screw that secures the Right Rail Cover.

7. Remove the Lower Paper Take-Up Unit.

D-11

Remove one screw and the Paper Take-Up Roll.

Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe clean thePaper Take-Up Rolls.

Using a brush or a vacuum cleaner, clean the Upper andLower Synchronizing Rollers.

1. Remove the PC Unit by referring to p. D-26.2. Using a coin, loosen the screw that secures the Paper

Dust Remover at the rear of the copier.3. Also using the coin, remove the screw that secures

the Paper Dust Remover at the front of the copier.4. Remove the Paper Dust Remover by sliding and lifting

it in the direction of the arrow.5. Replace the Paper Dust Remover with a new one.

(3) Removal of the Paper Take-Up Rolls

(4) Cleaning of the Paper Take-Up Rolls

(5) Cleaning of the Synchronizing Roller

(6) Replacement/Cleaning of Paper Dust Remover

D-12

Using a brush, wisk dust off the Paper Dust Remover.

(7) Removal of the Suction Unit

5. Remove the Main Motor cover.

6. Remove three connectors (2P, 2P and 3P) from theSuction Unit.

7. Return the Transport Section Release Lever to itsoriginal position.

8. Remove the Transfer/Separator Corona by firstpressing it down and then pulling it out.

1. Referring to p. D-82, remove the 1st and 2nd Drawers.2. Referring to p. D-26, remove the PC Unit.3. Referring to p. D-12, remove the Paper Dust Remover. 4. Referring to p. D-40, remove the Fusing Unit.

D-13

1136D305AA

9. Remove one screw and the Heat Shield Plate.

10. Swing the Transport Section Release Lever down.

11. Holding up the Suction Unit, remove the pressure coilspring.

12. Remove the Suction Unit by sliding it to the right.

1. Remove two screws and the Duct.2. Remove four screws and the Suction Drive Unit.

(8) Disassembly of the Suction Unit

3. Remove three Suction Driven Rolls.

D-14

4. Remove two screws and the Right Door.

4. Remove three belts.

5. Snap off one E-ring and remove the Suction Rolls.

(9) Disassembly of the Multi Bypass Unit1. Open the Right Door.2. Remove the harness from one wiring saddle.3. Unplug three connectors CNs (2P, 3P, 3P)

5. Remove four screws and the Separator Guide PlateAssy.

D-15

6. Remove the pressure coil spring.

When reinstalling the pressure coil spring, place it sothat the its close-coiled end faces the Separator Unit.

NOTE

8. Remove one C-clip and the Separator Roll Assy.

9. Remove the harness from the clamp and wiring saddle.

7. Remove one C-clip and the Separator Assy.

10. Remove four screws and the Solenoid MountingBracket.

D-16

11. Remove two hex cap screws and the electromagneticspring clutch.

When reinstalling the electromagnetic spring clutch,tighten the two hex cap screws while orienting theshaft of the Paper Take-Up Roll as shown in thefigure on the left.The end of the clutch must be flush with or slightly(up to 1 mm) recessed compared with the end of theshaft of the Paper Take-Up roll. Press the shaft of thePaper Take-Up roll in the direction of the arrow andcheck that gap A is 1 mm or more.

NOTE

1136D115AAA

0 ∼ − 1 mm

12. Snap off two C-clips to remove the Paper Take-UpRoll Assy.

D-17

13. Snap off three C-clips to remove the Feed Roll.

14. Snap off one C-clip to remove the Paper Take-Up Roll.

• Cleaning of the Paper Take-Up Roll

Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe clean thePaper Take-Up Roll.

Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe clean theFeed Roll.

• Cleaning of the Feed Roll

Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe clean thePaper Separator Roll.

• Cleaning of the Paper Separator Roll

D-18

2-4. Optical Section

(1) Cleaning of the Original GlassWipe clean the Original Glass with a soft cloth.

1. Remove two screws and the Original Width Scale.2. Remove the Original Glass.

Wipe clean the Scanner Rail with a soft cloth.

The surface of the Original Glass is coated withconductive material. Do not use a wax baseddetergent. An alcohol-dampened cloth may be used if the Glassis seriously contaminated.

NOTE

(2) Cleaning of the Scanner Shaft

3. Wipe clean the Scanner Shaft with a soft cloth.

(3) Cleaning of the Scanner Rail

D-19

(4) Removal of the Scanner 1. Remove one scanner mounting screw.

3. Remove one screw and the Wire Guide.4. Remove one screw and the Grounding Wire.

2. Remove three screws from the Scanner. Holding thescanner at a point close to the Scanner Shaft, turn theScanner counterclockwise to remove it.

5. Unplug the Exposure Lamp connector CN.6. Unplug the Thermal Fuse connector CN.7. Remove the Scanner.

(5) Cleaning of the Exposure Lamp1. Remove one screw to remove the Exposure Lamp

Terminal.2. Slide out the Exposure Lamp.

D-20

3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, clean theLamp by gently wiping its surface in one direction.

1. Unplug the Thermal Fuse connector CN.2. Disconnect the Thermal Fuse wire from the clamp.

3. Remove two screws and the Aperture Blade Assy.4. Remove one screw and the Thermal Fuse.

The Thermal Fuse must be in contact with the LampReflector.

NOTE

(7) Cleaning of the 1st/2nd/3rd MirrorsWipe clean the Mirrors with a soft cloth.

When reinstalling the Lamp, point the protrudingnavel of the Lamp toward the opening in the LampReflector so that the protruding navel will not hitagainst the Lamp Reflector.After reinstalling the Lamp, go to p. D-58 and perform"(4) Adjustment of Exposure Level in the Auto Mode."

NOTE

(6) Removal of the Thermal Fuse

D-21

1. Remove two screws and the Optical Cover.2. Remove two screws and the Lens Cover.

3. Gently dust off the surface of the Lens using a softcloth.

4. Wipe clean the 4th and 5th Mirrors with a soft cloth.

(8) Cleaning of the Lens and 4th/5th Mirrors

D-22

(9) Winding of the Lens Drive Cable

1136D135AA

Cable Drive Gear

B

A

1136D137AA

2. Wind the longer length of Cable three and 1/4 turnsclockwise around the Cable Drive Gear, working fromthe back to the front side. Then tape it.

1136D138AA

3. Wind the shorter length of Cable three and 1/2 turnscounterclockwise around the Cable Drive Gear,working from the front to back side. Then tape it.

4. Pass the longer length of Cable through the hole inthe Light Blocking Plate.

5. Slide the Cable Drive Gear onto its shaft and insert awrench into the hole (4 mm dia.) to position the CableDrive Gear.

1. Hold the Cable Drive Gear in position with its Bead atthe bottom.

D-23

A

6. Wind the shorter length of Cable around Pulley A.

B

8. Wind the longer length of Cable around the Pulley B.9. Hook the spring onto the longer length of Cable and

then pull the spring to hook it onto the shorter lengthof Cable.

10. Remove the wrench and peel off the two pieces oftape used in steps 2 and 3.

1136D141AA(2 mm or less)

7. Secure the shorter length of Cable to the Cable FixingBracket, ensuring a distance of 2 mm or less for thedimension shown on the left. Then, secure the Bracket.

(10) Winding of the Scanner Drive Cable

1136D144AA

A

1. Slide the Scanner toward the left side of the copier asfar as it will go.

2. Fit one end of the Drive Cable into the fixed anchor.3. Wind the Scanner Drive Cable around (see figure left)

Pulley A.

1136D143AA

A

Scanner Drive Gear

C

B

D-24

1136D145AA

B

4. Wind the Scanner Drive Cable around Pulley B.5. Wind the Scanner Drive Cable around the Scanner

Drive Gear clockwise, working from the bottomupward.

1136D146AA

AC

6. Wind the Scanner Drive Cable around Pulley C.7. Wind the Scanner Drive Cable around Pulley A (see

figure).

8. Using a flat head screwdriver, turn the spring anchorat the position shown left and fit the cable onto the it.

Repeatedly slide the Scanner left and right, to verifysmooth running of the Scanner Drive Cable.

NOTE

(11) Cleaning of the 6th Mirror Protection FilterUsing a soft cloth, wipe clean the 6th Mirror ProtectionFilter.

(12) Cleaning of the Cooling Fan Filter1. Remove six screws and the Rear Cover.2. Clean the Filter with a brush or a vacuum cleaner.

D-25

2-5. PC Unit

(1) Removal of the PC Unit1. Open the Front Door.2. Swing the Transport Section Release Lever down.

3. Loosen two PC Unit mounting screws.4. Remove the PC Unit.

1. Remove the PC Drum Charge Corona Unit.

(2) Disassembly of the PC Unit

3. Remove the Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Cover.4. Unplug four connectors CNs (2P, 2P, 2P, 3P).

2. Remove one screw and the PC Drum.

D-26

5. Remove three screws and the Hopper Unit.

6. Remove one screw and the Hopper Lid.7. Remove two screws and the Toner Scattering

Prevention Plate.8. Remove two screws and the Doctor Blade.

9. Dump the developer out of the Developing Unit.

10. Remove two screws to unplug the 18P connector.11. Remove three screws and the Mounting Plate Unit.12. Remove the harness from the Edge Cover.

13. Remove two screws and the Cord Holder.

D-27

14. Remove two screws and the Comveyor Duct Assy.15. Remove one C-clip and one screw to remove the

Bushing of the Toner Conveying/Mixing Screw.

When reinstalling the Toner Conveying/Mixing Screw,position it so that the arrow mark on the Bushing is atthe top.

NOTE

16. Remove one C-clip and one screw to remove theBushing of the Toner Conveying/Mixing Screw.

17. Remove one screw to remove the Bushing of theDeveloper Conveying Screw.

18. Remove the Toner Conveying/Mixing Screw.19. Remove the Developer Conveying Screw.

20. Remove one screw and the Coupling Gear.21. Remove one screw and the Pressure Coil Spring

Retaining Washer.22. Remove the Bucket Bushing.

When reinstalling the Washer, make sure that theback side of the washer faces the screw head.

NOTE

23. Snap off the E-ring from the Ds Roll at the rear of theunit and then remove the Ds Roll.

D-28

24. Remove one screw and the Bias Terminal.25. Remove one screw and the Pressure Coil Spring

Retaining washer.26. Remove one C-clip and the Bucket Bushing.

When reinstalling the Washer, make sure that theback side of the washer faces the screw head.

NOTE

27. Remove the Bucket Roller.

28. Snap off the C-clip from the front Ds Roll and thenremove the Roll.

29. Remove the Sleeve Roller.

30. Remove the connector CN (2P) from the PaperSeparator Finger Drive Assy.

31. Remove the harness of the Paper Separator FingerDrive Assy from the clamp.

32. Remove the harness of the Paper Separator FingerDrive Assy.

D-29

33. Remove two screws and the bushing of the TansferCoil.

34. Snap off one C-clip to remove the Transfer Coil Gear.

35. Remove two screws and the Transfer Coil.

36. Remove two screws and the Cleaning Blade.

When reinstalling the Cleaning Blade, be sure it is incontact with the bracket.

NOTE

37. Remove the spring.38. Remove one screw and the Bracket.

D-30

1. Remove the PC Drum Charge Corona Unit.2. Remove one screw and the PC Drum.3. Secure a new PC Drum with the screw.

(3) Replacement of the PC Drum

After replacement of the PC Drum, reset the thePort/Option counter to zero. See TECH. REP.PROGRAM (SERVICE) MODE in SWITCHES ONPWBs. Also perform the "(4) Adjustment of ExposureLevel in the Auto Mode" on p. D-58.

NOTE

(4) Replacement/Cleaning of the Toner Scattering Prevention Plate1. Remove two screws and the Toner Scattering

Prevention Plate.2. Install a new Toner Scattering Prevention Plate and

secure it with the two screws.

Using a brush, wisk dust off the Toner ScatteringPrevention Plate.

(5) Cleaning of the Ds Positioning CollarsUsing a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe clean theDs Positioning Collars.

(6) Cleaning of Toner Antispill TrapUsing a brush or a vacuum cleaner, clean the TonerAntispill Trap.

D-31

(7) Replacement of the Cleaning Blade1. Remove two screws and the Cleaning Blade.2. Replace the Blade with a new one and secure it with

the screws.

When reinstalling the Cleaning Blade, be sure it is incontact with the bracket. See p. D-30.After replacing the Cleaning Blade, apply toner overthe surface of the Cleaning Blade. Also apply the lubricant supplied with the Blade totwo seals at the points shown (use a brush).

NOTE

(8) Replacement of the Starter1. Remove the Hopper Unit. See Step 5 on p. D-27.2. Remove one screw and the Starter Chamber Lid.

3. Dump the Starter out of the Developing Unit.

4. Fill the Unit with fresh Starter.

After replacement, perform the following steps.1. Cleaning of the Image Erase Lamp.2. Reset the counter in the "Starter" display. See the

"SERVICE MODE" in the "SWITCHES ON PWBs".3. ATDC Adjustment, see p. D-56.4. Exposure Adjustment in the Auto Mode, see p. D-58.

NOTE

D-32

(9) Cleaning of the AIDC Sensor1. Unplug the connector CN (3P) of the AIDC Sensor.2. Remove three screws and the Paper Separator Guide

Assy.

3. Clean the AIDC Sensor with a soft cloth.

(10) Cleaning of the PC Drum Paper Separator FingersUsing a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe clean theFingers.

(11) Replacement/Cleaning of the Toner Antispill Seal1. Remove two screws and the Toner Antispill Plate and

Toner Antispill Seal.2. Replace the Toner Antispill Seal with a new one.

1. Using a brush, clean the Toner Antispill Seal.

D-33

When reinstalling the Toner Antispill Plate and TonerAntispill Seal, press them in the direction of thearrows.

NOTE

(12) Cleaning of the Toner Antispill PlateUsing a brush, wisk toner and dust off the the TonerAntispill Plate.

(13) Cleaning of the Main Erase Lamp Filter1. Remove the PC Unit by referring to p. D-26.2. Pull out the Main Erase Lamp Filter in the direction of

the arrow.

3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe cleanthe Filter.

(14) Cleaning of the Image Erase LampUsing a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, clean theImage Erase Lamp.

D-34

(15) Replacement of the Ozone Filter1. Remove six screws and the Rear Cover.2. Remove one screw and the Ozone Filter Cover.3. Replace the Ozone Filter with a new one.

(16) Replacement of the Toner Collecting Box1. Remove six screws and the Rear Cover.2. Replace the Toner Collecting Box with a new one.

D-35

2-6. PC Drum Charge Corona/Image Transfer Corona Unit

(1) Cleaning/Replacement of the Drum Charge Corona Wire

1. Press the Mesh holder and remove the ChargeCorona Grid Mesh.

3. Remove the Charge Corona Wire, first at the springend.

4. Replace the Charge Corona Wire with a new one.

2. Remove the two Mesh Holder Covers.

If the Drum Charge Corona Wire is seriouslycontaminated, dampen a soft cloth with alcohol, holdit with a pair of tweezers, and wipe the Wire gently inone direction - from the hook end to the spring end.

NOTE

When reinstalling the Grid Mesh Holder, note thearrows shown on the left.

NOTE

1. Open the Front Door.2. Clean the Drum Charge Corona Wire using the

Corona Unit Cleaning Lever.

D-36

(2) Cleaning of the PC Drum Charge Corona Grid MeshBlow all foreign matter off the Grids with a blower brush.

If the blower brush is not effective in cleaning theGrids, use a soft cloth dampened with alcohol toclean serious contamination.

NOTE

Place the Grid Mesh on a flat surface and sweep thecloth along the mesh.Do not touch the cleaned Grid Mesh with bare hands.

NOTE

(3) Cleaning of the PC Drum Charge Corona Housing1. Remove the Grid Mesh.2. Remove the two Holder Covers.3. Remove the Charge Corona Wire, first at the spring

end.4. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, clean the

Charge Corona Housing.

(4) Cleaning/Replacement of the Image Transfer Corona Wire1. Open the Front Door.2. Clean the Image Transfer Corona Wire using the

Corona Wire Cleaning Lever.

If the Image Transfer Corona Wire is seriouslycontaminated, dampen a soft cloth with alcohol, holdit with a pair of tweezers, and wipe the Wire gently inone direction - from the hook end to the spring end.

NOTE

D-37

1. Remove the two Holder Covers.

2. Remove the Corona Wire, first at the spring end.3. Replace the Corona Wire with a new one.

(5) Cleaning/Replacement of the Paper Separator Corona Wire1. Remove the four Paper Guides.

2. Dampen a soft cloth with alcohol, hold it with a pair oftweezers, and wipe the Paper Separator Corona Wiregently in one direction - from hook end to spring end.

1. Remove the two Holder Covers.2. Remove the Corona Wire, first at the spring end.3. Replace the Corona Wire with a new one.

D-38

(6) Cleaning of the Image Transfer/Paper Separator Corona Housing1. Remove the four Paper Guides.2. Remove the two Holder Covers.3. Remove the Image Transfer and Paper Separator

Corona Wires - first at the spring end.4. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the

Housing clean.

(7) Cleaning of the Image Transfer Guide PlateUsing a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, clean theLower Pre- Image Transfer Guide Plate.

D-39

2-7. Fusing Unit

(1) Removal of the Fusing Unit

1. Remove two screws and the Front Cover.

5. Unplug the Heater Lamp Connector CN (1P) at thefront of the copier.

6. Remove one screw and the Lamp Holder at the rear ofthe copier.

7. Unclamp the Heater Lamp Wire.8. Remove the Heater Lamp.

2. Unplug the Heater Lamp Connector CN (1P) at thefront of the copier.

3. Unclamp the Heater Lamp Wire.4. Remove one screw and the Lamp Holder at the front

of the copier.

1. Open the Left Door.2. Remove one screw and the Fusing Unit.

(2) Disassembly of the Fusing Unit

9. Remove two screws and the Upper Cover.

D-40

10. Remove two screws and the Upper Fusing GuidePlate.

When reinstalling the Upper Fusing Guide Plate, besure that both ends of the Plate make full contact withthe Frame.

NOTE

11. Remove the harness from the Harness Guide.12. Unplug the harness connectors CNs (4P, 4P).

13. Remove two screws and the Harness Guide Plate.14. Remove one screw and the Thermal Switch Wire.

15. Remove two screws and the Temperature DetectorAssy.

D-41

When reinstalling the Temperature Detector Assy, besure that both ends of the Assy make full contact withthe frame.

NOTE

16. Remove two screws and the Lower Guide Plate.

When reinstalling the Lower Guide Plate, press thePlate in the direction of the arrows. Make sure thatgap A shown in the figure is 0.8 mm. Also make surethat the rear end of the Lower Guide Plate is pressedagainst, not riding on, the rear bushing of the M7 jamremoval shaft.

NOTE

17. Remove two screws and the Lower Exit Guide Assy.

18. Loosen the screw that secures the spring bracket atthe front of the copier and then unhook the spring atthe top.Repeat the step for the spring at the rear of the copier.

When reinstalling the springs, altemately tighten thebracket mounting screws untill the bracketscompletely contact the ends of the Lower Exit GuideAssy.

NOTE

D-42

19. Remove the Lower Fusing Roller.

20. Remove the two Springs.21. Remove the two E- rings from the Cleaning Roller and

then the Roller.

22. Remove two screws and the Upper Fusing Roller.

(3) Replacement/Cleaning of the Upper Paper Separator Fingers1. Remove five Springs.2. Slide out the Shaft and then remove the Upper Paper

Separator Fingers.3. Replace the Separator Fingers with new ones.

D-43

Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or silicone oil,wipe clean the Upper Paper Separator Fingers.

(4) Cleaning of the Lower Paper Separator FingersUsing a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or silicone oil,wipe clean the Lower Paper Separator Fingers.

(5) Cleaning of the Lower Guide PlateUsing a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe clean theLower Guide Plate.

(6) Cleaning of the ThermistorsUsing a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe clean theThermistors.

(7) Cleaning of the Thermal SwitchUsing a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe clean theThermal Switch.

D-44

(8) Replacement/Cleaning of the Cleaning Roller1. Remove two screws and the Upper Cover.2. Remove the Cleaning Roller.3. Install a new Cleaning Roller.

Using a brush, wisk dust off the Cleaning Roller.

(9) Replacement/Cleaning of the Upper Fusing Roller1. Remove the Upper Fusing Roller.2. Install a new Upper Fusing Roller.

Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or silicone oil,wipe clean the Upper Fusing Roller.

(10) Replacement/Cleaning of the Lower Fusing Roller1. Remove the Lower Fusing Roller.2. Install a new Lower Fusing Roller.

D-45

Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or silicone oil,wipe clean the Lower Fusing Roller.

(11) Removal of the Exit/Duplex Switching Unit1. Remove the Rear Cover.2. Open the Left Door.3. Remove the Upper Left Cover.

1136D304AA

4. Remove four screws and the Sorter Connector Assy.5. Remove one screw and the grounding wire.6. Unplug two connectors CNs (2P), one each from the

Solenoid and Actuator.

7. Remove one E-ring from the Exit/Duplex SwitchingUnit Mounting Shaft.

8. Unclamp the harness at the places indicated by thearrows.

9. Remove one belt retaining screw.10. Remove two screws and the Bracket.11. Remove the Exit/Duplex Switching Unit.

(12) Disassembly of the Exit/Duplex Switching Unit1. Remove two screws and the cover.2. Remove three screws and the Exit Cover Assy.

D-46

3. Remove four screws and the Tray Holder.4. Remove two screws and the ES Cleaner.

1136D240AA

5. Remove the harness from three clamps.6. Unplug the solenoid connector CN (2P).

1136D241AA

7. Remove the gear.8. Unclamp the harness at four places.

9. Remove two screws and the Tray Holder.

10. Remove four screws and the Upper Guide Plate.

D-47

11. Remove the harness from one clamp.12. Remove one screw and the solenoid.

1136D245AA

When reinstalling the solenoid, maintain gap A shownon the left at 4.0 mm to 4.5 mm.

NOTE

13. Remove two C-clips and the Switching Fingers.

14. Remove two C-clips and the 2nd Paper Exit Roller.

15. Remove three E-rings and the Roller.

D-48

3 ADJUSTMENT3-1. JIGS AND TOOLS USED◆ Important• When adjusting the copier, use the jigs shown below:• The position of the Scanner and Mirrors Carriage: jigs no. ➂ and ➃• The gap between the Doctor Blade and Sleeve Roller: jigs no. ➄ and ➅• The position of the PC Drum Paper Separator Fingers: jigs no. ➄ and ➆• Jig no. ➁ , Pre-Drive Inhibit Switch Actuating Jig, is the same as the Interlock Switch Jig used for

model EP3170.• Jig no. ➅ , D.B. Adjusting jig, is the same as the one used for model EP1080.

➀ Front Door InterlockSwitch Actuating Jig

➁ Pre-Drive Inhibit SwitchActuating Jig

➂ Scanner Positioning Jig ➃ Scanner/CarriagePositioning Jig

➄ Sleeve/Magnet RollerPositioning Jig

➅ D.B. Adjusting Jig

➆ PC Drum PaperSeparator FingerPositioning Jig

D-49

3-2. ADJUSTMENT REQUIREMENT LIST

Adjustment Item Requirement Adjusting Point Page

Exposure Setting (manualmode)

Kodak Gray Scale:No image on the 1st stepFaint image on the 2nd step

Control Panel D-59

Crosswise Magnification,Full Size

(×1.000) 200 ±1.0 mm Control Panel D-61

Crosswise Magnification,Enlargement


Crosswise Magnification,Reduction


Feed DirectionMagnification, Full Size


Feed DirectionMagnification, Enlargement


Feed DirectionMagnification, Reduction


Manual Bypass TableReference Position

(×1.000) 20 ±2.0 mm Manual Bypass Table D-65

1st Drawer ReferencePosition

(×1.000) 20 ±2.0 mm Drawer Positioning Plate D-66

2nd Drawer ReferencePosition

(×1.000) 20 ±2.0 mm Drawer Positioning Plate D-66

Leading Edge Registration,Full Size


Leading Edge Registration,Enlargement


Leading Edge Registration,Reduction


Single-Sided Book secondpage Leading EdgeRegistration


Image Leading Edge EraseWidth

(×1.000) 1∼ 6.5 mm Control Panel D-73

Image Trailing Edge EraseWidth

(×1.000) 0.5∼ 5.5 mm Control Panel D-75

Unexposed Areas/EdgeErase Lamp Position

(×1.000) 0.5∼ 3.0 mmEdge Erase With AdjusterScrew

D-77

D-50

Wiring for the NO Type

Red

Yellow

NC (Normally-Closed) : Current flows between NC and COM when the actuator is open.

NO (Normally-Open) : Current flows between NO and COM when the actuator is closed.

COM (Common) : Common contact for NC and NO

◆ Out-of-Adjustment (When the actuator is closed)• If the gap between the switch and actuator is too big, current does not at times flow to NC or NO. • If there is no gap between the switch and actuator, the actuator is bent or the switch can be broken.

Wiring for the NC Type

Red

Blue

0.1 mm to0.5 mm

NCNO

COM

ActuatorThe gap between the switch and actuator should be 0.1mm to 0.5 mm when the actuator is closed.

◆ Requirement

3-3. ADJUSTMENT OF SWITCHES◆ Microswitches• The following microswitches are used in various parts of this copier.

D-51

1. Open the Front Door.2. Remove the Left Upper Cover. (4 screws)

(1) Adjustment of Front Door Interlock Switch S21

3. Remove the B Board Protection Cover. (3 screws)4. Loosen the two screws that secure the Front Door

Interlock Switch. (2 screws)

1136D011AA

5. Close the Front Door.6. Gently move the switch toward the front side of the

copier until the actuator is closed by the actuator stopon the Front Door. Tighten the two S21 mountingscrews.

• Note that S21 is to be configured as a NO switch.

D-52

3-4. Adjustment of Belt Tension◆ Important• Before adjusting, make sure that all gears are positively meshed and the belts snugly fit in pulley

grooves.• When making a rough judgement of belt tension, press down on the belt midway on its longest

span (indicated by thin arrow in the figure below).

Belt Tension Deflection (Reference only)

(1) Paper Take-Up Unit Timing Belt 300 ±100 g Approx. 3 mm

(2) Developing Unit Timing Belt 350 ±100 g Approx. 4 mm

(3) Fusing Unit Timing Belt 350 ±100 g Approx. 3 mm

(4) PC Unit Timing Belt 350 ±100 g Approx. 5 mm

1. Loosen the two screws that hold the tension lever. Press the tension lever in the direction of thearrow. When belt tension is correct, tighten the two screws.

300 ±100 g

350 ±100 g 350 ±100 g

350 ±100 g

D-53

1. Loosen the three screws on the motor sliding plateuntil it can move smoothly.

2. Finger-turn the motor shaft two or three turns.

(5) Adjustment of Scanner Drive Motor Timing Belt

3. Rotate the motor case counterclockwise andclockwise and then release the motor. Make sure thatthe coil spring smoothly returns the motor case andthe motor sliding plate to the original position. Verifythe spring operation by repeating the rotation.

4. Tighten the screws, first screw A, B and then C.

Check that one end of the coil spring is in the correcthole in the plate as shown.

NOTE

D-54

3-5. Electrical/Image Adjustments

(1) Adjustment of the Original Size Detecting Board◆ Important• This adjustment must be made after memory has been cleared or the RAM Board or Original Size

Detecting Board has been replaced; or the Original Size Detecting Sensor is replaced or a sensoris added.

1136D017AA

1. Close the Original Cover with no paper on the OriginalGlass.

2. Open the System Panel.3. Place Service Card 1 on the Supplementary Panel.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 C

1136P11DAA

4. On the Control Panel, press the Stop Key, Multi-CopyKey 0, Stop Key and Multi-Copy Key 1, in that order.The copier enters the Tech. Rep. Program mode.

1136P02DCA

Tech. Rep. Card-1SecurityMode

Tech. RepChoice

Jam Paper

ADFSetting Retry Port

ROMVersion

Function Trouble Maintenance

Auto CPUReset Consumables

SystemInput

Paper SizeInput

Enter: 0 1

Counter

Card-1

Function Mode

Card-1

5. Press Multi-Copy Key 1, Function Mode Key (on theService Card) and Multi-Copy Key 7 to set the copierinto Test mode F7.

6. Press the Start Key and the Copier starts theadjustment.

7. When the Start Key lights green, press the PanelReset key to return to the initial mode.

During the adjustment, the Start Key lights orangeand returns to green upon completion of theadjustment.

NOTE

D-55

(2) Adjustment of the ATDC Sensor

◆ Important• Perform this adjustment only after replacing the developer.

1. Disassemble the PC Unit and fill the Developing Unitwith new developer. For developer replacementprocedure, see page D-32.

2. Replace the components removed during thereplacement and then return the unit to the copier.


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 C

1136P11DAA


1136P02DCA


Tech. RepChoice

Jam Paper


ROMVersion



SystemInput

Paper SizeInput

Enter: 0 1

Counter

Card-1

Function Mode

Card-1


7. Press the Start Key and the Copier starts theadjustment.


9. Note the ATDC reference level shown on themessage display and log the level onto the FactorySettings Label. Refer to Section TECH. REP.PROGRAM MODE in the SWITCHES ON PWBsmanual.

During the adjustment (for approx. 3 minutes), theStart Key lights orange and returns to green uponcompletion of the adjustment.

NOTE

D-56

(3) Adjustment of the Aperture Blades

◆ Requirement• After adjustment, there should be no dark or light bands running in the feeding direction on the

reproduced image.◆ Important• If a dark or light band running in the feeding direction is found on copies, go to the following steps

before starting the adjustment.

1) Clean the Drum Charge Corona Wire, Grid Mesh and Image Transfer Corona Wire asnecessary.

2) Clean the surface of the Mirrors and Lens as necessary.3) Verify that the surfaces of the Exposure Lamp and Main Erase Lamp are free of dirt.4) Verify that the Cleaning Blade is free of waviness.

1. Make a copy under the following control panel settings.Original: A3 or A4C

11" × 17" or 11" × 8-1/2" (crosswise)Paper: A3L (11" × 17") or A4C (11" × 8-1/2")

11" × 17" or 11" × 8-1/2" (crosswise)Magnification: 100%Exposure: Manual (setting convenient for checking)

2. Remove the Original Glass.3. Turn the copy on the Copy Tray around as shown to

reverse the leading and trailing edges and align it withthe Aperture Blades.

4. Adjust to obtain the center image density for all areason the copy.

To make the image darker, move the Aperture Bladetoward the Auxiliary Reflector.To make the image lighter, move the Aperture Bladeaway from the Auxiliary Reflector.

NOTE

D-57

(4) Adjustment of Exposure Level in the Auto Mode

1. Select the Auto Exposure Mode.Place five sheets of A3 or 11" × 17" white paper (noimage) on the Original Glass and close the OriginalCover.


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 C

1136P11DAA

4. On the Control Panel, press the Stop Key, Multi-CopyKey 0, Stop Key and Multi-Copy Key 1 in that order.The copier enters the Tech. Rep. Program mode.

1136P02DCA


Tech. RepChoice

Jam Paper


ROMVersion



SystemInput

Paper SizeInput

Enter: 0 1

Counter

Card-1

Function Mode

Card-1


6. Press the Start Key and the Copier starts the AutoExposure adjustment.


8. Go to p. D-59.

During the adjustment (for approx. 30 seconds), theStart Key lights orange and returns to green uponcompletion of the adjustment.

NOTE

D-58

(5) Adjustment of Exposure Level in the Manual mode◆ Requirement• Setting range: 44-56• No image of step No. 1 of the Kodak Gray Scale should be reproduced on the copy, but a faint

image of step No. 2 should be reproduced when the center LED on the Exposure Level Indicatoris lit.

◆ Important• This adjustment should be follow Checking Auto Exposure Level and Adjustment of the Aperture

Blades.

A M1 2 3 4 5 6

1136D300AA

1. Place the Kodak Gray Scale (KGS) lengthwise, facedown and at the center on the Original Glass. Place asheet of white (no image) A3 or 11" × 17" paper overthe KGS and then close the Original Cover.

2. Set the copier into the Manual Exposure mode. Usingthe Exposure Control keys, set the exposure level sothat the center LED on the Exposure Level Indicatorlights. Make 15 A3 or 11" × 17" copies and check thatthe 15th copy meets the exposure requirement givenabove.If the requirement is not met, perform the followingadjustment steps.


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 C

1136P11DAA


D-59

1136P04DCA


Tech. RepChoice

Jam Paper


ROMVersion



SystemInput

Paper SizeInput

Enter: 0 1

Counter

Card-1

Tech. Rep Choice

Card-1

6. Press Multi-Copy key 1 and the Tech. Rep. Choicekey (on the card).

7. Press the OK key (on the card) repeatedly until theDisplay Panel shows the message "Exp. Lamp ManualAdjust".

8. Note the value shown below the message. Press theClear key to clear the value.

9. Using the Multi-Copy keys, increase or decrease thevalue with respect to the noted value for optimumexposure level:

To make the image darker: decrease the value.To make the image lighter: increase the value.

Adjustment procedure

1136P06DCA

EA

xd

pj

.uX

sX

Lt(

a:4

m

4

p

5

M

6

a

)

n u a l10. Press the Panel Reset key to return to the initial copy

mode.11. Go to p. D-58, (4) Adjustment of Exposure Level in the

Auto Mode followed by (5) Checking Manual ExposureLevel and Steps 1 and 2 of this adjustment.

D-60

(6) Adjustment of Crosswise Magnification◆ Requirement

1136D025AA

• A copy of dimension A on the GTC-001 chart shouldmeasure the value shown in the table below whencopied under the conditions given in the table.

• Setting range: 43-58

Magnification Tolerance Adjustment mode

Full size (×1.000) 200 ±1.0 mm

A-1Enlargement (×2.000) 200 ±1.5 mm

Reduction (×0.500) 100 ±1.5 mm

◆ Important• This adjustment should be made before the adjustments for Reference Position, Adjustments (8)

and (9).

1. Place the GTC-001 chart face down on the OriginalGlass and align its rear left corner with the referenceposition marker on the Original Width Scale on the leftside of the platen. Close the Original Cover.

2. Make five full size copies on A3 paper. Compare thedimension of reference line A on the 5th copy with thaton the test chart. If the dimension is outside thetolerance, adjust the magnification setting in thefollowing procedure.

3. Open the System Panel.

D-61

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 C

1136P11DAA


5. Press Multi-Copy Key 1, Stop key and then Start keyto enter the Adjustment Mode.

6. Press the OK key (supplementary panel) repeatedlyuntil the Display Panel shows the message "Lens FullSize Position (A 1)".

7. Note the value shown under the message and thenpress the Clear key to clear the current setting.

8. Using the Multi-Copy keys, increase or decrease thevalue with respect to the noted value for the correctmagnification.

When the copy of dimension A (200 mm) is:199 mm or less: increase the value.201 mm or more: decrease the value.


1136P08DCA

LP

eo

ns

siX

tX

Fi(

uo4

ln3

l: 5

S

8

i()

zA

e1 ) 9. Press the Panel Reset key to return to the initial copy

mode. 10. Make copies of the chart in enlargement and reduction

modes and verify that dimension A on the copies iswithin tolerance.

In the enlargement mode, only half of dimension A ofthe scale on chart GTC-001 can be measured; hence,the measurement of 200 ±1.5 mm in the table.

NOTE

D-62

(7) Adjustment of Feed Direction Magnification◆ Requirement

1136D028AA

• A copy of dimension A on the GTC-001 chart shouldmeasure the value shown in the table below whencopied under the conditions given in the table.

• Setting range: 46-54


Full size (×1.000) 300 ±1.5 mm

A-3Enlargement (×2.000) 300 ±1.5 mm

Reduction (×0.500) 150 ±2.5 mm

◆ Important• This adjustment should be performed before (10) Adjustment of the Leading Edge Registration.


2. Make five full size copies on A3 paper. Compare thedimension of reference line A on the 5th copy with thaton the test chart. If the copy of dimension A is outsidethe tolerance, adjust the magnification setting in thefollowing procedure.


D-63

6. Press the OK key (supplementary panel) repeatedlyuntil the Display Panel shows the message " FeedDirection Mag. Ratio: (A 3)".

7. Note the value shown under the message and thenpress the Clear key to clear the current setting.

8. Using the Multi-Copy keys, increase or decrease thevalue with respect to the noted value for the correctmagnification:

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 C

1136P11DAA


5. Press Multi-Copy Key 1, Stop key and then Start keyto enter the Adjustment Mode.

When the copy of dimension A (300 mm) is:298.5 mm or less: increase the value.301.5 mm or more: decrease the value.


1136P10DCA

FM

ea

eg

d.X X

DR(

ia4

rt6

ei

co5

t:4

i()

oA

n3 ) 9. Press the Panel Reset key to return to the initial copy

mode. 10. Make copies of the chart in the enlargement and

reduction modes and verify that dimension A on thecopies is within tolerance.

In the enlargement mode, only half of dimension A ofthe scale on chart GTC-001 can be measured; hence,the measurement of 300 ±1.5 mm in the table.

NOTE

D-64

1136D031AA

4. If the measured width is not 20 ±2.0 mm, loosen thethree screws that hold the Manual Bypass Table andmove the Table in the direction of the arrow:

(8) Adjustment of the Manual Bypass Table Reference Position◆ Requirement

1136D029AA

• A copy of horizontal lines A (width 20 mm), shown in theleft figure, in the GTC-001 chart, should have a width of20 ±2.0 mm.

◆ Important• This adjustment should be made after completion of the steps described in (6) Adjustment of

Crosswise Magnification.

1136D030AA

1. Place the GTC-001 chart face down on the OriginalGlass and align its rear left corner with the referencemarker on the Original Width Scale on the left side ofthe platen. Close the Original Cover.

2. Feeding two sheets of A3 or 11" × 17" paper throughthe Manual Bypass Table, make two full size copies.

3. Measure the width of lines A on the second copy.

When the copy of dimension A is 18 mm or less:move the Table to the front. When the copy ofdimension A is 22 mm or more: move the Table to therear.


When an ADF is mounted, it involves changing theOriginal Glass. This in turn, results in the position ofthe Original Length Scale being slightly shiftedtoward the rear. This is corrected by the OriginalPositioning Plate when the Original Cover is closed.

NOTE

D-65

1136D029AA

• A copy of horizontal lines A (width 20 mm), shown in theleft figure, in the GTC-001 chart, should have a width of20 ±2.0 mm.

1136D030AA


2. Feeding two sheets of A3 or 11" × 17" paper from the1st Drawer, make two full size copies.

3. Measure the width of lines A on the second copy.

(9) Adjustment of the 1st/2nd Drawer Reference Postion◆ Requirement

◆ Important• This adjustment should be made after completion of the steps described in (6) Adjustment of

Crosswise Magnification.

1136D032AA

4. If the measured width is not 20 ±2.0 mm, slide out the1st Drawer. Loosen the two screws shown in the leftfigure and move the Tray Positioning Plate toward thefront or rear.

5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to adjust the reference position ofthe 2nd Drawer.

When the copy of width A is 18 mm or less: move thePlate toward the rear. When the copy of width A is 22mm or more: move the Plate toward the front.


D-66

(10) Adjustment of the Leading Edge Registration

• A copy of the vertical lines (width A is 20 mm), shown inthe left figure, of the GTC-001 chart, should have awidth of 20 ±1.5 mm.

• Setting range: 40-60• Unit of image leading edge movement: 0.4 mm


Full size (×1.000) 20 ±1.5 mm A-4

Enlargement (×2.000) 40 ±3.0 mm A-11

Reduction (×0.500) 10 ±1.5 mm A-5

◆ Important• This adjustment should be made after completion of the steps described in (7) Adjustment of Feed

Direction Magnification.

1136D033AA


2. Make two single copies on A3 or 11" × 17" paper infull size mode and check the second copy for leadingedge registration.When the registration is within the tolerance, go to"Enlargement" of this adjustment. Otherwise, go tostep 3.


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 C

1136P11DAA


5. Press Multi-Copy key 1, Stop key and then Start keyto enter the adjustment mode.

Full Size

◆ Requirement

D-67

6. Press the OK Key repeatedly until the Display Panelshows the message "Lens Position Full Size: (A 4)".

7. Note the value shown below the message and thenpress the Clear key to clear the setting.

8. Using the Multi-Copy keys, increase or decrease thesetting with respect to the noted value for the correctdimension of A on the copy:

1136P13DCA

LF

eu

nl

slX

X

PS(

oi4

sz0

ie

t:6

i

0

o()

nA 4 )

9. Press the Panel Reset key to return to the initial copymode.

When the copy of dimension A is 18.5 mm or less:decrease the setting.When the copy of dimension A is 21.5 mm or more:increase the setting.


Enlargement

◆ Requirement• A copy of the vertical lines (width A is 20 mm) of the GTC-001 chart should have a width of 40

±3.0 mm.• Setting range: 40-60• Unit of image leading edge movement: 0.8 mm◆ Important• This adjustment should be made after completion of the adjustment for the leading edge in full

size.

1. Make two single copies on A3 or 11" × 17" paper inenlargement mode (×2.000) and check the secondcopy for leading edge registration. When theregistration is within the tolerance, go to "Reduction"of this adjustment. Otherwise, go to step 2.


D-68

5. Press the OK Key repeatedly until the Display Panelshows the message "Lens Position Enlargement (A11)".

6. Note the value shown below the message and thenpress the Clear key to clear the current setting.


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 C

1136P11DAA



1136P15DCA

LE

en

nl

saX

rX

Pg(

oe4

sm0

ie

tn6

it0

o()

nA 1 1 )

8. Press the Panel Reset key to return to the initial mode.

When the copy of dimension A is 37.0 mm or less:decrease the setting.When the copy of dimension A is 43.0 mm or more:increase the setting.


Reduction

◆ Requirement• A copy of the vertical lines (width A is 20 mm) of the GTC-001 chart should have a width of 10

±1.5 mm.• Setting range: 40-60• Unit of image leading edge movement: 0.2 mm◆ Important• This adjustment should be made after completion of the leading edge adjustment in full size.

1. Make two single copies on A3 or 11" × 17" paper inreduction mode (×0.500) and check the second copyfor leading edge registration. If the registration isoutside the tolerance, go to step 2.

D-69


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 C

1136P11DAA



5. Press the OK Key repeatedly until the Display Panelshows the message "Lens Position Reduction: (A 5)".



1136P17DCA

LR

ee

nd

suX

cX

Pt(

oi4

so0

in

t:6

i

0

o()

nA 5 )


When the copy of dimension A is 8.5 mm or less:decrease the settings.When the copy of dimension A is 11.5 mm or more:increase the settings.


D-70

(11) Adjustment of Single-Sided Book second page Leading EdgeRegistration

◆ Requirement

1136D036AA

• A copy of reference dimension A (width 20 mm), shownin the left figure, of an A3 test chart, should have awidth of 20 ±3.0 mm on the second page. Note that B =C.

• Setting range: 45-55• Unit of image leading edge movement (on the second

page): 0.4 mm

2. Open the System Panel.3. Press the Book Mode key once to select Book 1

(single-sided) mode. 4. In the full size mode (×1.000), make two single copies

on A4 crosswise or 11" × 8-1/2" paper.Check the second page of the second copy for leadingedge registration. If the registration error is outside thetolerance of 20 ±3.0 mm, go to step 5.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 C

1136P11DAA



1. Place the test chart face down on the Original Glassand align its rear left corner with the reference positionmarker on the Original Width Scale on the left side ofthe platen. Close the Original Cover.

7. Press the OK key repeatedly until the Display Panelshows the message "Book B-Scan Regist. : (A 6)".


9. Using the Multi-Copy keys, increase or decrease thesetting with respect to the noted value, for the correctdimension A on the copy:

D-71

1136P19DCA

BR

oe

og

kiX

sX

Bt(

|

.4

S:5

c a

5

n

5()

A 6 )


When the copy of dimension A is 17 mm or less:decrease the setting. When the copy of dimension A is 23 mm or more:increase the setting.


D-72

(12) Adjustment of the Image Leading Edge Erase Width◆ Requirement

• A copy of reference dimension A (width 6.5 mm), shownin the left figure, of the GTC-001 chart, should have anerase width of 1.0-6.5 mm.

• Setting range: 45-55• Unit of erase width: 1.0 mm

◆ Important• This adjustment should be made after the leading edge registration adjustments (Full size,

Enlargement and Reduction, and Book).


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 C

1136P11DAA




2. In the full size mode (×1.000), make two single copieson A3 or 11" × 17" paper. Check the erase width indimension A on the second copy. If the erase width isoutside 1.0-6.5 mm, go to step 3.

D-73

6. Press the OK key repeatedly until the Display Panelshows the message "Leading Edge Erase: (A 12)".


8. Using the Multi-Copy keys, increase or decrease thesetting with respect to the noted value, for the correcterase width in dimension A on the copy:

1136P21DCA

LE

er

aa

dsX

ieX

n:(

g

4 5

E d

5

g

5

e()

A 1 2 )


When the copy of dimension A is 1.0 mm or less:increase the setting.When the copy of dimension A is 6.5 mm or more:decrease the setting.


D-74

(13) Adjustment of the Image Trailing Edge Erase Width◆ Requirement


• Setting range: 42-58• Unit of erase width: 1.0 mm

◆ Important• This adjustment should be made after the Image Leading Edge Erase Width adjustment.• Before starting the adjustment, make sure that SCH-21 is set at "Edge Erase On". Refer to the

Tech. Rep. Program mode in the SWITCHES ON PWBs manual.


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 C

1136P11DAA



1136D042AA


2. In the full size mode (×1.000), make two single copieson A3 or 11" × 17" paper. Check the erase width indimension A on the second copy. If the erase width isoutside 0.5-5.5 mm, go to step 3.

D-75

6. Press the OK key repeatedly until the Display Panelshows the message "Trailing Edge Erase: (A 13)".


8. Using the Multi-Copy keys, increase or decreasesetting with respect to the noted value for the correcterase width in dimension A on the copy:

1136P23DCA

TE

rr

aa

isX

leX

i:(

n

4

g

2

E

5

d

8

g()

eA 1 3 )

9. Press the Panel Reset key to return to the initial copymode.

When the copy of dimension A is 0.5 mm or less:increase the setting.When the copy of dimension A is 5.5 mm or more:decrease the setting.


D-76

(14) Adjustment of the Unexposed Areas/Edge Erase Lamp Position ◆ Requirement


◆ Important• This adjustment must be made after the reference positions of the Manual Bypass Table and 1st

and 2nd Drawers have been adjusted.

3. Check the erase width in dimension A on the secondcopy. If the erase width is outside 0.5-3.0 mm, turn theEdge Width Adjuster screw in the direction shownbelow:

1136D044AA


2. Make five single copies on A3 or 11" × 17" paper inthe full size mode (×1.000).

When the erase width in dimension A is 0.5 mm orless: clockwise.When the erase width in dimension A is 3.0 mm ormore: counterclockwise.


D-77

3-6. Other Adjustments

(1) Focus-Positioning of the Scanner and Mirrors Carriage◆ Requirement• With the Scanner positioned in place on the copier upper frame, there should be no gap between

one end of the Scanner/Carriage Positioning jig and the Scanner and between the other end of thejig and the Mirrors Carriage. The space between the Scanner and Mirrors Carriage = 83.5 mm

◆ Important• This adjustment should be performed with the Scanner loosely attached to the Scanner Drive

Cable by slightly loosening the screw on the Scanner Drive Cable Holding Bracket.

2. Install the Scanner/Carriage Positioning jig betweenthe Scanner and the Mirrors Carriage.

1. Align the rectangular hole in the upper copier framewith the U groove in the Scanner. Insert the ScannerPositioning jig.

5. Tighten the screw on the Scanner Drive Wire HoldingBracket.

1136D048AA

83.5 mm

3. Press the Mirrors Carriage in the direction of the arrow.4. Verify that both ends of the Scanner/Carriage

Positioning jig have no gap.

D-78

(2) Adjustment of the Gap Between the Doctor Blade and Sleeve Roller◆ Requirement• The gap between the Doctor Blade and Sleeve Roller should be in the range of 0.33 to 0.40 mm.

1136D050AA

3. Using a brush, wipe the developer off the surface ofthe Sleeve Roller.

1. Remove the PC Unit, PC Drum Charge Corona andPC Drum.

2. Remove the Developer Scattering Prevention Plate byfirst removing two mounting screws.

5. Loosen the three screws securing the Doctor Blade.Insert the D.B. Adjusting jigs between the DoctorBlade and Sleeve Roller.

6. Press down the Doctor Blade until it positivelycontacts the D.B. Adjusting jigs, then tighten the threescrews to secure the Doctor Blade.

4. Install the Sleeve/Magnet Roller Positioning Jig ontothe PC Unit.

D-79

(3) Adjustment of the PC Drum Paper Separator Finger Position◆ Requirement• The gap between the PC Drum and Paper Separator Fingers should be 1.0 ±0.5 mm when the

Separator solenoid is deenergized.◆ Important• Use care not to deform the Separator Fingers during the adjustment procedure.

2. Using a hexsocket wrench, turn the set screw on oneFinger Holder to adjust the gap between the Fingerand PC Drum as described below.

3. Verify that the other Paper Separator Finger operatesin the same way. If not, perform step 2.

With the solenoid deenergized, the tip of the Fingershould be at a point between A and B.With the solenoid energized, the tip of the Fingershould touch point C.

A ....... 41.5 mm B ....... 40.5 mm C ....... 40.0 mm


If correct values cannot be obtained, loosen the twosolenoid mounting screws and adjust the position ofthe solenoid. Then repeat step 2.

NOTE

1136D055AA

1136D053AA

1. Attach the PC Drum Paper Separator FingerPositioning jig to the PC Unit.

D-80

(4) Adjustment of the Paper Lifting Plate Springs (1st and 2nd Drawers)◆ Important• When the size of the paper loaded in the 1st or 2nd Drawer has been changed, be sure to change

the Springs. When changing the Springs, also change the position of the Springs and PaperTake-Up Roll of the Drawer.

• Each drawer uses two Springs and has two spare Springs stored in the underside of the drawer.• For disassembly of the Paper Take-Up Roll Unit, refer to p. D-12.

1. Determine the correct Springs, spring position and Paper Take- Up Roll Unit position by referringto the table below.

Example Paper size: A4 lengthwise or 8-1/2" × 11"1) Place one SP Silver spring in the drawer at ALL SP1. 1-9, SP2. 10-14. 2) Place the other SP Silver spring at SP1. 6-9, SP2. 10-14.3) Place the Paper Take-Up Roll Unit at position No. 3.

Position of 1st (2nd) Drawer Spring 1st (2nd)DrawerPaperTake-UpRollPosition

No.1st (2nd) DrawerPaper SizeIndication

ALLSP1. 1~9SP2. 10~14

SP2. 12~14SP1. 6~9SP2. 10~11

SP1. 2~5 SP1. 1

1 A3/A4

SP Silver

SP Silver 6

2 11"×17"⋅LTR.

SP Silver

5

3 G. LTR 5

4 B4/B5 4

5 254 4

6

SP Silver

3

7 FLS. 3

8 LTR. 3

9 A4 3

10 FLS.

SP Gold

SP Gold

2

11 B5 2

12

SP Gold

1

13 A5 1

14 INV. 1

Ed

ge

Gu

ide

D-81

3. Remove the Hinge Shaft from the front PaperSeparator Finger and then the Finger.

4. Remove the screw from Side Guide Plate I.

5. Lift the hinged portion and then swing the PaperLifting Plate in the direction of the arrow. Change thesprings. Close the Plate.

1. Pull out the 1st Drawer and remove the stopper screwand then the stopper.

2. Remove the Drawer.

Replacement of SpringsThis procedure is for the 1st Drawer. The steps also apply to the 2nd drawer.

D-82

4 MISCELLANEOUS4-1. Installation of Plug-in Counter (Option) Mounting Bracket

4. Remove the Right Cover by removing two screws.

5. Remove the Counter Cover.6. Remove the four screws from the Right Cover and

then the cover.

7. Remove the PC Unit.8. Remove the B Board Protection Cover by first

removing two screws.

1. Open the Right Cover.2. Remove the harness from the Wire Saddle.3. Unplug three CN connectors, 2P, 3P and 3P.

9. Connect the Plug-in Counter Connector.10. Secure the Plug-in Counter Mounting Bracket with two

screws.

D-83

MEMO



Printed in Japan


EP2050

SWITCHES ON PWBs,TECH. REP. MODE

1-1. Precautions for Transportation and Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-11-2. Precautions for Replacement/Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1

2-1. Master Board (PWB-A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-22-2. Power Supply Board (PWB-C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-32-3. Original Size Detecting Board (UN2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-32-4. Tech. Rep. Settings Switches Board (PWB-I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-4

3-1. Tech. Rep. Mode Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-63-2. Function Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-93-3. Tech. Rep. Choice Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-123-4. Paper Size Input Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-193-5. System Setting Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-21

A. Changing the fixed zoom ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-21B. Setting the Plug-In Counter/D-102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-22C. Setting the marketing area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-23

3-6. Counter Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-24A. Paper Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-25B. Jam Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-26C. Feed Retry Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-27D. Trouble Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-28E. Maintenance Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-31F. Port/Option Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-32G. Consumables Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-33H. Auto CPU Reset Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-34

3-7. ROM Version Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-353-8. ADF Setting Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-363-9. Security Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-383-10. I/O Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-393-11. Level History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-49

CONTENTS

1 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE PWBs

2 FUNCTION OF SWITCHES AND VARIABLE RESISTORS ON PWBs

3 TECH. REP. MODE

i

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-51

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-59

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-69

4 ADJUST MODE

5 USER’S CHOICE MODE

6 LIST OF SETTINGS TO BE MADE DUE TO PARTSREPLACEMENT OR MEMORY CLEARING

CONTENTS

ii

1 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE PWBs

1-1. Precautions for Transportation and Storagea) Before transporting or storing the PWBs, put them in protective conductive cases or bags

so that they are not subjected to high temperature (they are not exposed to direct sunlight).b) Protect the PWBs from any external force so that they are not bent or damaged.c) Once the PWB has been removed from its conductive case or bag, never place it directly

on an object that is easily charged with static electricity (carpet, plastic bags, etc.).d) Do not touch the parts and printed patterns on the PWBs with bare hands.

1-2. Precautions for Replacement/Inspectiona) Whenever replacing the PWB, make sure that the power cord of the copier has been

unplugged.b) When the power is on, the connectors must not be plugged in or unplugged.c) Use care not to strap the pins of an IC with a metal tool.d) When touching the PWB, wear a wrist strap and connect its cord to a securely grounded

place whenever possible. If you cannot wear a wrist strap, touch the metal part beforetouching the PWB to discharge static electricity.

S-1

2 FUNCTION OF SWITCHES AND VARIABLE RESISTORS ON PWBs

2-1. Master Board (PWB-A)

1136S003AA

LD2 LD1

TONERBOTTLE

S1

VR1

ON

OF

F

PWB-A2

1

1136S003AA

• VR1: DC 4.7V Adjusting Variable Resistor (for factory setting)• LD1: Power Voltage Check LED (DC 5V)• LD2: Power Voltage Check LED (DC 24V)• S1-2: Toner Collection Box Select Switch

S1AToner Collection Box

80K (Supplied)180K

(Can be fitted into the Paper Feed Cabinet)

ON ●

∗ OFF ●

∗ : Initial setting

S-2

2-2. Power Supply Board (PWB-C)

PWB-C

B A

S1C

1136S004AA

• S1C: When the DT-103 is fitted to the copier, this switch is used to maintain communication (DC5V applied) when the Power Switch is turned OFF.

S1C Description

Position A DC 5V is shut off when the Power is turned OFF.

Position B DC 5V is applied if the Power Switch is turned OFF.

2-3. Original Size Detecting Board (UN2)

UN2

J2

O

J1

O

1136S005AA

J1: When the optional Original Size Detecting Sensor FD1 has been installed, change the positionof the jumper connector.

J2: When the optional Original Size Detecting Sensors CD2, FD3 have been installed, change theposition of the jumper connector.

Note: When the optional Original Size Detecting Sensor(s) has (have) been installed and thepositions of the jumper connectors changed, the Function Mode "F7" must be executed.

Original Size Detecting Sensor

FD1 CD2 FD3

Yes No Yes No

Position of jumperconnector

1136S006AA

J1

O

1136S006AA

J2

O

1136S007AA

J1

O

1136S007AA

J2

O

S-3

2-4. Tech. Rep. Settings Switches Board

INI

PJ2

TROUBLE

S1

CONTRAST

VR1

TP1 TP3 TP2

GND TOTAL MEMORY

1136S008AA

Symbol Name Function Reset/Clear Method Application

PJ2 (INI) InitializePoints

Used to clear dataother than theProgram Memory,Electronic Counter,Tech. Rep./Userchoice and zoomratio data.

While connecting thetwo pins of PJ2, turnthe Power Switch ON.

Used when amalfunction cannotbe corrected byturning the PowerSwitch ON/OFF.

S1(TROUBLE)

TroubleResetSwitch

Used to reset troublerelated to ExposureLamp malfunction(C04xx) and Fusingmalfunction (C05xx).

Press the TroubleReset Switch aftercorrecting the area introuble.

To reset other troubleor misfeeds, openand close the FrontDoor.

VR1(CONTRAST)

ContrastAdjustingVariableResistor

Used to adjust thecontrast of theMessage Display.

TP2(MEMORY)

MemoryClear TestPoint

Used to clear all dataexcept the ElectronicCounter and LevelHistory (ATDC level).

While connecting theMemory Clear Pin(TP2) and GND Pin(TP1), turn the PowerSwitch ON.

Used when incorrectoperation cannot becorrected byinitializing.

TP1 (GND) GND TestPoint

Ground used formemory clear andtotal clear.

S-4

List of Data Cleared by the Switch and Points

Data ClearedInitialize Points

PJ2(INI)

Trouble ResetSwitch

S1(TROUBLE)

Memory Clear TestPointTP2

(MEMORY)

Trouble related toExposure Lampmalfunction (C04xx) andFusing malfunction(C05xx)

● ●

Other trouble and misfeeds ●

Incorrectoperation/incorrect display

●

Program memory ●

Tech. Rep. choice ●

Paper size ●

System setting ●

ADF setting ●

Adjust mode ●

User choice ●

S-5

3 TECH. REP. MODE• This mode is used by the Tech. Rep. to make various adjustments and settings and to perform

specific functions.

3-1. Tech. Rep. Mode Setting Procedure• Use the Tech. Rep. Card (1, 2) to set the Tech. Rep. Mode.

Tech. Rep. Card

SecurityMode

Maintenance

Consumables

Trouble

Auto CPUReset

Paper SizeInput

Paper

Port

Jam

Retry

Tech. Rep.Choice

ADFSetting

ROMVarsion

Tech. Rep. Card - 1

SystemInput

Enter F O P

Counter

Card - 2

Card - 1

Function

1136P04GCA

Tech. Rep.ID Code

PanelIndication

Memory

Port

PassageSensor

ControlBoad

LevelHistory

Data Load

MINOLTA CAMERA CO, LTD.

I/O Check

Data Save

InitialTransmission

CounterClear

RD Mode

Card - 2

Card - 1

Tech.Rep. Card - 2

1136P03GCA

CallCompletion

DT Setting

S-6

• Set the Tech. Rep. Mode by the following procedures:

(1) In the ordinary mode, place the copier in the Tech. Rep. Card Number Entry State.

1) Open the System Panel.2) Press the Stop Key.3) Press Multi-Copy Key "0".4) Press the Stop Key.5) Press Multi-Copy Key "1".6) The following screen appears on the Message Display.

Please input theCard Number : 1 or 2

1136S143CA

Tech. Rep. Card No. Entry State

(2) Select the desired mode from the items on the Tech. Rep. Card to set the correspondingTech. Rep. Mode.

1) Place the Tech. Rep. Card (1 or 2) on the Supplementary Panel.2) Enter the Tech. Rep. Card Number (1 or 2) with the corresponding Multi-Copy Key.3) The following screen appears on the Message Display.

Tech. Rep. Card 1:Select thedesired mode.

1136S144CA

4) By selecting the desired mode from the items on the Tech. Rep. Card, the correspondingTech. Rep. Mode is set.

Note: When it is desired to change the Tech. Rep. Card Number after entering the number,press "CARD-1 → CARD-2" or "CARD-2 → CARD-1" on the Tech. Rep. Card to return tothe Tech. Rep. Card Number Entry State.

(3) Resetting procedure

• Press the Panel Reset Key.• Remove the Tech. Rep. Card and Close the System Panel.

S-7

Types of Tech. Rep. Modes

Tech. Rep. Card-1

No. Item

1 Function Mode

2 Tech. Rep. Choice Mode

3 Paper Size Input Mode

4 System Input Mode

5 Counter Mode

6 ROM Version Mode

7 ADF Setting Mode

8 Security Mode

Tech. Rep. Card-2

No. Item

1 RD Mode

2 I/O Check

S-8

3-2. Function Mode• This mode is used to check and adjust the operation of the machine.

Setting procedure1) Place the copier in the Tech. Rep. Card Number Entry State.


1136S143CA

2) Press Multi-Copy Key "1" to select Tech. Rep. Card-1.


1136S144CA

3) Place the Tech. Rep. Card on the Supplementary Panel with Card-1 face up.4) Select "Function".5) The following screen appears on the Message Display.

F _

x1.0001136S146CA

6) Enter the Function Mode No. with the corresponding Multi-Copy Key.7) Press the Start Key to start the function operation.8) Press the Stop Key to terminate the function operation.

S-9

Types, Description and Operation Time of the Function Mode

Function Mode Description Operation Time

F1 Paper passage test •

• •

•

This test can be initiated without having towait for warm-up to complete.Press the Start Key to start the operation.The Scanner makes a scan motionaccording to the paper size and zoom ratio.The counters do not count up.

This Test continuesuntil the Stop Key ispressed or theDrawer or portselected for use runsout of paper.

F2 Adjustment of HighVoltage Unit HV1output for DrumCharge/ImageTransfer Coronas

This output should never be adjusted as it isonly for factory setting.

This function runs for30 seconds or untilthe Stop Key ispressed.

F3 Exposure Lamp ONconfirmation

By pressing the Start Key, the Scanner movesapprox. 50 mm and the Exposure Lamp is lit.


F4 Adjustment of HighVoltage Unit HV1output for PaperSeparator Corona

This output should never be adjusted as it isonly for factory setting.


F5 Grid voltageadjustment/manualoptimum exposureadjustment/automatic AE Sensoradjustment

1.2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Press the Start Key.Grid voltage adjustment (with the ExposureLamp off, a solid black pattern is made onthe PC Drum by the Image Erase Lamp).With the Exposure Lamp on, a test scan isperformed once.Manual optimum exposure adjustment (theExposure Lamp lights up and the half tonepattern on the back of the Original Scale ismade on the PC Drum).With the Exposure Lamp on, a test scan isperformed once.With the Exposure Lamp on, the Scannermoves approx. 50 mm from the OriginalScale and comes to a stop.Automatic AE Sensor adjustment (white level)Automatic AE Sensor adjustment (half tone level)The Exposure Lamp goes off and a testscan is performed once.

This functioncontinues until theadjustments end orthe Stop Key ispressed.

F6 Image Erase LampON/OFFconfirmation (Editposition adjustment)

After warming-up is complete, press the StartKey to switch the Image Erase Lamp ON/OFFto make a checkered pattern. (The Exposure Lamp is off.)

This function runs forone copy cycle.

F7 Automatic OriginalSize DetectingSensor adjustment

With the Original Cover or ADF closed, pressthe Start Key to start the operation.

This functioncontinues until theadjustment ends.

F8 Automatic ATDCSensor adjustment

The Developing Unit is energized to agitatethe developer, allowing the Tech. Rep. toadjust the ATDC Sensor.Note: This function is only used to load orNote: change the starter.

This function runs forabout 3 minutes oruntil the Stop Key ispressed.

FF∗

F8+F5 Automatic ATDC/AE Sensor adjustmentNote: This function is only used to load orNote: change the starter.

This function runs forabout 3 minutes 30seconds or until theStop Key is pressed.

∗ FF: Can be selected by pressing the Multi-Copy Keys "1", "5".

S-10

Components Energized in the Function ModeO : Energized, blank: Not energized

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 FF

Main Drive Motor O O O O O O O O

Fan Motors (Suction, Original Glass Cooling)

O O O O O O O O

Synchronizing Rollers O O

Drum Charge/Image TransferCoronas

O O O O O O O

Paper Separator Corona,Developing Bias

O O O O O O O

Exposure Lamp O O O O

Main Erase Lamp O O O O O O O O

Image Erase Lamp O O O O O O

Toner Replenishing Motors(Main, Sub)

O O

Paper Separator Finger O O

Paper Feed O O

Jam detection O O

Malfunction detection O O O O O O O O O

Scan O O O O O

Set Mode

Component

S-11

3-3. Tech. Rep. Choice Mode• This mode is used by the Tech. Rep. to make various settings and adjustments, including copy

charge counter settings, according to the needs of the user.



1136S143CA



1136S144CA

3) Place the Tech. Rep. Card on the Supplementary Panel with Card-1 face up.4) Select "Tech. Rep. Choice".5) The following screen appears on the Message Display.

Plug-In Counter : # of Sheets # of Copy Cycles

1136S159CA

6) By pressing the OK Key, select the Choice Mode in which you want to change or confirmthe setting.

7) To change the setting, press the Cursor Key, which moves the cursor on the screen.8) To enter the setting, press the Panel Reset Key or OK Key.

S-12

Description of Tech. Rep. Choice Modes

Code Choice Mode Name Description

SCH-00 Plug-In Counter Mode Allows the counting mode (number of sheets or number ofcopy cycles) to be set for use of the Plug-In Counter.

SCH-01 Paper Size CounterMode

Allows the counting mode to be set on a paper size basis.

SCH-02 Total Counter Mode Allows the counting mode to be set on a paper size/copymode basis.

SCH-04 Maintenance CallReminder ON/OFF Mode

Allows the ON/OFF setting of the maintenance callreminder message shown on the Message Display.

SCH-05 Copy Kit Counter Mode Allows the YES/NO setting of the Copy Kit Countercounting, and the setting of copying enable/disable at theend of counting.

SCH-15 Toner Empty Stop Mode Allows the setting of copying enable/disable on detectionof a toner-empty condition.

SCH-17 Automatic Paper Mode Allows the setting of the paper size selected on a prioritybasis in the Automatic Paper Selection Mode.

SCH-20 Leading Edge EraseMode

Selects whether to erase the leading edge or not.

SCH-21 Trailing Edge EraseMode

Selects whether to erase the trailing edge or not.

SCH-23 Loop Length AdjustmentMode (Drawer Feeding)

Adjusts the length of the loop to be formed in paperbefore the Synchronizing Rollers.

SCH-24 Loop Length AdjustmentMode (Manual Feeding)

Adjusts the length of the loop to be formed in paperbefore the Synchronizing Rollers.

SCH-70 Exposure Lamp VoltageAdjustment Mode

Fine-adjusts the Exposure Lamp voltage.

SCH-90 ATDC Detection LevelMode

Selects the level at which the ATDC Sensor functions tomaintain a target toner-to-carrier ratio of the developer.

* When copying disable is set, the copier inhibits theinitiation of a new copy cycle when the toner-to-carrierratio becomes less than about 2.5% after a toner-emptycondition has been detected.

S-13

Choice Modes and SettingsThe screen displayed in each mode is shown below. Note that the cursor on the screen indicatesthe initial setting.

Plug-In Counter : # of Sheets # of Copy Cycles

• SCH-00

1136S159CA

Size Counter : NO +Legal

11x17 +11x14

• SCH-01(Inch Area)

1136S160EA

Total Counter : Mode 1 Mode 3

Mode 2

• SCH-02

1136S161CA

Size Counter : NO A3 / B4

A3

(Metric Area)

1136S122DA

Screen Display Description

Mode 1 1 count per 1 copy cycle

Mode 2 Multiple count-up according to paper size and copy mode

Mode 3 Multiple count-up according to paper size and copy mode

* Counting methods of the total and size counters are according to the combination of the abovecount modes.

Copy Mode 1-Sided 2-Sided

ManualFeeding

SCH-01Sizes otherthan those

set in SCH-01

Sizes set inSCH-01

Sizes otherthan those

set in SCH-01

Sizes set inSCH-01

SCH-02 Mode1

Mode2

Mode3

Mode1

Mode2

Mode3

Mode1

Mode2

Mode3

Mode1

Mode2

Mode3

Total(Electronic/Mechanical)

1 1 2 2 2 2 4 4 1

Size (Electronic) 0 1 1 2 0 2 2 0 0

Two-Sided Total(Electronic)

0 0 1 1 2 1 1 4 0

Two-Sided Size (Electronic) 0 0 0 1 1 4 0

SCH-00Plug-In

(Mechanical)

# of sheets 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 4 4 1

# of copycycles

1 1 2 2 2 2 4 4 1

0: No count 1: 1 count 2: 2 counts 4: 4 counts

S-14

Setting of Tech. Rep. Choice Mode (SCH-00, SCH-02) When the D-102 Is Installed on the Copier• If the D-102 is fitted to the copier, Tech. Rep. Choice Modes SCH-00 and SCH-02 must be set as

follows according to the count-up mode of the D-102.

Count-Up Mode(D-102)

Tech. Rep. Choice Mode (Copier)

Plug-In Counter Mode SCH-00 Total Counter Mode SCH-02

# of sheets # of copy cycles Mode 1 Mode 2

All Size Mode O O O

Size Mode ISize Mode IIFull Color Mode IMono Color Mode ISpecial Mode I

O O

2-Sided Mode I2-Sided Mode IIFull Color Mode IIMono Color Mode IISpecial Mode II

O O

O : Setting acceptable : Setting inhibited

Note: If a setting is made for the Tech. Rep. Choice Mode where it is inhibited, an error couldresult in the count data of the D-102.

Maintenance Call YES NO

• SCH-04

1136S162CA

Copy Kit Counter : NO Mode 2

Mode 1

• SCH-05

1136S123CA


NO No count

Mode 1 Copy enabled at the end of counting.

Mode 2 Copy disabled at the end of counting.

S-15

Toner Empty : Disable Copy Enable Copy

• SCH-15

1136S163CA

Auto Paper Config Inch / Metric Inch

• SCH-17(Inch Area)

1136S170EA

Auto Paper Config Metric / Inch Metric

(Metric Area)

1136S124DA


Metric/InchThe copier automatically selects metric or inch paper for the originaldetected.

(Metric Area) Metric The copier automatically selects metric paper for all originals detected.

(Inch Area) Inch The copier automatically selects inch paper for all originals detected.

Leading Edge : Erase Not Erase

• SCH-20

Note: When "Erase" is selected, the erase width is approx. 3 mm.

1136S164CA

Trailing Edge : Erase Not Erase

• SCH-21

Note: When "Erase" is selected, the erase width is approx. 3 mm.

1136S165CA

Loop Adj (Drawer) -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3

• SCH-23

Note: 1. "−" indicates that the loop length is decreased.2. The loop length is increased or decreased by 2 mm.

1136S166CA

S-16

Loop Adj (Manual) -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3

• SCH-24

Note: 1. "−" indicates that the loop length is decreased.2. The loop length is increased or decreased by 2 mm.

1136S167CA

Exp. Lamp ManualAdjust : 50(44-56)

• SCH-70

To change the code on the screen: 1. Press the Clear Key.2. Enter the code number with the Multi-Copy Keys.

1136S168CA

Code Variable Voltage Value

44 −6V

45 −5V

46 −4V

47 −3V

48 −2V

49 −1V

50 Standard value

51 +1V

52 +2V

53 +3V

54 +4V

55 +5V

56 +6V

Note: After making the above Exposure Lamp fine-adjustment, the "F5" mode must be executed.

S-17

ATDC Level -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4

• SCH-90

1136S169CA

Code T/C Ratio

−3 4.5%

−2 5.0%

−1 5.5%

∗ 0 6.0%

1 6.5%

2 7.0%

3 7.5%

4 8.0%

∗ 0: Initial setting

S-18

3-4. Paper Size Input Mode• This mode is used to enter the size (length/width: mm) of the paper used in each drawer.

Entry procedure1) Place the copier in the Tech. Rep. Card Number Entry State.

Please input theCard Number : 1 or 2 1136S143C



1136S144C

3) Place the Tech. Rep. Card on the Supplementary Panel with Card-1 face up.4) Select "Paper Size Input".5) The following screen appears on the Message Display.

Paper Size Input12

1136S147C

6) Press the OK Key to select the Paper Source Number for which you want to change orconfirm the paper size. (See below.)

1136S001AA

1

2

3

4

5

Europe Area

1136S002AA

1

2

3

USA, Canada Area

S-19

7) Press the Cursor Key to change the paper size displayed on the screen in the followingsequence. To define the paper size, press the OK Key or the Panel Reset Key.

Paper Size DisplayPaper Size Values (mm)

Length (F) Width (C)

F: C: ∗ Use the Multi-Copy Keys (Free setting)

A3 420 297

A4 297 210

A4 210 297

A5 210 148

B4 364 257

B5 257 182

B5 182 257

B6 182 128

11" × 17" 432 279

11" × 14" 356 279

LEGAL 356 216

LETTER 279 216

LETTER 216 279

5-1/2" × 8-1/2" 216 140

FLS 330 210

8) For free setting∗ , enter the paper size values by the following procedure:

a) Select the paper size display "F" ∗∗∗ C: ∗∗∗ ".b) Press the OK Key once. (The paper size entry is enabled.)c) Using the Cursor Key, select "F" (length) or "C" (width).d) Using the Clear Key, clear the paper size.e) Using the Multi-Copy Keys, enter a new paper size.

Note: Free setting is mainly used when it is impossible to judge whether or notstandard size paper is loaded in the Drawer. By measuring the size of thatpaper and entering the values, the standard size paper nearest to thosevalues is selected and shown on the Message Display.

S-20


3-5. System Setting Mode• This mode is used to change or set the fixed zoom ratio, Plug-In Counter or D-102 use, and the

marketing area according to the user’s needs.

A. Changing the fixed zoom ratio

1) Place the copier in the Tech. Rep. Card Number Entry State.


Tech. Rep. Card 1:Select thedesired mode.1136S144C

3) Place the Tech. Rep. Card on the Supplementary Panel with Card-1 face up.4) Select "System Input".5) The following screen appears on the Message Display.

Change FixedZoom Ratio : 1.000 x . 01136S150C

6) Using any of the Reduction, Enlargement or Full Size Keys, select a desired fixed zoomratio.

7) Then, using the Multi-Copy Keys, enter the desired zoom ratio. The zoom value enteredcan be cleared by the Clear Key.

8) Press the OK Key to enter the zoom ratio.

S-21

B. Setting the Plug-In Counter/D-102




6) Press the OK Key once.7) The following screen appears on the Message Display.

Plug-In Counter : YES NO 1136S151C

8) Using the Cursor Key, select either "YES" or "NO", and press the OK key to enter it.

Screen Display Description Initial Setting

YES The Plug-In Counter or D-102 is used.

NO The Plug-In Counter or D-102 is not used. ∗




S-22

C. Setting the marketing area




6) Press the OK Key twice.7) The following screen appears on the Message Display.

8) Using the Cursor Key, select the marketing area and press the OK key to enter it.9) Press the Panel Reset Key to return to the initial screen and initialize the copier to set the

marketing area.




Marketing Area : MJ MH

MC Others1136S152C

S-23

3-6. Counter Mode• This mode is used by the Tech. Rep. to show or set the counts of various counters.

Procedure1) Place the copier in the Tech. Rep. Card Number Entry State.


1136S143CA



1136S144CA

3) Place the Tech. Rep. Card on the Supplementary Panel with Card-1 face up.4) Select the desired counter from the following list:

Types of Counters

Items on Card Counter Name Description

Paper Paper CounterCounts the number of sheets used on a papersize/type basis.

Jam Jam Counter Counts the number of jams per section.

Retry Feed Retry Counter Counts the number of feed retries per port.

Trouble Trouble CounterCounts the number of malfunctions per troublecode.

Maintenance Maintenance CounterUsed to show and set maintenance timing basedon copy cycle.

Port Port CounterCounts the number of feed/passage/use timesper port.

Consumables Consumables CounterUsed to show and set the life of consumablesbased on copy cycle.

Auto CPU Reset Auto CPU Reset CounterUsed to identify the presence/absence ofautomatic CPU reset for specific elements.

S-24

Screen Display/Type/Setting Method for Each Counter

• Press the OK Key to switch from one screen to another.• To move the cursor on the screen, use the Cursor Key.• To clear the count, use the Clear Key.• To return the counter to the count it had before clearing, use the Interrupt Key.• To input the counter setting, use the Multi-Copy Keys after pressing the Clear Key (for the

Maintenance, Port and Consumables Counters only).• To enter the counter setting, use the OK Key or Panel Reset Key.

A. Paper Counter

Paper Counter : A3 B4

OK Key1136S190CA

A4 B5 A5

OK Key1136S191CA

B6 11"x17" 11"x14"

OK Key1136S192CA

Legal Letter 8 x51

2" 12"

OK Key1136S193CA

FLS

OK Key1136S194CA

Paper Type : S0 S1

OK Key1136S195CA

S2 S3

1136S196CA


S0 Standard paper

S1 Recycled paper

S2 Special paper (insertion)

S3Reused paper (2-sideddisabled paper)

* For such a paper size as A4 which can be loaded both lengthwise and crosswise, its countrepresents the sum of both.

S-25

B. Jam Counter

Jam Counter : MCBJ 1 MCBJ 2

OK Key1136S212CA

Dup Ent. Dup Exit. Trans.

OK Key1136S215CA

ADF

1136S217CA

1136S001AA

1

2

3

4

5

Europe Area

1136S002AA

1

2

3

USA, CanadaArea

ScreenDisplay

Description

MCBJ 1Jam occurrence ratio in the system (See Note)

MCBJ 2Jam occurrence ratio in the copier only (See Note)

ManualNumber of jams that occurred at the ManualFeed Section

1stNumber of jams that occurred at the 1stDrawer

2ndNumber of jams that occurred at the 2ndDrawer

3rdNumber of jams that occurred at the 3rdDrawer

4thNumber of jams that occurred at the 4thDrawer

5thNumber of jams that occurred at the 5thDrawer

ScreenDisplay

Description

Dup Ent.Number of jams that occurred at the DuplexUnit Entry

Dup ExitNumber of jams that occurred at the DuplexUnit Exit

Trans.Number of jams that occurred in theTransport section

PC DrumNumber of jams that occurred in the PCDrum section

ExitNumber of jams that occurred at the Exitsection

Sorter Number of jams that occurred in the Sorter

ADF Number of jams that occurred in the ADF

Note: • MCBJ = Total Counter value ÷ JamCounter value.

• When no jam has occurred, "------" isdisplayed.

Manual 1st 2nd

OK Key1136S213CA

3rd 4th 5th

OK Key1136S214CA

PC Drum Exit Sorter

OK Key1136S216CA

S-26

C. Feed Retry Counter

Retry Counter : 1st 2nd

OK Key1136S218CA

3rd 4th 5th

OK Key1136S219CA

Dup

1136S220CA


1st Number of feed retries in the 1st Drawer

2nd Number of feed retries in the 2nd Drawer

3rd Number of feed retries in the 3rd Drawer

4th Number of feed retries in the 4th Drawer

5th Number of feed retries in the 5th Drawer

Dup Number of feed retries in the Duplex Unit

S-27

D. Trouble Counter

OK Key1136S197CA

C004A/b C004C/d C0070/1

OK Key 1136S198CA

C0200 C03xx C04xx

OK Key 1136S199CA

C050x C051x C052x

OK Key 1136S200CA

C060x C061x C0620

OK Key1136S201CA

C0650 C0660 C06Fx

OK Key1136S202CA

C0998-d C0E0x C0E2x

OK Key1136S204CA

C090x C095x C0990-6

OK Key1136S203CA

C0F0x C0F10 C0F20

OK Key1136S205CA

C0F30 C0F79 C0FE/Fx

OK Key1136S206CA

C0b0x C0b1x C0b3x

OK Key 1136S207CA

C0b5x C0b6x C0b7x

OK Key1136S208CA

C0d00 C0d20 C0d5x

1136S209CA

S-28

Screen Display Description (Element/Cause)

C000x Main Drive Motor malfunction

C0040/1 Suction Fan Motor malfunction

C004A/b Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor malfunction

C004C/d

C0070/1 Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor malfunction

C0072 Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor malfunction

C0200 Drum Charge Image Transfer/Paper Separator Corona malfunction

C03xx Master Board, Harness malfunction

C04xx Exposure Lamp malfunction

C050x Warming-up malfunction

C051x Abnormally low fusing temperature

C052x Abnormally high fusing temperature

C060x Scanner Drive Section malfunction

C061x Lens Drive Section malfunction

C062x Mirror Drive Section malfunction

C0650 Scanner Detecting Section malfunction

C0660 Scanner Load Section malfunction

C06Fx Scanner Interface malfunction

C090x 3rd Drawer lift-up malfunction

S-29

Screen Display Description (Element/Cause)

C095x 4th Drawer lift-up malfunction

C0990∼ 6 Main Drawer malfunction (PF102)

C0998∼ d Shift Drawer malfunction (PF102)

C0E0x Main Erase malfunction

C0E2x Image Erase malfunction

C0F0x Original Size Detecting Board malfunction

C0F10 AE Board malfunction

C0F2x AIDC Sensor malfunction

C0F3x ATDC Sensor malfunction

C0F79 Paper Empty Sensor/Board malfunction (PF102)

C0FE/Fx Original Size Detecting Sensor malfunction

C0b0x Drive Section malfunction (S-104/205, ST-101/206)

C0b1x Paper Clamp malfunction (ST-101/206)

C0b3x Paper Aligning Motor malfunction (ST-101/206)

C0b5x Stapler malfunction (ST-101/206)

C0b6x Bin movement malfunction (ST-104/205, ST-101/206)

C0b7x Punch malfunction (ST-206)

C0d00 Front/Rear Edge Guide operation malfunction (AD-5)

C0d20 Gate operation malfunction (AD-5)

C0d5x Drive Motor malfunction (AD-5)

S-30

E. Maintenance Counter

Maint. Counter 1 : Count Set

OK Key1136S221CA


OK Key1136S222CA


OK Key1136S223CA


OK Key1136S224CA


1136S225CA


Count 1 count per 1 copy

Setting Set the maintenance time based on copy cycle count. (Max. 6 digits)

* The above Maintenance Counters 1 to 5 can be used as desired.

* When the count exceeds the settings, the following screen is shown on the Message Display toindicate that an inspection time has come. (When Maintenance Call "YES" has been selected inthe Maintenance Call Mode of the Tech. Rep. Choice Mode)

Maintenance 1

1136S071CA

Maintenance call display resetting method

To reset the maintenance call display, clear the count afterinspection (cleaning or replacement).

S-31

F. Port/Option Counter

Port / Option : 1st 2nd

OK Key1136S184CA

3rd 4th 5th

OK Key1136S185CA

Manual ADF Ent. ADF Rev.

OK Key1136S186CA

Dup Sorter Stapler

OK Key 1136S187CA

Punch PC Drum Starter

OK Key 1136S188CA

Fuser

1136S189CA

ScreenDisplay

Description

1stNumber of sheets fed from the 1stDrawer

2ndNumber of sheets fed from the 2ndDrawer

3rdNumber of sheets fed from the 3rdDrawer

4thNumber of sheets fed from the 4thDrawer

5thNumber of sheets fed from the 5thDrawer

ManualNumber of sheets fed from theManual Feed Section

ADF Ent.Number of sheets that passed theADF Entry

ADF Rev.Number of sheets that passed theADF Turnover section

ScreenDisplay

Description

DupNumber of paper take-up cycles inthe Duplex Unit

SorterNumber of sheets that passedthrough the Sorter

Stapler Number of stapling cycles

Punch Number of punching cycles

PC Drum Number of PC Drum cycles

StarterNumber of developing cycles(copy cycles)

Fuser Number of Fusing Roller cycles

* 1000 revolutions of the PC Drum or Fusing Rollers are counted as 1 cycle.

S-32

G. Consumables Counter

Toner Collecting Count Set

OK Key1136S226CA

Copy Kit : Count Set

1136S228CA


TonerCollecting


SettingSet the number of copy cycles from after toner disposal to the nextmaintenance time.

* The maximum setting is 6 digits.

* When the count exceeds the setting, the following screen is shown on the Message Display toindicate that an inspection time has come.

Maintenance 2

1136S072CA


Copy Kit


SettingSet the number of copy cycles from after copy kit replacement to thenext maintenance time.

* The maximum setting is 6 digits.

* The count of the copy kit is not made unless "Mode 1" or "Mode 2" has been selected in the CopyKit Counter Mode.

* When the count exceeds the setting, the following screen is shown on the Message Display toindicate that an inspection time has come.

Maintenance 4

1136S073CA

Screen display resetting method

To reset the screen display, clear the count after inspection (disposal or replacement).

S-33

H. Auto CPU Reset Counter

Auto CPU Reset

1 2 3 4 5 61136S211CA

• If automatic CPU resets have occurred, the corresponding numerals are highlighted.

Example:

Auto CPU Reset

1 2 3 4 5 61136S125CA

Indicates that automatic CPU resets occurredin the Elements corresponding to "2" and "5".

Clearing procedure1) Using the Cursor Key, select the numeral corresponding to the occurrence of the

automatic CPU reset.2) Using the Clear Key, restore the highlighted numeral to normal.

Screen Display Element

1 MSC, Control Panel (Copier)

2 Master Board (Copier)

3 SCP (Copier)

4 Automatic Document Feeder (AF-3, AFR-7)

5 Sorter (S-104/205, ST-101/206)

6 Data Controller (D-102)

S-34

3-7. ROM Version Mode• This mode is used to show the version numbers of the ROMs installed in the copier and options.



1136S143CA



1136S144CA

3) Place the Tech. Rep. Card on the Supplementary Panel with Card-1 face up. 4) Select "ROM Version".5) The following screen appears on the Message Display.

ROM VersionMSC+Panel

1136S153CA

6) By pressing the OK Key, the screen changes as shown below:

ROM VersionMSC+Panel

OK Key1136S153CA

ROM VersionMaster

OK Key1136S154CA

ROM VersionSorter

OK Key1136S155CA

ROM VersionSCP

OK Key1136S156CA

ROM VersionADF

OK Key1136S157CA

ROM VersionData Controller

1136S158CA

S-35

3-8. ADF Setting Mode• This mode is used to adjust the document stop position of the ADF.



3) Place the Tech. Rep. Card on the Supplementary Panel with Card-1 face up.4) Select "ADF Setting".5) The following screen appears on the Message Display.


ADF Doc. StopPosition (1-sided) 50(43-58)

OK Key1136S171CA


OK Key1136S172CA

ADF Doc. StopPosition : (2-in-1) 50(43-58)

OK Key 1136S173CA

ADF Docs.Spacing : (2-in-1) 50(43-58)

1136S174CA


1136S143CA


1136S144CA


1136S171CA

S-36

Setting changing procedure1) Using the OK Key, select the mode in which you want to change the setting. 2) Using the Clear Key, clear the current setting.3) Using the Multi-Copy Keys, input a new setting. (See the following table.) 4) Using the OK Key or Panel Reset Key, enter the setting.

Setting Description

43 7 mm

Direction in which the document stopposition overlaps the Original Scale

44 6 mm

45 5 mm

46 4 mm

47 3 mm

48 2 mm

49 1 mm

50 Initial value

51 1 mm

Direction in which the document stopposition moves away from the OriginalScale

52 2 mm

53 3 mm

54 4 mm

55 5 mm

56 6 mm

57 7 mm

58 8 mm

S-37

3-9. Security Mode• This mode is used to register the administrator number (identification number) required in the

Security Mode of the User’s Choice Mode.

Registration procedure1) Place the copier in the Tech. Rep. Card Number Entry State.


3) Place the Tech. Rep. Card on the Supplementary Panel with Card-1 face up. 4) Select "Security Mode".5) The following screen appears on the Message Display.

Input Admin. # :

1136S261CA

6) Press the Clear Key and input a 4-digit administrator number (0000 to 9999) using theMulti-Copy Keys.

7) Press the OK Key to enter the administrator number. 8) The following screen appears on the Message Display.

User Help Copy Track

1136S118CA

Note: After entering the administrator number, the screen changes depending on the modeselected. For more information, see the Administrator Mode in the User’s Choice Mode.


1136S143CA


1136S144CA

S-38

3-10. I/O Check• This mode causes the state of the drive and electrical parts to be shown on the Control Panel at

the occurrence of a jam, malfunction, etc. so that the cause of a fault may be checked easily andsafely.

• Making this I/O check can identify whether the cause of a fault lies in the PWBs or not, therebypreventing unnecessary PWB replacement and reducing maintenance costs.



1136S143CA



1136S145CA

3) Place the Tech. Rep. Card on the Supplementary Panel with Card-2 face up.4) Select any of the following modes:

Mode Name Description

Port

• Displays the data of the input/output ports of the PWBs in a machinestandby state.∗ Input port data: L, H; ∗ Output port data: 0, 1

• The output port data can be changed by the Multi-Copy Keys. (0→1, 1→0)

• By changing the output port data, operation checks can be made on thedrive parts.

• The input port data is changed by causing the sensor to be activated bypaper. (Used to check the function of the sensor.)

Paper Path Sensor • The actual passage of paper causes the activated states (1→0) of thePaper Path Sensors to be displayed in order of paper passage.

Control Board• Self-diagnoses of the Master Board.

• If the result of self-diagnoses is not acceptable, trouble code "C03∗∗ " isshown on the Message Display.

Panel Indication

• Used to check the ON/OFF state of the Control Panel LEDs and MessageDisplay indicators.

• Press any of the keys on the Control Panel to check whether the keypressed is detected or not. (Every time the key is pressed, thecorresponding code number is displayed on the screen.)

Memory • Checks the addresses of the RAM and ROM on the MSC Board to judgewhether the RAM and ROM are normal or not.

S-39

Port

Procedure1) Select "Port".2)The following screen appears on the Message Display.

IC Port Data : P0 P1

1136S244CA


IC Port Data : P0 P1

Press the OK Key twice.1136S244CA

P5 P6 P7

Press the OK Key three times.1136S246CA

P2 P3 P4


P47 P48 P49



1136S145CA

S-40

Actual Ports and Their Boards Corresponding to the Screen Display Numbers

Copier

Screen Display No. PortsBoard

P∗∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗P0 P47 P46 P45 P44 P43 P42 P41 P40

Master Board

IC1A

P1 P57 P56 P55 P54 P53 P52 P51 P50

P2 P67 P66 P65 P64 P63 P62 P61 P60

P3 P87 P86 P85 P84 P83 P82 P81 P80

P4 APA7 APA6 APA5 APA4 APA3 APA2 APA1 APA0

Master Board

IC4A

P5 APB7 APB6 APB5 APB4 APB3 APB2 APB1 APB0

P6 APC7 APC6 APC5 APC4 APC3 APC2 APC1 APC0

P7 BPA7 BPA6 BPA5 BPA4 BPA3 BPA2 BPA1 BPA0

P8 BPB7 BPB6 BPB5 BPB4 BPB3 BPB2 BPB1 BPB0

P9 BPC7 BPC6 BPC5 BPC4 BPC3 BPC2 BPC1 BPC0

P10 ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ φ3 φ2 φ1 φ0

P11 APA7 APA6 APA5 APA4 APA3 APA2 APA1 APA0

Master Board

IC5A

P12 APB7 APB6 APB5 APB4 APB3 APB2 APB1 APB0

P13 APC7 APC6 APC5 APC4 APC3 APC2 APC1 APC0

P14 BPA7 BPA6 BPA5 BPA4 BPA3 BPA2 BPA1 BPA0

P15 BPB7 BPB6 BPB5 BPB4 BPB3 BPB2 BPB1 BPB0

P16 BPC7 BPC6 BPC5 BPC4 BPC3 BPC2 BPC1 BPC0

P17 ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ φ3 φ2 φ1 φ0

S-41

Cabinet

Screen Display No. Ports Board

P18 PB3 PB2 PB1 PB0 PA3 PA2 PA1 PA0PF-202 Control

BoardIC1A

P19 ∗ ∗ PD1 PD0 PC3 PC2 PC1 PC0

P20 PF3 PF2 PF1 PF0 PE3 PE2 PE1 PE0

P21 ∗ ∗ PH1 PH0 PG3 PG2 PG1 PG0


BoardIC2A


P24 ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗P25 ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗P26 PB3 PB2 PB1 PB0 PA3 PA2 PA1 PA0

PF-2D ControlBoardIC1A

P27 ∗ ∗ PD1 PC0 PC3 PC2 PC1 PC0



P30 PB3 PB2 PB1 PB0 PA3 PA2 PA1 PA0PF-2D Control

BoardIC2A


P32 ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗P33 ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗

∗ 1: Except USA, Canada Area

∗ 1

∗ 1

S-42

Screen Display No. Ports Board


BoardIC1A





BoardIC2A


P40 ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗P41 ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗P42 PB3 PB2 PB1 PB0 PA3 PA2 PA1 PA0

AD-5 ControlBoardIC1G




P46 PB3 PB2 PB1 PB0 PA3 PA2 PA1 PA0

∗ 2P47 ∗ ∗ PD1 PD0 PC3 PC2 PC1 PC0



∗ 2: Japan Area Only

S-43

Changing the Output Port Data1) Output port data that may be changed is underlined. By moving this underline with the

Cursor Key, define the data desired to be changed.

Example:

P 0001LLHL P 0110LL01 P LLHLL111

1136S148CA

2) By pressing the Multi-Copy Key "0" or "1", the data defined is changed (0→1, 1→0). (Atthis time, the drive part operates.)

3) The data changed is held for approx. 5 seconds and then returns to the original data.4) By pressing the OK Key, move to the next "P∗∗ ".

Changing the Input Port Data1) To change data corresponding to a sensor where data can be entered intentionally,

activate the sensor using paper.2) Change the changeable output port data which is located in the same column as the port

of the sensor activated.3) After the output port data has returned to the original data, the input port data of the

sensor is changed.

Example:

P 0001LLHL P 0110LL01 P LLHLL111

1136S149CA

Note: When there is no output port in the same column or when the data of the output port in thesame column cannot be changed, activate the sensor, then terminate the I/O Check PortMode once, and select the Port Mode again. This changes the input port data of thesensor.

S-44

Paper Path Sensor

1) Select "Passage Sensor".2) The following screen appears on the Message Display:

Paper Path Sens. 123456789ABCDE

1136S254CB

Sensor Code

Sensor State(0: Blocked, 1: Not Blocked)

3) By passing paper, the activated state of each Paper Path Sensor changes (1→0) in orderof paper passage.Note: To select the paper port, use the Paper Select Key.

Sensor Code Sensor Name

1 1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor

2 2nd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor

3 3rd Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor

4 4th Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor

5

6

7 Vertical Transport Sensor 3

8 Vertical Transport Sensor 4

9 Transport Roller Sensor

A Paper Leading Edge Detecting Sensor

B Paper Exit Switch

C Duplex Unit Turnover Path Sensor

D Duplex Unit Paper Entry Sensor

E Duplex Unit Paper Take-Up Sensor

S-45

Control Board

1) Select "Control Board".2) The following screen appears on the Message Display:

Controller BoardCheck : Press OKto start

1136S255CA

3) Press the OK Key to self-diagnose Master Board and Cabinet Control Board faults.


When the result of the self-diagnosis isacceptable:

1136S145CA

Call yourTechnical Rep. : Code : CO3

When the result of the self-diagnosis isunacceptable:

1136S076CA

Panel Indication

1) Select "Panel Indication".2) The following screen appears on the Message Display:

Panel IndicationCheck : Press OKto start

1136S256CA

3) By pressing the OK Key, the LEDs on the Control Panel and the Indicators on theMessage Display are all lit and then go off in sequence.

4) After all the LEDs and indications have gone off, the following screen appears on theMessage Display:

Panel Key Check :Press OK tofinish

1136S259CA

5) By pressing any of the Keys on the Control Panel, the code number of the correspondingKey indicated on the following page is shown in the area marked ∗∗ on the MessageDisplay.

Note: Press the Panel Reset Key or OK Key to leave the Panel Indication Mode.

S-46

Code No. Key Name

1 Multi-Copy Key "1"










11 Clear Key

12 Energy Saver Key

13 Interrupt Key

14 Panel Reset Key

15 Access Mode Key

16 Start Key

17 Paper Select Key

18 Auto Paper Mode Key

19 Zoom Up Key

20 Zoom Down Key

Code No. Key Name

21 Exposure Control Key (Lighter)

22 Exposure Control Key (Darker)

23 Auto Exposure Mode Key

24 Enlargement Key

25 Full Size Key

26 Reduction Key

35 OK Key

36 Cursor Key

61 DT Setting (Drum Dehumidify Key)

62 Counter Clear (Book Mode Key)

63 Port (File Margin Mode Key)

64 Memory (Erase Mode Key)

65Initial Transmission

(Auxiliary Toner Replenishing Key)

66 Data Load (Insertion Mode Key)

67 Level History (Cover Mode Key)

68 Card-2→Card-1 (Meter Count Key)

69Tech. Rep. ID Code(Manual Staple Key)

70 Mixed Original Detection Mode Key

71 Original Count Mode Key

72 Memory Input Key

S-47

Memory

1) Select "Memory".2) The following screen appears on the Message Display:

Memory Check :Press OK tostart

1136S257CA

3) By pressing the OK Key, the following screen appears on the Message Display:

ROM XX RAM XXTurn the main SWOFF, and then ON

1136S258CA

4) "OK" or "NG" is shown in the area marked ∗∗ on the Message Display.5) "OK" indicates that the Power Switch should be turned OFF, then ON.6) "ROM NG" indicates that the ROM on the PWB-B should be changed.7) "RAM NG" indicates that the PWB-B should be changed.

S-48

3-11. Level History• This mode is used to show the operating levels of given functions, or to enter necessary control

settings to maintain copy quality.



1136S143CA



1136S145CA

3) Place the Tech. Rep. Card on the Supplementary Panel with Card-2 face up. 4) Select "Level History".5) The following screen appears on the Message Display.

Vg Level : Initial Corr.

1136S236CA


Vg Level : Initial Corr.

OK Key1136S227CA

ATDC Level : Set Current , %

OK Key1136S237CB

Toner Replenish-ing Time min.

OK Key1136S239CA

Fuser Temp. : Set C Current C

1136S240CA

Exp. Lamp Level : Initial Corr.

OK Key1136S238CA

S-49

Level History Display

Level DescriptionData Value Display/Setting

RangeUnit

Vg level(ReadOnly)

Initial value Initial setting of grid voltage 550 to 850 (step: 30) V

Correctionvalue

Correction value of grid voltagedue to changes with time, etc.

550 to 850 (step: 30) V

ATDC level(Can reset)

Setting Initial setting of ATDC level 2 to 254 (step: 2)

Currentvalue

Current ATDC level value(T/C ratio)

1.0 to 9.0 (step: 0.5) %

Exposurelamp level

(ReadOnly)

Initial valueInitial setting of ExposureLamp voltage

49 to 71 (step: 1) V

Correctionvalue

Correction value of Lampvoltage due to changes withtime (deterioration, etc.)

49 to 71 (step: 1) V

Toner replenishing time(Read Only)

Total (cumulative) time of tonerreplenishment

0 to 1270 (step: 10) min

Fusertemperature (Can reset)

Setting Temperature control setting 175, 185, 195 °C

Currentvalue

Current temperature controlvalue

160, 165 to 225 (step: 10) °C

Only the setting for the ATDC level and Fuser temperature can be entered.

The purpose and procedure for entry are given below:

Purpose of entry

• When the RAM Board is changed or the P/C Unit used has been exchanged forone from another machine:

Enter the ATDC level reference value given on the Factory Setting Label found

inside the front door.

ATDC level setting

• When a fusing malfunction has occurred due to the environment or paper used:

Enter a value within the setting range (175, 185, 195).

Fuser temperature setting

Entry procedure1) Call "ATDC Level" or "Fuser Temp." onto the screen.2) Using the Clear Key, clear the current setting.3) Using the Multi-Copy Keys, input a value within the data setting range. 4) Using the OK Key or Panel Reset Key, enter the value.

S-50

Adjust mode setting procedure1) Open the System Panel.2) Press the Stop Key.3) Press Multi-Copy Key "0".4) Press the Stop Key.5) Press Multi-Copy Key "1".6) The following screen appears on the Message Display:

Mirror Full SizePosition : (A 2) (43-58)

OK Key1136S177CA

Lens Full SizePosition : (A 1) (43-58)

OK Key1136S176CA

Feed DirectionMag. Ratio : (A 3) (46-54)

OK Key1136S178CA

Lens PositionFull Size : (A 4) (40-60)

OK Key1136S179CA

Lens PositionReduction : (A 5) (40-60)

OK Key1136S180CA

4 ADJUST MODE

7) Press Multi-Copy Key "1".8) Press the Stop Key.9) Press the Start Key.10) The following screen appears on the Message Display.

Lens Focus : (A 0) (49-51) 1136S175CA



1136S143CA

Lens Focus : (A 0) (49-51)

OK Key1136S175CA

S-51

Book B-ScanRegist : (A 6) (45-55)

OK Key1136S181CA

Lens PositionEnlargement (A 11) (40-60)

OK Key

1136S182CA

Leading EdgeErase : (A 12) (45-55)

OK Key1136S183CA

Trailing EdgeErase : (A 13) (42-58)

1136S126CA

S-52

When the RAM Board has been changed or memory cleared, the setting of eachAdjust Mode must be returned to the factory setting indicated on the FactorySetting Label inside the Front Door.

NOTE

Setting entry procedure1) Press the Clear Key to clear the current setting.2) Using the Multi-Copy Keys, input a new setting.3) Press the OK Key or Panel Reset Key to enter the value.

Types of Adjust Modes

Code Mode Name Description

A-0Lens Focal LengthAdjustment

Corrects the focal length of the Lens. (For factorysetting only)

A-1Lens Full Size PositionAdjustment

Adjusts the magnification ratio in the crosswisedirection by finely adjusting the Lens home position.

A-2Mirror Full Size PositionAdjustment

Corrects the conjugate length of the Mirror. (Forfactory setting only)

A-3Feeding DirectionMagnification RatioAdjustment

Adjusts the magnification ratio in the feeding directionby finely adjusting the scan speed.

A-4Lens Position Full SizeRegistration

Registers the leading edge for full size.

A-5Lens Position ReductionRegistration

Registers the leading edge for reduction.

A-6Book B ScanRegistration

Registers the leading edge on scan B side for theBook Mode.

A-11Lens PositionEnlargement Registration

Registers the leading edge for enlargement.

A-12Leading Edge EraseAdjustment

Corrects the width of erase on the leading edge of animage.

A-13Trailing Edge EraseAdjustment

Corrects the width of erase on the trailing edge of animage.

S-53

• A-0

Setting DescriptionWhen RAM BoardChanged/Memory

Cleared

49 Short focal length adjustment

50 Standard O

51 Long focal length adjustment

• A-1


Cleared

43 Correction: ±0 steps

49 Correction: +12 steps

50 Correction: +14 steps O



(Increments: 0.4 mm/2 steps)

~~

~~

• A-2


Cleared

43 Correction: ±0 steps


50 Correction: +21 steps O



(Increments: 3 steps)

~~

~~

S-54

• A-3


Cleared

46 Correction: −16/1,000

49 Correction: −4/1,000

50 Correction: ±0 O

51 Correction: +4/1,000

54 Correction: +16/1,000

(Increments: 1.2mm)

~~

~~

• A-4


Cleared

40 Correction: −10 pulses

49 Correction: −1 pulse

50 Correction: ±0 pulses O

51 Correction: +1 pulse

60 Correction: +10 pulses

(Increments: 0.4 mm/1 pulse)

~~

~~

S-55

• A-5


Cleared







~~

~~

• A-6


Cleared







~~

~~

S-56

• A-11


Cleared







~~

~~

• A-12


Cleared

45 Correction: −5 mm

49 Correction: −1mm

50 Correction: ±0 mm O

51 Correction: +1 mm


(Increments: 1 mm)

~~

~~

S-57

~~

~~

• A-13


Cleared

42 Correction: -8 mm

49 Correction: −1 mm

50 Correction: ±0 mm O



(Increments: 1 mm)

S-58

• The User’s Choice Mode is used to program the copier (make priority and other settings)according to the user’s particular needs.

• Use the User’s Choice Card to set the User’s Choice Mode.

User’s Choice Card

5 USER’S CHOICE MODE

Book ModeLanguageSelect

SecurityMode

DrumDehumidify

SpecialPaper

TrayPriority

ExposurePriority

Mixed Orig.Detect

OriginalThickness

IntelligentSort

EnergySaver Mode

Auto PanelReset

Copy ModePriority

FinishingPriority

Auto Exp.Level

Manual Exp.Adjust

CounterRemoval

Separation

User's Choice Card

2in1

2in1

OKEnter:Press and hold key for 3 seconds.Quit :Press key.

Custom

1136S267CA

Setting procedure1) Open the System Panel.2) Place the User’s Choice Card onto the Supplementary Panel.3) Hold down the Panel Reset Key for about 3 seconds.4) The following screen appears on the Message Display:

5) By selecting the mode you want to set from among the items on the User’s Choice Card,the corresponding User’s Choice Mode is accessed.

6) To change the setting, press the Cursor Key, which moves the cursor on the screen.7) To enter the setting, press the OK Key or Panel Reset Key.

Resetting method• Press the Panel Reset Key.• Remove the User’s Choice Card and close the System Panel.

User' s Choice :Select a mode toChange settings.

1136S103CA

S-59

Types of User’s Choice Modes

Mode Description

Language Select Used to select the language shown on the Message Display.

Mixed Orig. Detect Used to set whether originals of assorted sizes can be used or not when theAutomatic Document Feeder is used.

Original Thickness Used to set whether lightweight originals can be used or not when theAutomatic Document Feeder is used.

Copy Mode Priority Used to set the priority mode selected automatically (Auto PaperSelect/Auto Magnification Select/Manual) when the Power Switch is turnedON or the Panel Reset Key is pressed.

Paper Priority Used to set the paper port selected automatically for the Auto Paper Selector Manual Mode.

Exposure Priority Used to set the priority exposure mode (Manual/Auto) selected when thePower Switch is turned ON or the Panel Reset Key is pressed.*The exposure level can also be set for manual exposure.

Finishing Priority Used to set the priority finishing mode (Non Sort/Sort/Group/Staple) whenthe Power Switch is turned ON with the copier equipped with the Sorter.

Auto Exp. Level Used to set the priority exposure level in the Auto Exposure mode when thecopier has been set so that the Auto Exposure mode is selected in theinitial mode.

Manual Expo. Adjust Used to set the priority exposure level in the Manual Exposure mode whenthe copier has been set so that the Manual Exposure mode is selected inthe initial mode.

Counter Removal Used to set whether the Control Panel is to be reset or not when the Plug-InCounter is removed.

Intelligent Sort Used to set whether switching to Sort or Non-Sort is automatically madeaccording to the number of originals/copy cycles when the copier isequipped with a Sorter and Duplexing/Automatic Document Feeder.

Energy Saver Mode Used to set whether or not the copier is automatically placed in the EnergySaving Mode a given length of time after a copy cycle has ended.*When YES has been selected, the time may be entered.

Auto Panel Reset Used to set whether or not the Control Panel is automatically initialized agiven length of time after a copy cycle has ended.*When YES has been selected, the time may be entered.

Drum Dehumidify Used to set whether or not the copier is automatically placed in the DrumDehumidify Mode after the copier has completed warming up.

Special Paper Used to designate special types of paper loaded in each Drawer for theAutomatic Paper Size Mode and automatic paper source switching function.

Custom 2-in-1 Used to store in memory various settings that are automatically called upwhen the 2-in-1 mode is selected.

Custom Book Mode Used to store in memory various settings that are automatically called upwhen the Book mode is selected.

Custom 2-in-1Separation

Used to store in memory various settings that are automatically called upwhen the 2-in-1 Separation mode is selected.

Administrator Mode Used to enter the User Help Code, send the Code to the center, setwhether Copy Track is performed or not, set the maximum limit to thenumber of copy cycles set with the Multi-Copy Keys, register/change theAccess No., and clear the Account Counter.

S-60

Settings in User’s Choice Modes• The following screen is displayed in each Mode. Note that the Cursor on the screen

indicates the initial setting.

Language Select : English Spanish

French Portug.

USA, Canada Area

1136S116EA

Mixed Orig. Size: YES NO

1136S106CA

Orig. Thickness : Thin Standard

1136S131CA

Mode Priority : A. Paper Manual A. Size

1136S107CA

Paper Pr.12

345

1136S105CA

* The Drawer number flashes to indicate that the corresponding Drawer has been selectedfor the Paper Priority Mode.

* Initial setting: 1

Language Select

Mixed Orig. Detect

Orig. Thickness

Copy Mode Priority

Paper Priority

1136S001AA

1

2

3

4

5

Europe Area

1136S002AA

1

2

3

USA, Canada Area

1136S001AA 1136S002AA

Language Select : German French

English Duch

Europe Area

1136S117DA

S-61

Expo. Priority : Auto Exposure Manual Exposure

1136S112CA

* When automatic exposure is selected, the manual copy exposure level can be set.(Initial setting: EXP 5 (center))

1) Using the Cursor Key, select "AUTO".2) Using either of the Exposure Control Keys, select the exposure level.3) Enter that level with the OK Key.

Sorter Priority : NonSort Group

Sort Staple

1136S114CA

Auto Expo. Level : Darker Lighter

Normal

1136S111CA


Darker Equivalent to EXP 7

Normal Equivalent to EXP 6

Lighter Equivalent to EXP 5

Finishing Priority

Auto Expo. Level

Manual Expo. Adj : Mode 1 Mode 3

Mode 2

1136S113CA

Manual Expo. Adjust

ScreenDisplay

Lamp Voltage (V) Corresponding to EXPDescription (Original Types)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Mode 1 +12 +8 +5 +2 0 −2 −4 −6 −9Originals with halftone images suchas photos

Mode 2 +12 +9 +6 +3 0 −3 −5 −7 −9 Various types of originals

Mode 3 +12 +10 +7 +4 0 −4 −7 −8 −9Originals with a colored backgroundor faint text

Exposure Priority

S-62

Counter Removal : Panel Reset Panel Not Reset

1136S110CA

Counter Removal

Sort / Non-SortAuto Change : YES NO

Intelligent Sort

ConditionScreenDisplay

Operation

The copy cycle is initiated using a singleoriginal in the Sort Mode.

YESThe copier switches from Sort toNon-Sort.

NO The copier remains in the Sort Mode.

The copy cycle is initiated to make two ormore copies using two or more originalsin the Non-Sort Mode.

YESThe copier switches from Non-Sort toSort.

NO The copier remains in the Non-Sort Mode.

Energy Saver : YES (1 min.) NO

1136S115CA

1136S109CA

Energy Saver Mode

* When "YES" has been selected, enter the time required to start the Energy Saver Modeusing the Multi-Copy Keys (1 to 10 minutes).

Auto Panel Reset : YES (1 min.) NO

1136S108CA

Auto Panel Reset

* When "YES" has been selected, enter the time required to start the automatic panel resetfunction using the Multi-Copy Keys (1, 2, 3 or 5 minutes).

Drum Dehumidify : YES (AUTO) NO

1136S130CA

Drum Dehumidify

S-63

Special Paper :1 :S04 :S0

2 :S15 :S0

3 :S0

1136S129CA

Special Paper

Setting procedure1) Using the OK Key, select the Drawer. (The corresponding number flashes.)2) Using the Cursor Key, select the paper type in accordance with the following table:

1136S002AA

1

2

3

1136S002AA

USA,Canada Area

1136S001AA

1

2

3

4

5

1136S001AA

EuropeArea

ScreenDisplay

DescriptionAPS Function

(Selection sequence)

Automatic DrawerSwitching (Only paper of

the same type)

S0Standard paper (nospecial paper setting)

O (2) O

S1 Recycled paper x O

S2 Special paper x x

S3Reused paper (2-sidedcopying disabled)

O (1) O

• After making the special paper setting, press the Paper Select Key to call the followingscreen to the Message Display:

Example: When S1 has been set for the 2nd Drawer, S2 for the 3rd Drawer, and S3 forthe 4th Drawer

A4B4A5

S1S2

B5A4Manual

1136S128CA

Note: When "S3" has been set for a given Drawer:

• If 2-sided copying has been set, the "S3" Drawer cannot be selected.• If the "S3" Drawer has been set, 2-sided copying cannot be selected.

S-64

Erase Margin x0.612

0 (1/2") 0 (1/2") AUTO

Custom

1136S132EA

Inch Area

Setting method

1. Use the Cursor Key to select the desired item.2. Press the Clear Key to clear the current value.3. Press the Multi-Copy Keys to input a new value in accordance

with the following table.4. Press the OK Key to enter that value.

Note: Only 1/2" or 10 mm is available for Erase and Margin.

Erase, Margin

Use the Reduction, Full Size or Enlargement Keys to select.

Zoom ratio

Use the Paper Select Key or Auto Paper Mode Key to select.

Paper

ScreenDisplay

0 1 2 3 4

Erase NO

Margin NO

Erase Margin x0.707

0 (10mm) 0 (10mm) AUTO

1136S121CA

Metric Area

1136S011AA 1136S012AA 1136S014AA

1136S015AA

1136S013AA

1136S016AA

S-65

Erase Margin x0.707

0 (10mm) 0 (10mm) AUTO 1136S121CA

Custom 2 in 1

Erase Margin x1.000

0 (1/2") 0 (1/2") Letter 1136S133EA

Inch AreaCustom Book Mode

Erase Margin x1.632

1 (1/2") 2 (1/2") AUTO

1136S134EA

Inch AreaCustom 2 in 1 Separation

Enter Admin. #:

1136S135CA

Administrator Mode

Setting procedure1) Using the Multi-Copy Keys, enter the Administrator Number (identification number.)

registered in the Security Mode of the Tech. Rep. Mode.2) The following screen appears on the Message Display:


1136S118CA

3) Use the Cursor Key to select either item and press the OK Key to change the screen asshown below:

"User Help" indicates that when the copier is fitted with the DT-103, a code (3 digits) for arequest to replenish toner, paper, etc. can be sent to the center. Note that when no code hasbeen entered, only the state of the machine is sent.

Procedure1) Using the Cursor Key, select the desired number. (The number selected flashes.)2) Press the Clear Key to clear the current code and use the Multi-Copy Keys to enter a

3-digit code.

When "User Help" has been selected

User Help :1 0004 000

2 0005 000

3 0006 000 1136S137CA

Erase Margin x1.000

0 (1/2") 0 (1/2") A4

1136S119DA

Metric Area

Erase Margin x1.414

1 (1/2") 2 (1/2") AUTO

1136S120DA

Metric Area

S-66

Procedure1) Using the Cursor Key, select "YES" or "NO".2) Press the OK Key to move to the setting of the next option.

"Max. Copy Sets" indicates the maximum number of copy cycles that can be entered using theMulti-Copy Keys.

Procedure1) Using the Cursor Key, select "YES".2) Press the Clear Key to clear the number of copy cycles and use the Multi-Copy Keys to

input the maximum number of copy cycles.3) Press the OK Key to enter the value and switch to either of the following screens:

"Copy Track Data" is used to register and change the identification number and clear thecount on an account basis and is shown when "Copy Track" YES has been selected.

Procedure1) Using the Cursor Key, select "Copy Track Data".2) By pressing the OK Key, the screen changes as shown below:

3) Using the Cursor Key, select the desired item. By pressing the OK Key, the screenchanges as shown below:

When "Copy Track" has been selected

"NO" selected"YES" selected

Copy Track : YES NO 1136S138CA

Max. Copy Sets : limited to not limited 1136S139CA


1136S118CA

User Help Copy Track Copy Track Data

1136S136CA

Copy Track Data : Register Access # Account Counter 1136S140CA

S-67

"Register Access #" allows the access number (identification number) to be registered orchanged on an account basis.

Procedure1) Using the OK Key, select the desired account number (1 to 26).2) Using the Multi-Copy Keys, input the "Access #" (4 digits: 0001~9999).3) Press the OK Key to enter the account access number and switch the screen to the next

account.

When "Register Access #" has been selected

Register Access # : Account # Access #

1136S141CA

"Account Counter" allows the count of the Size/Total Counter to be displayed and cleared on anaccount basis.

Procedure1) Using the OK Key, select the account number (1 to 26).2) Using the Cursor Key, select the desired Counter.3) Press the Clear Key to clear the count.

When "Account Counter" has been selected

Account # : Total Size 1136S142CA

S-68

Settings To BeMade Due to

PartsReplacement or

Memory Clearing

PWB-A(except

RAMpack)

PWB-A(Including

RAMpack)

PCDrum

Starter

OriginalSize

DetectingSensor

Memory Clear

AIDCSensor

ATDCSensor

ExpesureLamp

User’s Choiceinput

● ●

Tech. Rep.Choice input

● ●

Adjust input ● ●

Level History input ●

Paper Size input ● ●

Marketing Areasetting

● ●

ADF Setting ● ●

F5 Mode ● ● ● ● ● ●

F7 Mode ● ●

F8 Mode ●

FF Mode ● ∗ ●

Memory Clear ●

Initialize ●

"PC Drum" in thePort/OptionCounter cleared

"Starter" in thePort/OptionCounter cleared

Setting of S1A onPWB-A

●

∗ : This function is only used to load or change the starter.

6 LIST OF SETTINGS TO BE MADE DUE TO PARTS REPLACEMENTOR MEMORY CLEARING

S-69



Printed in Japan


EP2050

TROUBLESHOOTING

1.

1-1. General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-11-2. How to Use This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-11-3. Reading the Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-1

2.

1. Paper Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-8

2. Types of Misfeed Detection and Detection Timings . . . . . . . . . . . T-11

3. Misfeed Clearing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-13

3-1. Copier Take-Up Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-133-2. Transport/Separator Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-193-3. Multi Bypass Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-243-4. Fusing/Exit Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-28

∗ 3-5. Paper Feed Cabinet PF-202 Take-Up Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . T-303-6. Paper Feed Cabinet PF-102 Take-Up Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . T-343-7. Duplex Unit Vertical Transport Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-373-8. Duplex Unit Take-Up Misfeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-45

3

1. Detection Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-49

2. Troubleshooting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-64

2-1. C0000: Main Drive Motor M1’s Failure to TurnC0010: Main Drive Motor M1 Turning at Abnormal C0010: Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-64

2-2. C0040: Suction Fan Motor M4’s Failure to TurnC004A: Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor M5’s Failure to TurnC004b: Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor M5 Turning atC004b: Abnormal Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-66

2-3. C0070: Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8’s Failure to C0070:TurnC0071: Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8 Turning atC0071: Abnormal TimingC0072: Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M9’s Failure to C0070:Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-70

CONTENTS∗ : Except the U.S.A. and Canada

1 INTRODUCTION

2 PAPER TRANSPORT FAILURE

3 MALFUNCTIONS

i

2-4. C0200: PC Drum Charge, Image Transfer/Paper Separator C0200:Coronas Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-72

2-5. C0400: Exposure Lamp LA1’s Failure to Turn ONC0410: Exposure Lamp LA1 Turning ON at AbnormalC0410: Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-74

2-6. C0500: Warming-up FailureC0510: Abnormally Low Fusing TemperatureC0520: Abnormally High Fusing TemperatureC0522: Fusing Front/Rear Thermistor TH1/2 Malfunction . . T-76

2-7. C0600: Scanner Motor M2 MalfunctionC0601: SCP Board PWB-J MalfunctionC0650: Scanner Reference Position Sensor PC81 MalfunctionC0660: Scanner Load FailureC06F0 to C06F7: SHOME, BASE, TRON, and SCEND SignalC06F0 to C06F7: Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-79

2-8. C0610: Lens Motion FailureC0620: 4th/5th Mirrors Motion Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-81

2-9. C0E00: Main Erase Lamp LA3’s Failure to Turn ONC0E01: Main Erase Lamp LA3 turning ON at Abnormal C0E01: Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-83

2-10. C0E20: Image Erase Lamp LA2’s Failure to Turn ON . . . . T-852-11. C0F02: Original Size Detecting Board UN2 Malfunction

C0FE1 to C0FFF: Original Size Detecting Sensor C0FE1 to C0FFF: Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-86

2-12. C0F10: AE Sensor Board PWB-H Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . T-882-13. C0F20: AIDC Sensor UN3 Variation Correction Failure

C0F21: AIDC Sensor UN3 Contamination Correction FailureC0F22: AIDC Sensor UN3 VG Correction FailureC0F23: AIDC Sensor UN3 Exposure Correction Failure . . T-89

2-14. C0F30: ATDC Sensor UN4 FailureC0F31: ATDC Sensor UN4 Failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-90

∗ 2-15. C0900: 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Sensor Malfunction C0904: 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Motor’s Failure to Turn (except theC0904: U.S.A. and Canada) C0950: 4th Drawer Lift-Up Sensor Malfunction C0954: 4th Drawer Lift-Up Motor’s Failure to Turn. . . . . . . T-91

2-16. C0990: Main Tray Upward Motion FailureC0991: Main Tray Downward Motion FailureC0992: Main Tray Downward Motion Failure

CONTENTS

ii

C0993: Main Tray Upward Motion FailureC0994: Main Tray Elevator Motor M26’s Failure to Turn . . . . . . . T-942-17. C0998: Shifter Transfer Failure

C0999: Shifter Return FailureC099A: Shifter Return FailureC099b: Shifter Transfer FailureC099C: Shift Motor M27’s Failure to Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-97

2-18. C0996: 3rd Drawer Lock Release FailureC0F79: Paper Empty Sensor Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-100

2-19. C0d00: Duplex Unit Front/Rear Edge Guide Plates HomeC0d00: Position Detection FailureC0d20: Duplex Unit Trailing Gate Unit Home Position DetectionC0d00: FailureC0d50: Duplex Unit Drive Motor M31’s Failure to TurnC0d51: Duplex Unit Drive Motor M31 Turning at AbnormalC0d00: Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-105

3 Power is not Turned ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-109

CONTENTS

iii

1 INTRODUCTION

1-1. General Precautions1. When servicing the copier with its covers removed, use utmost care to prevent your hands,

clothing, and tools from being caught in revolving parts including the chains and gears. When servicing the copier with the Lower Rear Cover removed, be sure to install the jig.

2. Before attempting to replace parts and unplugging connectors, make sure that the power cord of the copier has been unplugged from the wall outlet.

3. Never create a closed circuit across connector pins except those specified in the text and on the printed circuit.

4. When creating a closed circuit and measuring a voltage across connector pins specified in the text, be sure to use the green wire (GND).

5. When the user is using a word processor or personal computer from the wall outlet of the same line, take necessary steps to prevent the circuit breaker from opening due to overloads.

6. Keep all disassembled parts in good order and keep tools under control so that none will be lost or damaged.

1-2. How to Use This Book1. If a component on a PWB or any other functional unit including a motor is defective, the text only

instructs you to replace the whole PWB or functional unit and does not give troubleshooting procedure applicable within the defective unit.

2. All troubleshooting procedures contained herein assume that there are no breaks in the harnesses and cords and all connectors are plugged into the right positions.

3. For the removal procedures of covers and parts, see DIS/REASSEMBLY, ADJUSTMENT.4. The troubleshooting procedures are given in the order of greater frequency of trouble or order of

operation.5. The procedures preclude possible malfunctions due to noise and other external causes.

1-3. Reading the Text1. The paper transport failure troubleshooting procedures are given according to the symptom. First

identify the location where the paper is present and start the procedure for that particular location. For malfunction troubleshooting, start with step 1 and onward.

2. Make checks in numerical order of the steps and, if an item is checked okay, go to the next step.

Step Check Item Result Action

1 Is --? YES Do this.

2 Go to step 2 if it checks okay.

Pattern 1


1Is --? YES Do this.

NO Check that.

2Go to step 2 if it checksokay.

Pattern 2

T-1

3. Methed for Checking Control Parts with Loads

To check the Control parts with loads easier and safer, this copier allows the TechnicalRepresentative to determine whether a control part is fully operational and signals are input and output properly by changing or checking the I/O port data of the board IC with the copier in the standby state (including where a misfeed or malfunction condition exists).

Procedure

1) On the circuit diagram accompanying the text, locate the I/O port of the control part which is probably faulty when a misfeed or malfunction occurs.

2) Select the function "Port" of "I/O Check" of the Tech. Rep. mode and show on the Message Display the screen containing the ports identified in step 1 above. (See SWITCHES ON PWBs.)

NOTE: Some paper path sensors can be checked by the function "Paper Path Sensor" of "I/O Check."

3) Change or check the input or output port data to check that the control part is operational and signals are input and output properly.

4) If the control part does not operate after the output port data has been changed, select "Control Board" of "I/O Check" and determine whether the cause of the problem is the board or any other functional unit.

NOTE:The output ports that can be checked by "Control Board" of "I/O Check" of the Tech. Rep.mode are only those given on p. T-63.

T-2

Checking a Control Part with a load by Changing the Output Port Data

1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Solenoid SL2 is probably faulty when a misfeed occurs at thePaper Take-Up Section of the copier.

• Procedure 1) From the circuit diagram accompanying the text, we know that the port on PWB-A for SL2 is

the 8th one of P7 of the "Port" screens.

Example

2) Select "Port" of "I/O Check" (see SWITCHES ON PWBs.) and show the following screen.

1136T034AA

P5 P6 P7

HHH HL 10 HH H11111111

3) Move the cursor to P7 and move the underline to the 8th port. Check that the data for the 8th port of P7 is "1."

1136T035AA

P5 P6 P7

HHH HL 10 HH H11111111

1136C01TAA

T-3

4) Press the Multi-Copy Key "0" to change the data from "1" to "0." Then, SL2 is energized for approx. 5 seconds.

1136T036AA

P5 P6 P7

HHH HL 10 HH H11111110

SL2 is operational if it makes its operating sound. SL2 is faulty if no operating sound is heard.

Note: As soon as the data is changed, the underline moves to the leftmost port whose data can be changed.

5) If SL2 did not operate, run the function "Control Board" of "I/O Check."

1136T037CA

PWB check Press the OK key to Start the copy cycle.

6) The following message appears if no signals are output from PWB-A to SL2.

1136T038CA

Call your Technical Rep: Code:C0328

Note: See p. T-63 for malfunction codes for the output signals.

T-4

Checking a Control Part with a load by Changing the Input Port Data1st Drawer Paper Take-Up Sensor PC56 is probably faulty when a misfeed occurs at the PaperTake-Up Section of the copier.

Example 1: Using the function "Port" of "I/O Check"

• Procedure1) From the circuit diagram accompanying the text, we know that the port on PWB-A for PC56 is

the 1st one of P11 of the "Port" screens.

1136C02TAA

2) Select "Port" of "I/O Check" (see SWITCHES ON PWBs) and show the following screen. At this time, check that the data for the 1st port of P11 is "H."

1136T039AA

P11 P12 P13

HHLLLLLLHHHLLLHLHHHH1111

3) Open the Upper Right Door and move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC56.4) Close the Upper Right Door to create a misfeed condition.5) Select "Port" again and show the following screen.

1136T040CA

Port Data P0 P1

1H11LH1010111

T-5

6) Show the data for P11 and check that the data for the 1st port has changed from "H" to "L."

1136T041AA

P11 P12 P13

LHLLLLLLHHHLLLHLHHHH1111

PC56 is operational if the data is "L." PC56 is faulty if the data is "H."

T-6

Example 2: Using the function "Paper Path Sensor" of "I/O Check"

• Procedure1) Select the function "Paper Path Sensor" of "I/O Check" and show the following screen. At this

time, check that data for the 1st sensor code is "1."

1136T042CA

Paper Path Sensor Check.123456789ABCDE11111111111111

2) Open the Upper Right Door and move the actuator with a sheet of paper to block PC56.3) Close the Upper Right Door and check that the data for the 1st sensor code has changed

from "1" to "0."

1136T043CA


PC56 is operational if the data is "0." PC56 is faulty if the data is "1."

T-7

Misfeed Location LEDs on Monitor Display

Except USA, Canada Area USA, Canada Area

2 PAPER TRANSPORT FAILURE

1. Paper MisfeedWhen a paper misfeed occurs in the copier, the corresponding Misfeed Location LED on the MonitorDisplay blinks to let the user know where the misfeed has occurred. If an LED lights up steadily, itindicates that there might be a sheet of paper present at that particular location in the copier.

1

2

3

4

56

7

8

9

10

1136T006DA

Blinking Light

There is a misfeed at that location.

SteadyLight

There might be a sheet of paper stopped at that location.

Steady/Blinking

LEDMisfeed Location Ref. Page

➀ Multi bypass take-up and transport T-24 to 27

➁ Copier take-up and vertical transport T-13 to 18

➂Paper Feed Cabinet take-up, verticaltransport, Duplex Unit

T-30 to 36,T-45 to 48

∗

➃ Automatic/Duplexing Document Feeder ∗➄ Transport/Separator T-19 to 23

➅ Fusing/Exit T-28 to 29

➆ ,➈ Duplex Unit vertical transport T-37 to 44 ∗➇ Duplex Unit storage T-43 ∗➉ Sorter/Staple Sorter ∗

∗ : When an option is installed

1

2

3

4

56

7

8

9

10

1136T007EA

Misfeed Locations Indicated by Misfeed Location LEDs

T-8

U.S.A. and Canada ∗ : When an option is installed


∗ Duplex UnitVerticalTransportSensor 1 PC30

∗ Duplex VerticalTransportSensor 2 PC12

∗ Duplex UnitPaper EntrySensor PC14

∗ Duplex UnitTurnover PathSensor PC13

Paper LeadingEdge DetectingSensor PC55


1st DrawerPaper Take-UpSensor PC56

2nd DrawerPaper Take-UpSensor PC57

∗ VerticalTransportSensor 3PC17


∗ Duplex UnitPaperTake-UpSensor PC16

∗ 3rd DrawerPaper Take-UpSensor PC21

Misfeed Detecting Sensors Layout

T-9


∗ Duplex VerticalTransportSensor 2 PC12

∗ Duplex UnitPaper EntrySensor PC14

∗ Duplex UnitTurnover PathSensor PC13

Paper LeadingEdge DetectingSensor PC55


1st DrawerPaper Take-UpSensor PC56

2nd DrawerPaper Take-UpSensor PC57


∗ Duplex UnitPaperTake-UpSensor PC16

∗ 3rd DrawerPaper Take-UpSensor PC21

∗ VerticalTransportDetectionSensor 4PC22

∗ 4th DrawerPaperTake-UpSensor PC29

Except U.S.A. and Canada ∗ When an option is installed

∗ Duplex UnitVerticalTransportSensor 1 PC30

T-10

2. Types of Misfeed Detection and Detection Timings• The table below lists the types of misfeed detection classified by the misfeed locations and

corresponding detection timings.

Note: For the types of misfeed detection and detection timings in the options, see the Service Manual for the options.

Paper Take-Up Misfeed

Type Detection Timing

Paper take-upfailure detection

1st Drawer Paper Take-UpSensor PC56 is not blocked (L)even after the lapse of approx.2.57 seconds after 1st DrawerPaper Take-Up Solenoid SL2 hasbeen energized.

2nd Drawer Paper Take-UpSensor PC57 is not blocked (L)even after the lapse of approx.2.57 seconds after 2nd DrawerPaper Take-Up Solenoid SL3 hasbeen energized.

Paper take-uptrailing edgedetection

PC56 is not unblocked (H) evenafter the lapse of T seconds(which varies for different papersizes) after it has been blocked(L).

PC57 is not unblocked (H) evenafter the lapse of T seconds(which varies for different papersizes) after it has been blocked(L).

Leading edgedetection byTransportRoller SensorPC54

PC54 is not blocked (L) evenafter the lapse of approx. 1.31seconds after PC56 has beenblocked (L).


PC57

1136T36TCA

TA4 crosswise paper : T=Approx. 2.0sec

H

L

PC56

1136T35TCA

T

A4 crosswise paper : T=Approx. 2.0sec

H

L

Approx. 1.31secPC56

1136T37TCAPC54

H

L

H

L

Approx. 2.0secPC57

1136T38TCAPC54

H

L

H

L

Approx. 2.57sec

PC56 1136T33TCA

ON SL2 OFF

H

L

Approx. 2.57sec

PC57 1136T34TCA

ON SL3 OFF

H

L

T-11

Multi Bypass Misfeed


Bypass papertake-up failuredetection

PC54 is not blocked (L) evenafter the lapse of approx. 1.48seconds after Manual FeedPaper Take-Up Clutch CL3 hasbeen energized.

Transport/Separator Misfeed


Trailing edgedetection byTransportRoller SensorPC54

PC54 is not unblocked (H) evenafter the lapse of T seconds(which varies for different papersizes) after the TRON signal hasbeen input.

Leading edgedetection byPaper LeadingEdge DetectingSensor PC55


Trailing edgedetection byPC55

PC55 is not unblocked (H) evenafter the lapse of approx. 0.69seconds after PC54 has beenunblocked (H).

Fusing/Exit Misfeed


Leading edgedetection byPaper ExitSwitch S53

S53 is not deactuated (L) evenafter the lapse of approx. 3.36seconds after the TRON signalhas been input.

Trailing edgedetection byS53

S53 is not actuated (H) evenafter the lapse of approx. 3.58seconds after PC55 has beenunblocked (H).

Approx. 1.48sec

PC54 1136T39TCA

ON CL3 OFF

H

L

PC54

1136T40TCA

TRON

T

A3 lengthwise paper : T=Approx. 2.9sec

H

L

Approx. 0.63secPC54

1136T41TCAPC55

H

L

H

L

Approx. 0.69secPC54

1136T42TCAPC55

H

L

H

L

ON S53 OFF

1136T43TCA

TRON

Approx. 3.36sec

Approx. 3.58secPC55

1136T44TCA

ON S53 OFF

H

L

T-12

1136T008AA

1136C04TAA

Symbol Name

PC54 Transport Roller Sensor

PC56 1st Drawer Paper Take-UpSensor

PC57 2nd Drawer Paper Take-UpSensor

SL2 1st Drawer Paper Take-UpSolenoid

SL3 2nd Drawer Paper Take-UpSolenoid

CL1 Paper Transport Clutch

PWB-A Master Board

3. Misfeed Clearing Procedures

3-1. Copier Take-Up Misfeed

T-13

◆ Copier Take-Up Misfeed Clearing Procedure

Symptom Step Check Item Result Action

• Paper is not takenup at all. 1

Dose the paper being usedmeet productspecifications?

NOInstruct the user to use thepaper that meets productspecifications.

• Paper isstationary beforethe PaperTake-Up Sensor.

2Is the paper curled, wavy,or damp? YES

Change the paper.Instruct the user in how tostore the paper.

3Are the Separator Fingerson both sides of theDrawer in position?

NOInstruct the user to load thepaper so that it rests underthe Fingers.

4Are the Separator Fingersdeformed?

YESReplace the Fingers.

5Is the Trailing Edge Stop orEdge Guide in goodposition?

NOChange the position of theEdge Stop or Guide.

6Are the Paper LiftingSprings positionedcorrectly?

NOChange the position of theSprings or add one asnecessary.

7Are the Paper Take-UpRolls deformed, worn, ordirty with paper dust?

YESClean or replace the PaperTake-Up Rolls.

8

Check 1st Drawer PaperTake-Up Solenoid SL2 foroperation as follows. (Seep. T-3, 4.)

1)2)

Port: P7-8Select the function"Port."

3) Is the data for P7-8 setto "1"?

NO

Replace PWB-A.

4) Does SL2 operatewhen the data for P7-8is changed from "1" to"0"? (Check for thesound of operation.)

YES

Perform step 12.

9

Does the malfunction code"C0328" appear when thefunction "Control Board" of"I/O Check" of the Tech.Rep. mode is run?

YES Replace PWB-A.

NO

Replace SL2.

1136T044AA

P5 P6 P7

HHH HL 10 HH H11111111

T-14

1136T045AA

P5 P6 P7

HHH HL 10 HH H11111111


10

Check 2nd Drawer PaperTake-Up Solenoid SL3 foroperation as follows. (Seep. T-3, 4.)

1)2)



NO

Replace PWB-A.


YES

Perform step 12.

11


YES Replace PWB-A.

NO

Replace SL3.

12Is the Clutch Springdeformed or worn?

YESReplace the Clutch Spring.

T-15


• Paper isstationary at theVertical TransportSection.

1Are the Vertical TransportRollers deformed, worn, ordirty with paper dust?

YESClean or replace the VerticalTransport Rollers.

2

Is the Paper Take-UpGuide Plate or VerticalTransport Guide Plate dirtyor deformed?

YES

Correct, replace, or cleanthe Guide Plate.

3

Check 1st Drawer PaperTake-Up Sensor PC56 asfollows. (See p. T-7.)

1) Select the function"Paper Path Sensor"and check to see if thedata for sensor code 1is set to "1."

NO

• Check the actuator for operation.• Check PC56.

2) Move the actuator witha sheet of paper toblock PC56.

3) Has the data for 1changed from "1" to "0"?

NOReplace PC56.

YES

Replace PWB-A.

1136T046CA


1136T047CA


T-16


4

Check 2nd Drawer PaperTake-Up Sensor PC57 asfollows. (See p. T-7.)


NO




NOReplace PC57.

YES

Replace PWB-A.

5

Check Paper TransportClutch CL1 for operation asfollows. (See p. T-3, 4.)

1)2)



NO

Replace PWB-A.

4) Does CL1 operatewhen the data for P7-4is changed from "1" to"0"? (Check for thesound of operation.)

NO

Perform step 6.

6


YES Replace PWB-A.

NO

Replace CL1.

1136T048CA


1136T049CA


1136T050AA

P5 P6 P7

HHH HL 10 HH H11111111

T-17


• Paper isstationary at theTransport Rollers.

1Are the Transport Rollersdeformed, worn, or dirtywith paper dust?

YESReplace or clean theTransport Rollers.

2

Check Transport RollerSensor PC54 as follows.(See p. T-7.)


NO




NOReplace PC54.

YES

Replace PWB-A.

1136T051CA


1136T052CA


T-18

3-2. Transport/Separator Misfeed

Symbol Name

PC54 Transport Roller Sensor

PC55 Paper Leading Edge DetectingSensor

CL2 Synchronizing Roller Clutch

SL1 Separator Solenoid

M4 Suction Fan Motor

PWB-A Master Board

HV1 High Voltage Unit

1136C03TAA

T-19

◆ Transport/Separator Misfeed Clearing Procedure


• Paper isstationary at theSynchronizingRoller.



2

Check Paper Leading EdgeDetecting Sensor PC55 asfollows. (See p. T-7.)

1) Select the function"Paper Path Sensor"and check to see if thedata for sensor code Ais set to "1."

NO

Check the actuator foroperation.


3) Has the data for Achanged from "1" to "0"?

NO

Replace PC55.

1136T053CA


1136T054CA


T-20


3

Check SynchronizingRoller Clutch CL2 foroperation as follows. (Seep. T-3, 4.)

1)2)



NO

Replace PWB-A.


YES

Perform step 5.

4


YES Replace PWB-A.

NO

Replace CL2.

5Is a given length of loopformed before theSynchronizing Roller?

NOAdjust the loop length usingTech. Rep. Choice SCH-23(Loop Length Adjustment).

• Paper isstationary nearthe PC Drum.

1Is the Pre-Image TransferGuide Plate deformed ordirty?

YESCorrect, clean, or replacethe Guide Plate.

2

Are the ImageTransfer/Paper SeparatorCorona Wires deterioratedor dirty?

YES

Clean the wires or replacethe Coronas Unit.

3Is the Paper Guide abovethe Paper SeparatorCorona deformed or dirty?

YESClean or replace the PaperGuide.

4Are the SynchronizingRollers deformed, worn, ordirty with paper dust?

YESClean or replace theSynchronizing Rollers.

5

Check the Paper SeparatorCorona Remote signalfrom the PWB-A.

YESReplace PWB-A.

* Does the malfunctioncode "C0322" appearwhen the function"Control Board" of "I/OCheck" of the Tech. Rep.mode is run?

NO

Replace High Voltage UnitHV1 or Coronas Unit.

1136T055CA

P5 P6 P7

HHH HL 10 HH H11111111

T-21


• Paper is wedgedat the PaperSeparator Fingers.

1

Check Separator SolenoidSL1 for operation. (See p.T-3, 4.)

1)2)



NO

Replace PWB-A.


YES

Perform step 3.

2

Does the malfunction code"C031F" appear when thefunction "Control Board" of"I/O Check" of the Tech.Rep. mode is run?

YES Replace PWB-A.

NO

Replace SL1.

3Are the Paper SeparatorFingers deformed or dirty?

YESCorrect or clean, or replace,the Paper Separator Fingers.

1136T056CA

P5 P6 P7

HHH HL 10 HH H11111111

T-22


• Paper isstationary on theSuction Belts.

1Referring to step 2 on p.T-18, check TransportRoller Sensor PC54.

2

Referring to step 2 on p.T-20, check Paper LeadingEdge Detecting SensorPC55.

3Do the Suction Belts turnproperly?

NOCheck the drive gear andtiming belt.

4

Check Suction Fan MotorM4 for rotation.(See p. T-3,4.)

1)2)



NO

Replace PWB-A.

Is M4 turning at half speedat this time?

4) Does the M4 speedchange from half to fullspeed when the datafor P6-3 is changedfrom "0" to "1"?

NO

Perform step 5.

5


YES Replace PWB-A.

NO

Replace M4.

1136T057CA

P5 P6 P7

HHH HL 10 HH H11111111

T-23

1136T010AA

1136C05TAA

Symbol Name

PC51 Manual Feed Paper EmptySensor

SL4 Manual Feed Paper Take-UpSolenoid

CL3 Manual Feed Paper Take-UpClutch

PWB-A Master Board

3-3. Multi Bypass Misfeed

T-24

◆ Multi Bypass Misfeed Clearing Procedure


1

Is the paper fed out of thecopier properly when it istaken up and fed in fromthe 1st or 2nd Drawer?

NO

Perform the troubleshootingprocedure for "CopierTake-Up Misfeed" or"Transport/SeparatorMisfeed."

2

Does the followingmessage appear when asheet of paper is placed onthe Multi Bypass Table?

NO

Remove the paper andperform step 3.

YES

Perform step 4.

3

Check Manual Feed PaperEmpty Sensor PC51 asfollows. (See p. T-5, 6.)

1) Port: P12-2

2) Select the function"Port." Is the data forP12-2 set to "H" (whenno paper is loaded).

NO


3)

4)

Move the actuator witha sheet of paper toblock PC51.Reselect "Port."

5) Show the data forP12-2. Has the datachanged from "H" to"L"?

NO

Replace PC51.

YES

Replace PWB-A.

1136T058CA

X1.000 M FEED

1136T059CA

P11 P12 P13

HHLLLLLLHHHLLLHLHHHH1111

1136T060CA

Port Data P0 P1

1H11LH1010111

1136T061AA

P11 P12 P13

HHLLLLLLHLHLLLHLHHHH1111

T-25



Does the paper being usedmeet productspecifications?




6

Check Manual Feed PaperTake-Up Solenoid SL4 foroperation (lowering thePaper Take-Up Rolls) asfollows. (See p. T-3, 4.)

1)2)


3) Is the data for P13-8set to "1"?

NO

Replace PWB-A.

4) Does SL4 operate tolower the PaperTake-Up Rolls whenthe data for P13-8 ischanged from "1" to "0"?

YES

Perform step 10.

7


YES Replace PWB-A.

NO

Adjust the stroke of SL4 orreplace SL4.

8

Check Manual Feed PaperTake-Up Clutch CL3 foroperation as follows. (Seep. T-3, 4.)

1)2)



NO

Replace PWB-A.


YES

Perform step 10.

1136T063AA

P5 P6 P7

HHH HL 10 HH H11111111

1136T062AA

P11 P12 P13

HHLLLLLLHLHLLLHLHHHH1111

T-26


9


YES Replace PWB-A.

NO

Replace CL3.

10Is the Pressure Pad orGuide Plate deformed ordirty?

YESClean or replace thePressure Pad or Guide Plate.

11Are the Paper Take-UpRolls deformed, worn, ordirty with paper dust?

YESClean or replace the PaperTake-Up Rolls.

T-27

Symbol Name

S53 Paper Exit Switch


PWB-A Master Board

3-4. Fusing/Exit Misfeed

1136T011AA

1136C06TAA

T-28

◆ Fusing/Exit Misfeed Clearing Procedure


• Paper isstationary beforethe Fusing Roller.



2Is the Pre-Fusing GuidePlate dirty with toner?

YESCorrect or clean, or replace,the Guide Plate.

3

Referring to steps 3, 4, and5 on p. T-23, check theSuction Belts and SuctionFan Motor M4 for rotation.

• The paper isstationary at theFusing Roller.

1

Are the Fusing Rollersscratched or dirty? Or, hasthe replacement timearrived for the Rollers?

YES

Clean or replace the Rollers.

2

Are the Paper SeparatorFingers dirty with toner orworn? Are their edgesdamaged?

YES

Correct or clean, or replacethe Fingers.

3Is the Oil Roller dirty? Or,has the replacement timearrived for the Roller?

YESClean or replace the Roller.

• Paper isstationary afterthe Paper ExitRoller/Rolls.

1

Check Paper Exit SwitchS53 as follows. (See p.T-7.)

1) Select the function"Paper Path Sensor"and check to see if thedata for sensor code Bis set to "1."

NO


2) Move the actuator witha sheet of paper todeactuate S53.

3) Has the data for Bchanged from "1" to "0"?

NOReplace S53.

YES

Replace PWB-A.Paper Path Sensor Check

1136T065CA

123456789ABCDE11111111110111

Paper Path Sensor Check

1136T064CA

123456789ABCDE11111111111111

T-29

1136C23TAA

Symbol Name

PC21 3rd Drawer Paper Take-UpSensor

PC22 Vertical Transport Sensor 4

PC29 4th Drawer Paper Take-UpSensor

M21 Vertical Transport Drive Motor

M22 3rd Drawer Paper Take-UpMotor

M23 4th Drawer Paper Take-UpMotor

PWB-A EP2050 Master Board

PWB-A PF-202 Master Board

3-5. Paper Feed Cabinet PF-202 Take-Up Misfeed (Except the U.S.A. andCanada)

T-30

◆ PF-202 Take-Up Misfeed Clearing Procedure





• Paper isstationary beforethe PaperTake-Up Sensor.



3

Is the Paper Take-UpMotor (M22 or M23) turningwhen the Start Key ispressed?

YES Check for possible overload.

NO

First replace PF-202PWB-A, then replaceEP2050 PWB-A ifnecessary.Check the Motor (M22 or23).

4

Is the Paper Take-Up Rollor Separator Rolldeformed, worn, or dirtywith paper dust?

YES

Clean or replace the PaperTake-Up or Separator Roll.

• Paper isstationary beforethe VerticalTransport Rollers.

1

Check 3rd Drawer PaperTake-Up Sensor PC21 asfollows. (See p. T-7.)


NO




NOReplace PC21.

YES

First replace PF-202PWB-A, then replaceEP2050 PWB-A ifnecessary.


1136T071CA

123456789ABCDE11111111111111


1136T066CA

123456789ABCDE11011111111111

T-31



2

Check 4th Drawer PaperTake-Up Sensor PC29 asfollows. (See p. T-7.)


NO




NOReplace PC29.

YES

Replace PWB-A or PF-202PWB-A.First replace PF-202PWB-A, then replaceEP2050 PWB-A ifnecessary.

3

Is Vertical Transport DriveMotor M21 turning whenthe Start Key is pressed? NO

First replace PF-202PWB-A, then replaceEP2050 PWB-A ifnecessary.Check M21.


4

Is the Vertical TransportRoller or Guide Platedeformed, worn, or dirtywith paper dust?

YES

Clean or replace the VerticalTransport Roller or GuidePlate.


1136T068CA

123456789ABCDE11101111111111


1136T067CA

123456789ABCDE11111111111111

T-32


• Paper isstationary nearVertical TransportDetection Sensor4 PC22.

1

Check PC22 as follows.(See p. T-7.)


NO




NOReplace PC22.

YES


2


NOCheck the Paper FeedCabinet for positiveconnection to the copier.

YESClean or replace the VerticalTransport Roller or GuidePlate.


1136T069CA

123456789ABCDE11111111111111


1136T070CA

123456789ABCDE11111110111111

T-33

Symbol Name

PC21 3rd Drawer Paper Take-UpSensor



M22 3rd Drawer Paper Take-UpMotor



3-6. Paper Feed Cabinet PF-102 Take-Up Misfeed

T-34

◆ PF-102 Take-Up Misfeed Clearing Procedure





• Paper isstationary before3rd Drawer PaperTake-Up SensorPC21.



3

Is 3rd Drawer PaperTake-Up Motor M22turning when the Start Keyis pressed? NO



4

Is the Paper Take-Up Rollor Separator Rolldeformed, worn, or dirtywith paper dust?

YES

Clean or replace the PaperTake-Up or Separator Roll.


1

Check 3rd Drawer PaperTake-Up Sensor PC21 asfollows. (See p. T-7.)


NO




NOReplace PC21.

YES



1136T071CA

123456789ABCDE11111111111111


1136T066CA

123456789ABCDE11011111111111

T-35


2

Is Vertical Transport DriveMotor M21 turning whenthe Start Key is pressed?

NO



3


YES

Clean or replace the VerticalTransport Roller or GuidePlate.

• Paper isstationary nearVertical TransportDetection Sensor4 PC22.

1

Check PC22 as follows.(See p. T-7.)


NO




NOReplace PC22.

YES


2


NOCheck the Paper FeedCabinet for positiveconnection to the copier.

YESClean or replace the VerticalTransport Roller or GuidePlate.


1136T070CA

123456789ABCDE11111110111111


1136T069CA

123456789ABCDE11111111111111

T-36

3-7. Duplex Unit Vertical Transport Misfeed

Symbol Name

PC12 Duplex Vertical TransportSensor 2

PC13 Duplex Unit Turnover PathSensor

PC14 Duplex Unit Paper Entry Sensor

PC15 Duplex Unit Paper EmptySensor

PC30 Duplex Unit Vertical TransportSensor 1

SL31 Duplex Unit Gate SwitchingSolenoid

SL5 Exit/Duplex Solenoid

M31 Duplex Unit Drive Motor


PWB-A PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D MasterBoard

PWB-G Duplex Unit Master Board

1136C25TAA

T-37

◆ Duplex Unit Vertical Transport Misfeed Clearing Procedure


• Paper isstationary nearthe Exit Section.



2

Check Exit/DuplexSolenoid SL5 for operationas follows. (See p. T-3, 4)

1)2)



NO

Replace EP2050 PWB-A.

4) Does SL5 operatewhen the data for P7-1is changed from "1"to"0"? (Check for thesound of operation.)

YESCheck the Clutch Spring fordeformation and wear.

NOReplace SL5.

3

Are the Exit/DuplexSwitching Plate and Upperand Lower Guide Platesdeformed or dirty?

YES

Clean or replace the Plates.

P6P7

10 LH H11111111

1136T075CA

P5 HLH HL

T-38


• Paper isstationary nearthe VerticalTransport Sectionof the Duplex Unit.

1

Check Duplex Unit DriveMotor M31 for operation asfollows. (See p. T-3, 4)

1)2)



NO

First replace PWB-G, thenreplacePF-202/PF-102/PF-2DPWB-A, or EP2050 PWB-A,if necessary.

4) Does M31 operatewhen the data forP42-1 is changedfrom"1" to "0"? (Checkfor the sound ofoperation.)

NO

First check Duplex driveconnections.Then, if necessary, replaceM31, PWB-G,PF-202/PF-102/PF-2DPWB-A, or EP2050 PWB-A,in that order.


2

Check Duplex Unit VerticalTransport Sensor 1 PC30as follows. (See p. T-7.)

1) Select the function"Paper Path Sensor"and check to see if thedata for sensor code Cis set to "1."

NO



3) Has the data for Cchanged from "1" to "0"?

NO Replace PC30.

YES

Replace EP2050 PWB-A .

P42P43

11 1 11 LHHH

1136T076CA

P41


1136T077CA

123456789ABCDE11111111111111


1136T078CA

123456789ABCDE11111111111011

T-39


• Paper isstationary nearthe VerticalTransport Sectionof the Duplex Unit.

3

Check Duplex VerticalTransport Sensor 2 PC12as follows. (See p. T-5, 6)

1)2)


3) Is the data for P8-3 setto "H"?

NO


4)

5)

Move the actuator witha sheet of paper toblock PC12.Select "Port" again.

6) Show the data for P8-3.Has it been changedfrom "H" to "L"?

NO Replace PC12.

YES

Replace EP2050 PWB-A.

P9P10

HLLHHHLL

1136T079AA

P8 HHHH HLH

Port DataP0P1

1H11LH1010111

1136T080CA

P9P10

HLLHHHLL

1136T081AA

P8 HHLH HLH

T-40


• Paper isstationary nearthe TurnoverSection. 1

Are the Paddle Roller, SlipRoller/Rolls, and Rolls BRelease Lever deformed,worn, or dirty with paperdust?

NOCheck the drive connectionfrom the Duplex Unit.

YES

Clean or replace the Rollerand/or Roll.Check the Release Levermechanism.

2

Check Duplex UnitTurnover Path SensorPC13 as follows. (See p.T-5, 6)

1)

2)

Port: P22-4 (PF-202) P38-4 (PF-102) P30-4 (PF-2D)Select the function"Port."

3) <For PF-202>Is the data for P22-4set to "H"?

NO


<For PF-102>Is the data for P38-4set to "H"?

<For PF-2D>Is the data for P30-4set to "H"?


P21P22

00LL00

1136T082AA

P20 LL00HL00

HHLHLL

P39P40

H LHHL

1136T146AA

P38 LLHHL11

P30P31

LLHLH

1136T083AA

P29 00 00

L

T-41


5) Select "Port" again.

6) <For PF-202>Show the data forP22-4. Has it changedfrom "H" to "L"?

NO Replace PC13.

YES

First replacePF-202/PF-102/PF-2DPWB-A, then replaceEP2050 PWB-A if necessary.

<For PF-102>Show the data forP38-4. Has it changedfrom "H" to "L"?

<For PF-2D>Show the data forP30-4. Has it changedfrom "H" to "L"?

Port DataP0P1

1H11LH1010111

1136T084CA

P21P22

00LL00

1136T085AA

P20 LL00HL00

HHLLLL

P39P40

H LHHL

1136T086AA

P38 LLLHL11

P30P31

LLLLH

1136T087AA

P29 00 00

L

T-42


• The leading edgeof the paper isstationary insidethe Duplex Unit.

1

Is the Paper Guide Mylardeformed or dirty?

NOCheck the Mylar movingmechanism.

YES Clean or replace the Mylar.

2

Check Duplex Unit GateSwitching Solenoid SL31as follows. (See p. T-3, 4)

1)2)



NO


4) Does SL31 operatewhen the data forP42-5 is changed from"1" to "0"? (Check forthe sound of operation.)

NO Replace SL31.

YES

Check the Clutch Spring fordeformation and wear.

3

Check Duplex Unit PaperEntry Sensor PC14 asfollows. (See p. T-7.)

1) Select the function"Paper Path Sensor"and check to see if thedata for sensor code Dis set to "1."

NO



3) Has the data for Dchanged from "1" to "0"?

NO Replace PC14.

YES


P42P43

11 1 11

1136T088AA

P41

LHHH


1136T089CA


1136T090CA

T-43


• Paper isstationary nearthe take-up port ofthe Duplex Unit.

1

Check Duplex Unit PaperEmpty Sensor PC15 asfollows. (See p. T-5, 6)

1) Move the actuator witha sheet or paper toblock PC15.

2) Slide the Duplex unitback in.

3) Is the followingmessage on the controlpanel ?

YES

First replace PWB-G, thenreplace PF-202/PF-102PWB-A, or EP2050 PWB-A,if necessary.

4) Remove the sheet ofpaper to unblock PC15.

NO


5)

6)

Select the function"Port." Is the data forP43-6 set to "H"?

Move the actuator witha sheet of paper toblock PC15.


8) Show the data forP43-6. Has it changedfrom "H" to "L"?

NO Replace PC15.

YES

First replace PWB-G, thenreplace PF-202/PF-102PWB-A, or EP2050 PWB-A,if necessary.

P42P43

11LHHH

1136T091AA

P411 01

Port DataP0P1

1H11LH1010111

1136T092CA

P42P43

11LLHH

1136T093AA

P411 01

Press the Startkey to eject allthe Copies at :

1136T150CA

T-44

3-8. Duplex Unit Take-Up Misfeed

Symbol Name

PC16 Duplex Unit Paper Take-UpSensor


SL33 Duplex Unit Pick-Up Solenoid

CL31 Duplex Unit Paper Take-UpClutch





1136C26TAA

T-45

◆ Duplex Unit Take-Up Misfeed Clearing Procedure



Is the paper curled, wavy,or damp? YES


2

Check Duplex Unit Pick-UpSolenoid SL33 as follows.(See p. T-3, 4)

1)2)



NO


4) Does SL33 operatewhen the data forP42-2 is changed from"1"to "0"? (Check forthe sound of operation.)

NO Replace SL33.

YES

Check the pick-upmechanism.

3

Check Duplex Unit PaperTake-Up Clutch CL31 asfollows. (See p. T-3, 4)

1)2)



NO


4) Does CL31 operatewhen the data forP42-5 is changed from"1"to "0"? (Check forthe sound of operation.)

NO Replace CL31.

YES

Check the Clutch.

4

Are the Take-Up Roll, FeedRoll, and Separator Rolldeformed, worn, or dirtywith paper dust?

YES

Clean or replace the Rolls.

P42P43

11LHHH

1136T094AA

P411 11

P42P43

11LHHH

1136T095AA

P411 11

T-46


1136T096CA

123456789ABCDE11111111111111


1136T097CA

123456789ABCDE11111111111110


• Paper isstationary nearthe VerticalTransport Section. 1

Is Vertical Transport DriveMotor M21 turning when acopy is taken up and fedinto the copier from theDuplex Unit?

NO

First check Duplex driveconnections.Then, if necessary, replaceM21, PF-202/PF-102/PF-2DPWB-A, or EP2050 PWB-A,in that order.


2

Are the Vertical TransportRollers and Guide Platedeformed, worn, or dirtywith paper dust?

YES

Clean or replace the VerticalTransport Rollers and GuidePlate.

3

Check Duplex Unit PaperTake-Up Sensor PC16 asfollows. (See p. T-7.)

1)

2)

Select the function"Paper Path Sensor"and check to see if thedata for sensor code Eis set to "1."

Move the actuator witha sheet of paper toblock PC16.

NO


3) Has the data for Echanged from "1" to "0"?

NO Replace PC16.

YES


T-47


• Paper isstationary nearthe VerticalTransport Section.

4

Check Vertical TransportSensor 3 PC17 as follows.(See p. T-7.)


NO




NO Replace PC17.

YES

First replacePF-202/PF-102/PF-2DPWB-A, then replaceEP2050 PWB-A if necessary.


1136T098CA

123456789ABCDE11111111111111


1136T099CA

123456789ABCDE11111101111111

T-48

3 MALFUNCTIONSThe copier CPU is capable of self-diagnosis of the copier conditions and, when detecting amalfunction, it shows the corresponding malfunction code on the Message Display. Eachmalfunction code indicates the particular part which has developed a malfunction and the type ofmalfunction.

Call yourTechnical Rep. :

Code : C01136T100CB

Represents the malfunction detail.

Indicates the particular malfunctioning part inthe section.

Indicates the malfunctioning section.

Malfunction Resetting ProcedureAfter the source of the malfunction has been eliminated:

Press the Trouble Reset Switch on Tech. Rep. Settings SwitchesBoard PWB-I for an Exposure Lamp failure (C04**) and fusing failure(C05**).Swing open and close the Front Door for any other malfunctions.Disconnect and connect the option or open and close the option doorfor malfunctions of options.

1. Detection Timing

Code Description Detection Timing

C0000 Main Drive Motor M1’sfailure to turn

The Main Drive Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for acontinuous 1.5-second period 1 second after M1 hasbeen energized.

C0010 Main Drive Motor M1turning at abnormaltiming

The Main Drive Motor Lock signal remains LOW for acontinuous 1.5-second period 1 second after M1 hasbeen deenergized.

Dri

ve

Main Drive Motor

Lock Signal 1136T45TCA

ON M1 OFF

1sec 1.5sec

H

L

Main Drive Motor

Lock Signal

1136T46TCA

ON M1 OFF

1sec 1.5sec

H

L

T-49


C0040 Suction Fan Motor M4’sfailure to turn

The Suction Fan Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for acontinuous 1.5-second period 1 second after M4 hasbeen energized.

C004A Original Glass CoolingFan Motor M5’s failureto turn

The Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor Lock signalremains HIGH for a continuous 1.5-second period 1second after M5 has been energized.

C004b Original Glass CoolingFan Motor M5 turning atabnormal timing

The Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor Lock signalremains LOW for a continuous 1.5-second period 1second after M5 has been deenergized.

C0070 Main Hopper TonerReplenishing MotorM8’s failure to turn

The output from Toner Bottle Home Position SensorPC35 does not go HIGH within 5 seconds after M8 hasbeen energized.

The output from PC35 does not go LOW within 10seconds after it has gone HIGH following the energizationof M8.

Dri

ve

Suction Fan Motor

Lock Signal

1136T47TCA

ON M4 OFF

1sec 1.5sec

H

L

Original Glass Cooling

Fan Motor Lock Signal

1136T48TCA

ON M5 OFF

1sec 1.5sec

H

L

Original Glass Cooling

Fan Motor Lock Signal

1136T49TCA

ON M5 OFF

1sec 1.5sec

H

L

PC35

1136T18TAA

ON M8 OFF

5secH

L

PC35

1136T19TAA

ON M8 OFF

10secH

L

T-50


C0071 Main Hopper TonerReplenishing Motor M8turning at abnormaltiming

The PC35 output is HIGH 2 seconds after M8 has beendeenergized.

C0072 Sub Hopper TonerReplenishing MotorM9’s failure to turn

When the current toner-to-carrier ratio is 2% lower thanthe SCH-90 setting and the Add Toner Indicator is not liton the control panel, a toner replenishing sequence iscarried out (M9 is turned); the toner-to-carrier ratio doesnot increase 1% within 140 seconds or 2% within 220seconds.

C0200 PC Drum Charge, ImageTransfer/PaperSeparator Coronasmalfunction

The Short Circuit Detection signal (SCD) remains LOWfor a continuous 600-msec. period while the PC DrumCharge Corona or Image Transfer/Paper SeparatorCoronas remain ON.

C0400 Exposure Lamp LA1’sfailure to turn ON

The output from AE Sensor Board PWB-H has notbecome 4.0 V or less for the period between when LA1turns ON and the Scanner starts a scan motion and whenthe Image Leading Edge signal (BASE) turns ON (goesLOW).

Dri

veP

C D

rum

Cha

rge,

Ima

geT

rans

fer/

Pap

er

Sep

arat

or C

oro

nas

Exp

osu

re L

amp

SCD

1136T50TCA

PC Drum Charge, Image ON ransfer/Paper Separator Coronas OFF

600msecH

L

PWB-H 4.0V

1136T22TAA

ON LA1 OFF

BASE H

L

PC35

1136T20TAA

ON M8 OFF

2sec

H

L

T-51


C0410 Exposure Lamp LA1turning ON at abnormaltiming

The output from PWB-H remains 4.0 V or less for acontinuous 3-second period at any timing while the outputfrom Scanner Reference Position Sensor PC81 remainsLOW.

The output from PWB-H remains 4.0 V or less for acontinuous 3-second period while the output from SizeReset Switch S108 remains LOW (i.e., while the OriginalCover remains closed).

C0500 Warming-up failure

C0510 Abnormally low fusingtemperature

The surface temperature of the Upper Fusing Rollerremains 130°C or less for a continuous 5-second periodafter the copier has warmed up.

C0520 Abnormally high fusingtemperature

The surface temperature of the Upper Fusing Rollerremains 230°C or more for a continuous 5-second periodafter the copier has warmed up.

C0522 Fusing Front/RearThermistor TH1/2malfunction

The voltages from TH1 and TH2 remain 0.165 V or lessfor a continuous 1-second period after the copier haswarmed up.

Exp

osu

re L

amp

Fus

ing

Un

it

When Power Switch S1 or Front Door Interlock SwitchS21 is ON, the surface temperature of the Upper FusingRoller:(Less than 165°C)* Does not reach 100°C within 180 seconds.* Does not reach 150°C within 60 seconds after it has

reached 100°C.* Does not reach 175°C within 60 seconds after it has

reached 150°C.* Does not reach 200°C within 240 seconds after it has

reached 150°C.(165°C or more)* Does not reach 200°C within 60 seconds.

After the copier has left the Energy Saver mode:* Does not reach 200°C within 120 seconds.

4 .0VPWB-H

1136T24TAA

S108

3.0sec

H

L

4 .0VPWB-H

1136T23TAA

PC81

3.0sec

H

L

T-52


C0600 Scanner Motor M2malfunction

Where no encoder pulses are input to SCP Board PWB-Jfor 100 to 130 msec. while M2 is turning, theForward/Backward Rotation signal from PWB-J does notgo from LOW to HIGH, or vice versa, when an attempt ismade to turn M2 backward.

C0601 SCP Board PWB-Jmalfunction

Where no encoder pulses are input to SCP Board PWB-Jfor 100 to 130 msec. while M2 is turning, theForward/Backward Rotation signal from PWB-J goes fromLOW to HIGH, or vice versa, when an attempt is made toturn M2 backward.

C0650 Scanner ReferencePosition Sensor PC81malfunction

C0660 Scanner load failure The M2 speed control does not change from theAcceleration to Constant Speed control for the periodbetween when the SHOME signal goes LOW and when aLOW TRON signal is detected.

Op

tica

l Sec

tion

(S

cann

er)

<At the start of the Scanner’s scan motion>PC81 is not unblocked H even after the lapse of agiven period of time.

<At the end of the Scanner’s return motion>PC81 is not blocked L even after the lapse of a givenperiod of time.

1136T51TCA

Encoder Pulse

ON M2 OFF

100 to 130msec

Forward Rotation Signal

Backward Rotation Signal

H

L

H

L

1136T52TCA

Encoder Pulse

ON M2 OFF

100 to 130msec

Forward Rotation Signal

Backward Rotation Signal

H

L

H

L

1136T53TCA

M2

AccelerationConstant Speed

T-53


C06F0 SHOME signal failure

C06F1 SHOME signal failure The SHOME signal does not go HIGH even after thelapse of 7 seconds after it has gone LOW.

C06F2 BASE signal failure The BASE signal does not go LOW even after the lapseof 5 seconds after the SHOME signal has gone HIGH.

C06F3 BASE signal failure

C06F4 TRON signal failure

C06F5 TRON signal failure

C06F6 SCEND signal failure

C06F7 SCEND signal failure The SCEND signal does not go HIGH even after the lapseof 5 seconds after it has gone LOW.

Op

tica

l Se

ctio

n (S

cann

er)

<During prescan>When the Scanner is at a position other than home, theSHOME signal does not go LOW even after the lapseof 5 seconds after S1 has been turned ON. The SHOME signal does not go LOW even after thelapse of 5 seconds after the SCEND signal has gonefrom LOW to HIGH.

<During a copy cycle>When the Scanner is at a position other than home, theSHOME signal does not go LOW even after the lapseof 7 seconds after the SCAN signal has gone LOW.The SHOME signal does not go LOW even after thelapse of 5 seconds after the SCEND signal has gonefrom LOW to HIGH.

<During prescan>The BASE signal does not go HIGH even after thelapse of 5 seconds after the TRON signal has goneLOW.

<During prescan>The TRON signal does not go LOW even after thelapse of 5 seconds after the BASE signal has goneLOW.

<During a copy cycle>The TRON signal does not go LOW even after thelapse of 5 seconds after the SHOME signal has goneHIGH.

<During prescan>The TRON signal does not go HIGH even after thelapse of 5 seconds after the BASE signal has goneHIGH.

<During prescan>The SCEND signal does not go LOW even after thelapse of 5 seconds after the TRON signal has goneHIGH.

<During a copy cycle>The SCEND signal does not go LOW even after thelapse of 5 seconds after the SHOME signal has goneHIGH.

T-54


C0610 Lens motion failure The output from Lens Reference Position Sensor PC90does not go from HIGH to LOW, or vice versa, even afterthe lapse of a given period of time after Lens Motor M6has been energized.

C0620 4th/5th Mirrors motionfailure

The output from Mirror Reference Position Sensor PC86does not go from HIGH to LOW, or vice versa, even afterthe lapse of a given period of time after Mirror Motor M7has been energized.

Opt

ical

Sec

tion

(L

ens)

Op

tica

l Se

ctio

n (M

irro

r)

T-55


C0E00 Main Erase Lamp LA3’sfailure to turn ON

The LA3 Malfunction signal remains HIGH for acontinuous 1-second period while LA3 remains ON.

C0E01 Main Erase Lamp LA3turning ON at abnormaltiming

The LA3 Malfunction signal remains LOW for acontinuous 1-second period while LA3 remains OFF.

C0E20 Image Erase LampLA2’s failure to turn ON

The LA2 gate array is defective according to theself-diagnoses made immediately after Main Drive MotorM1 has been deenergized.

C0F02 Original Size DetectingBoard UN2 malfunction

Era

se L

amps

Se

nso

rs

In F7 test operation:1) The Busy signal does not go LOW within approx. 800

msec. after the Initial signal has gone LOW, orundefined data is input to the master CPU.

2) If 1 is checked okay, the Busy signal goes HIGHwithin approx. 200 msec.

3) If both 1 and 2 are checked okay, the Busy signaldoes not go HIGH within approx. 4,000 msec.

4) If 1, 2, and 3 are checked okay, undefined data isinput to master CPU within approx. 500 msec.

Under normal conditions:1) The Busy signal remains HIGH or LOW for approx.

3,000 msec. or more.2) Undefined data is input to master CPU.

1.0sec LA3 Malfunction

Signal 1136T54TCA

ON LA3 OFF

H

L

1.0sec LA3 Malfunction

Signal 1136T55TCA

ON LA3 OFF

H

L

1136T56TCA

Busy Signal

Initial Signal

1) 800msec

2) 200msec

3) 400msec

4) 500msec

H

L

1136T57TCA

Busy Signal

70msec70msec

70msec 70msec

3000msec

T-56


C0F02 Original Size DetectingBoard UN2 malfunction

Se

nso

rsWhen S1 is turned ON:

1) The Busy signal remains HIGH or LOW for approx.5,000 msec. or more.

2) Undefined data is input to master CPU.

1136T60TCA

Busy Signal

Busy Signal

5000msec.

H

L

HL

T-57

Code Description Detection Timing and Sensor Layout

C0FE1 Original Size DetectingSensor ➊ failure

C0FE2 Original Size DetectingSensor ➋ failure

C0FE3 Original Size DetectingSensors ➊ and ➋ failure

C0FE4 Original Size DetectingSensor ➌ failure

C0FE5 Original Size DetectingSensors ➊ and ➌ failure

C0FE6 Original Size DetectingSensors ➋ and ➌ failure

C0FE7 Original Size DetectingSensors ➊ , ➋ , and ➌ failure

C0FE8 Original Size DetectingSensor ➍ failure

C0FE9 Original Size DetectingSensors ➊ and ➍ failure

C0FEA Original Size DetectingSensors ➋ and ➍ failure

C0FEB Original Size DetectingSensors ➊ , ➋ , and ➍ failure

C0FEC Original Size DetectingSensors ➌ and ➍ failure

C0FED Original Size DetectingSensors ➊ , ➌ , and ➍ failure

C0FEE Original Size DetectingSensors ➋ , ➌ , and ➍ failure

C0FEF Original Size DetectingSensors ➊ , ➋ , ➌ , and ➍failure

Ori

gin

al S

ize

De

tect

ing

Bo

ard

<Detection Timing>After having read the output data from PC115 toPC119, UN2 determines that there is a failure.

<Sensor Layout>(Metric Areas)

➊ : PC116, ➋ : PC117, ➌ : PC118 (option), ➍ : PC115, ➎ : PC119 (option)

A to E: Sensor locations

(Inch Areas)➊ : PC116 (option), ➋ : PC117, ➌ : PC118 (option), ➍ : PC115

A ➊

B C

➋E

➌

D

➎

B ➍

A

A ➊

B C

➋E

➌

D

➍

A

T-58

Code Description Sensor Layout

C0FF0 Original Size DetectingSensor ➎ failure

C0FF1 Original Size DetectingSensors ➊ and ➎ failure

C0FF2 Original Size DetectingSensors ➋ and ➎ failure

C0FF3 Original Size DetectingSensors ➊ , ➋ , and ➎ failure

C0FF4 Original Size DetectingSensors ➌ and ➎ failure

C0FF5 Original Size DetectingSensors ➊ , ➌ , and ➎ failure

C0FF6 Original Size DetectingSensors ➋ , ➌ , and ➎ failure

C0FF7 Original Size DetectingSensors ➊ , ➋ , ➌ , and ➎failure

C0FF8 Original Size DetectingSensors ➍ and ➎ failure

C0FF9 Original Size DetectingSensors ➊ , ➍ , and ➎ failure

C0FFA Original Size DetectingSensors ➋ , ➍ , and ➎ failure

C0FFB Original Size DetectingSensors ➊ , ➋ , ➍ , and ➎failure

C0FFC Original Size DetectingSensors ➌ , ➍ , and ➎ failure

C0FFD Original Size DetectingSensors ➊ , ➌ , ➍ , and ➎failure

C0FFE Original Size DetectingSensors ➋ , ➌ , ➍ , and ➎failure

C0FFF Original Size DetectingSensors ➊ , ➋ , ➌ , ➍ , and➎ failure (Metric Areas)

Ori

gin

al S

ize

Det

ectin

g B

oard

(Metric Areas)➊ : PC116, ➋ : PC117, ➌ : PC118 (option), ➍ : PC115, ➎ : PC119 (option)

A to E: Sensor locations

(Inch Areas)➊ : PC116 (option), ➋ : PC117, ➌ : PC118 (option), ➍ : PC115

A ➊

B C

➋E

➌

D

➎

B ➍

A

A ➊

B C

➋

E

➌

D

➍

A

T-59


C0F10 AE Sensor Board PWB-Hmalfunction

C0F20 AIDC Sensor UN3 variationcorrection failure

C0F21 AIDC Sensor UN3 contaminationcorrection failure

C0F22 AIDC Sensor UN3 VG correctionfailure

C0F23 AIDC Sensor UN3 exposurecorrection failure

Sen

sors

<In normal conditions>The output from PWB-H remains approx. 0.18V or less for a continuous 2-second periodwhen LA1 is OFF, PC81 output is LOW, orS108 output is LOW (i.e., the Original Coveris closed).

<In F5 or FF test operation>The output from PWB-H is less than 1.8 Vwhen 100% of PWB-H is illuminated.The output from PWB-H is 1.8 V or morewhen PWB-H is not illuminated.The output from PWB-H is outside the targetrange (1.8 ±0.05 V) when 50% of PWB-H isilluminated.

<When the optimum LA1 voltage is changed afterthe intensity of LA1 light has been corrected>

The output from PWB-H when 100% ofPWB-H is illuminated is smaller than that forhalftones stored in the F5 test operation.The output from PWB-H when PWB-H is notilluminated is smaller than that for halftonesstored in the F5 test operation.The output from PWB-H when 50% of PWB-His illuminated is outside the range of output forhalftones stored in the F5 test operation ±0.05V.

<At 1st F5 or FF test operation>The UN3 output is 0.95 V or more when allsignals from the 4-bit analog switch are madeLOW (i.e., with a maximum load resistance).The UN3 output is less than 1.05 V when allsignals from the 4-bit analog switch are madeHIGH (i.e., with a minimum load resistance).

<In F5 or FF test operation>The AIDC Sensor output does not fall in therange between 1 V and less than 1.2 V whenthe intensity of the sensor LED is varied.

<At the 1st F5 or FF test operation>1) The grid voltage (VG) of 550 V (reference) is

output.2) A solid black pattern is produced.3) If the AIDC Sensor output is less than 4.2 V

at this time:The grid voltage does not become 4.2 V ormore even when it is increased 3 steps (90 V).

<At the 1st F5 or FF test operation>1) LA1 is turned ON with 58 V (reference).2) A halftone pattern is produced.3) The LA1 output is varied so that the AIDC

Sensor output falls within the target range.4) The AIDC Sensor output does not fall within

the target range even after steps 1 to 3 havebeen repeated eight times, the output valuebeing outside the error level.

T-60


C0F30 ATDC Sensor UN4 failure The UN4 output remains approx. 0.18 V or lessor 4.52 V or more for a continuous 3-secondperiod while M1 remains energized.

C0F31 ATDC Sensor UN4 failure When the value shown for "Set" of "ATDCLevel" of "Level History" is greatly different fromthe value set in the FF test operation:

C0900 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Sensormalfunction

See PF-202 Service Manual (except the U.S.A. and Canada).

C0904 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Motor’s failureto turn

C0950 4th Drawer Lift-Up Sensormalfunction

C0954 4th Drawer Lift-Up Motor’s failureto turn

C0d00 Duplex Unit Front/Rear EdgeGuide Plates home positiondetection failure

See PF-2D/AD-5 Service Manual.C0d20 Duplex Unit Trailing Gate Unit

home position detection failure

C0d50 Duplex Unit Drive Motor’s failureto turn

C0d51 Duplex Unit Drive Motor turningat abnormal timing

C0990 Main Tray upward motion failure

See PF-102 Service Manual.

C0991 Main Tray downward motionfailure

C0992 Main Tray downward motionfailure

C0993 Main Tray upward motion failure

C0994 Main Tray Elevator Motor’sfailure to turn

C0996 3rd Drawer lock release failure

C0998 Shifter transfer failure

C0999 Shifter return failure

C099A Shifter return failure

C099b Shifter transfer failure

C099c Shift Motor’s failure to turn

C0F79

Se

nso

rs

3rd Drawer Paper EmptySensor failure

Main Tray Paper Empty Boardfailure

Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor

PF

-202

PF

-2D

/AD

-5P

F-1

02

T-61


ST-206/S-205

C0b00Transport drive malfunction See ST-206/S-205 Service Manual.

C0b01

ST-101/S-104

ST-206/S-205

C0b60

Bin motion failureSee ST-206/S-205 and ST-101/S-104Service Manuals.

C0b61

C0b62

C0b63

C0b64

ST-101ST-206

C0b10

Paper Clamp Unit motion failure

See ST-206/S-205 and ST-101/S-104Service Manuals.C0b11

ST-206C0b12

See ST-206/S-205 Service Manual.C0b13

ST-101ST-206

C0b30 Paper Aligning Mechanism drivefailure

See ST-206/S-205 and ST-101/S-104Service Manuals.

C0b31

C0b50

Stapling failureC0b51

C0b52

ST-206C0b70

Hole punching failure See ST-206/S-205 Service Manual.C0b71

T-62

The copier performs a self-diagnostic sequence to determine if the microprocessor outputs asignal to each of the IC ports on Master Board PWB-A properly. It is intended for detecting thefollowing malfunctions (C03∗∗ ). If the microprocessor fails to output any of these signals or ifany of the electronic components on the board (driver IC, etc.) is faulty, the copier determinesthat there is a faulty condition existing and shows on the Message Display the correspondingmalfunction code.

Code Output Signal Port

C0300

The input signal startingthe diagnosticsequence does not goHIGH.

IC1A P85

C0311 AVR PWM IC1A P50

C0312 H1 REM IC1A P51

C0313 Grid PWM IC1A P56

C0314 PWB-H PWM IC1A P60

C0315 SL-4 UP IC5A APC1

C0316 SL-4 DOWN IC5A APC0

C0317 LA2 DATA IC1A P64

C0318 LA2 MODE IC1A P65

C0319 LA2 CLK IC1A P66

C031A LA2 STROBE IC1A P67

C031B M8 REM IC4A APA3

C031C M9 REM IC4A APA2

C031D AVR REM IC4A APA1

C031E SCAN IC4A APA0

C031F SL1 REM IC4A APC6

C0320 M4 Switching IC4A APC5

Code Output Signal Port

C0321 SL5 IC4A BPA7

C0322 Separator/Bias REM IC4A BPA6

C0323Drum Charge/ImageTransfer REM

IC4A BPA5

C0324 CL1 IC4A BPA4

C0325 CL2 IC4A BPA3

C0326 CL3 IC4A BPA2

C0327 SL3 IC4A BPA1

C0328 SL2 IC4A BPA0

C0329 M1 REM IC5A BPC7

C032A Vendor (in copy cycle) IC5A BPA7

C032B Vendor (size) IC5A BPA6

C032C UN2 Area 1 IC5A BPA5

C032D UN2 Area 2 IC5A BPA4

C032E ENABLE IC5A BPA2

C032F Seal Bias REM IC5A BPA1

C0331 RY3 REM IC5A BPC5

C0332 M5 REM IC5A BPC4

C0333 LA3 IC5A APC3

* To correct any of these problems, replace the Master Board.

T-63

2. Troubleshooting Procedures

2-1. C0000: Main Drive Motor M1’s Failure to TurnC0010: Main Drive Motor M1 turning at abnormal timing

1136C07TAA

Symbol Name

M1 Main Drive Motor

PWB-A Master Board

T-64


1

Perform the following steps to check if M1turns when the Start Key is pressed. (See p.T-3, 4)

1)2)

Port: P16-1Select the function "Port."

3) Is the data for P16-1 set to "1"?

NO

Replace PWB-A.

4) Does M1 turn when the data for P16-1 ischanged from "1" to "0"?

YESPerform step 3.

2

Perform the following steps to check theinput signal when M1 is stationary (MainDrive Motor Lock signal). (See p. T-3, 4)

1) Port: P12-7

2) Select the function "Port." Is the data forP12-7 set to "H"?

NO Replace PWB-A.

YES

Replace M1.

3Does M1 make unusual noise when turning?

YESCheck the rollers, gears, andbelts for possible overload.

P15P16

LLH

1136T101AA

P14 1100101

1111

P12P13

HHHLLLHL

1136T102AA

P11 HHLLLLHL

HHHH1111

T-65

2-2. C0040: Suction Fan Motor M4’s Failure to TurnC004A: Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor M5’s Failure to TurnC004b: Original Glass Cooling Fan Motor M5 Turning at Abnormal Timing

1136C09TAA

Symbol Name


M5 Original Glass Cooling FanMotor

PWB-A Master Board

T-66

* C0040


1Is M4 turning at half speed when the copieris in the standby state?

NOPerform step 3.

2

Perform the following steps to check if M4speed changes from half to full speed whenthe Start Key is pressed. (See p. T-3, 4)

1)2)



NO

Replace PWB-A.

4) Does M4 start turning at full speed whenthe data for P6-3 is changed from "0" to"1"?

NOReplace M4.

3

Perform the following steps to check theinput signal when M4 is turning at half speed(Suction Fan Motor Lock signal). (See p.T-3, 4)

1) Port: P8-7

2) Select the function "Port." Is the data forP8-7 set to "L"?

NO Replace PWB-A.

YES

Replace M4.

P6P7

10

1136T103AA

P5 HHH

11111111LH H

LL

P9P10

1136T104AA

P8 LHHH HLHHLLLHHHH

T-67

1136C08TAA

T-68

* C004A, C004b


1

Perform the following steps to check if M5turns when the Start Key is pressed. (See p.T-3, 4)

1)2)



NO

Replace PWB-A.

4) Does M5 turn when the data for P16-4 ischanged from "1" to "0"?

YESPerform step 3.

2

Perform the following steps to check theinput signal when M5 is stationary (OriginalGlass Cooling Fan Motor Lock signal). (Seep. T-3, 4)

1) Port: P8-6


NO Replace PWB-A.

YES

Replace M5.

3Does M5 make unusual noise when turning?

YESCheck the fan for possibleoverload.

P9P10

1136T106AA

P8 LHHH HLHHLLLHHHH

P15P16

LLH

1136T105AA

P14 1100101

1111

T-69

2-3. C0070: Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8’s Failure to TurnC0071: Main Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M8 Turning at Abnormal TimingC0072: Sub Hopper Toner Replenishing Motor M9’s Failure to Turn

Symbol Name

M8 Main Hopper TonerReplenishing Motor

M9 Sub Hopper Toner ReplenishingMotor

PC35 Toner Bottle Home PositionSensor

S106 Sub Hopper Toner Empty Switch

PWB-A Master Board

1136C10TAA

T-70

* C0070, C0071


1 Is C0071 being shown? YES Perform step 3.

2Does the Toner Bottle turn when 2 to 3copies are made with the Original Coverraised?

NOPerform step 4.

3

Make 2 to 3 copies with the Original Coverraised. Does the voltage across PJ20AB-3on PWB-A and GND become DC0V whenthe Toner Bottle turns and DC5V when theToner Bottle is stationary?

YES Replace PWB-A.

NO

Check the Toner Bottle Holder orreplace PC35.

4

Make 2 to 3 copies with the Original Coverraised. Does the voltage across PJ20AA-4on PWB-A and GND become DC0V whenthe Toner Bottle turns and DC24V when theToner Bottle is stationary?

YES Replace M8.

NO

Replace PWB-A.

* C0072


1 Is PJ20A securely plugged into PWB-A? NO Plug it in securely.

2 Is CN35 connected securely? NO Connect it securely.

3 Are CN38 and CN44 connected securely? NO Connect them securely.

4Is toner not moving along the TonerConveying Screw of the Developing Unit?

YESCheck the toner path.

5Is the amount of toner in the Sub Hopper soscarce that the system detects atoner-empty condition?

YES Perform step 6.

NO Perform step 7.

6

Check the input signal from S106 when atoner-empty condition is detected as follows.(See p. T-5, 6)

1) Port: P5-7

2) Select the function "Port." Is the data forP5-7 set to "L"?

NO Replace S106.

YES Replace PWB-A.

7

Check the output signal to M9 as follows.(See p. T-3, 4)

1) Port: P4-6

2) Select the function "Port." Is the data forP4-6 set to "0"?

YES Replace M9.

NO Replace PWB-A.

T-71

2-4. C0200: PC Drum Charge, Image Transfer/Paper Separator Coronas Malfunction

1136C11TAA

Symbol Name

HV1 High Voltage Unit

PWB-A Master Board

T-72


1

Does "C0200" remain shown even after thePC Drum Charge and Image Transfer/PaperSeparator Coronas have been removed fromthe copier?

YES

Perform step 4.

2Does "C0200" appear when the PC DrumCharge Corona is installed in the copier?

YESClean or replace the PC DrumCharge Corona.

3Does "C0200" appear when the ImageTransfer/Paper Separator Coronas areinstalled in the copier?

YESClean or replace the ImageTransfer/Paper SeparatorCoronas.

4Does "C0200" remain shown even after CN1has been unplugged from HV1?

NO Replace HV1.

YES Replace PWB-A.

T-73

2-5. C0400: Exposure Lamp LA1’s Failure to Turn ONC0410: Exposure Lamp LA1 Turning ON at Abnormal Timing

1136C12TAA

Symbol Name

LA1 Exposure Lamp

TF2 Exposure Lamp Thermal Fuse

PWB-A Master Board

PWB-H AE Sensor Board

PU2 Power Supply Unit

T-74


1

Perform the following steps to check if LA1turns ON when the Start Key is pressed.(See p. T-3, 4.)

1)2)



NO

Replace PWB-A.

4) Does LA1 turn ON when the data forP4-7 is changed from "1" to "0"?

YESPerform step 4.

2Is the circuit across CN7-1 and 2 on the LA1side conductive when CN7 (2P) isdisconnected?

NOCheck LA1 and TF2 for continuity.

3Is the voltage across PJ3-1 and 3 on PU2AC100V?

YES Replace PU2

NO Check the power supply.

4

Is the voltage across PJ4AA-6 and GND 4.0V or less when the Power Switch is turnedON or in the standby state?

YESClean the AE Sensor or replacePWB-H.

NO Replace PWB-A.

P3P4

L

1136T107AA

P2 1111HHL1

111111111 H1

T-75

2-6. C0500: Warming-up FailureC0510: Abnormally Low Fusing TemperatureC0520: Abnormally High Fusing TemperatureC0522: Fusing Front/Rear Thermistor TH1/2 Malfunction

1136C13TAA

Symbol Name

H1 Fusing Heater Lamp

TS1 Fusing Thermoswitch

TH1 Fusing Front Thermistor

TH2 Fusing Rear Thermistor

SSR1 SSR

PWB-A Master Board

T-76

* C0500, C0510


1Does H1 light up when the Power Switch isturned ON?

YESCheck TH1/TH2 for installation orclean it.

NO Perform step 4.

2Disconnect CN47 (4P). Is the resistanceacross CN47-2 and 3 on the Fusing Unitside infinity?

YES Replace TH1.

NO Replace PWB-A.

3Disconnect CN48 (4P). Is the resistanceacross CN48-2 and 3 on the Fusing Unitside infinity?

YES Replace TH2.

NO Replace PWB-A.

4

Check the H1 ON/OFF signal from PWB-Awhen the Front Door is closed with S1turned ON. (See p. T-3, 4.)

1)2)



NO

Replace PWB-A.

5Disconnect CN4 (16P). Is there continuityacross CN4-8 and 9 on the Fusing Unit side?

YES Replace SSR.

NO Check H1 and TS1 for continuity.

Port DataP0P1

1H11LH1010101

1136T108CA

T-77

* C0520, C0522


1Does H1 remain lit up even after the copierhas completed warming up?

YES Perform step 2.

NO Perform steps 3 and 4.

2

Check to see if H1 is turned OFF bychanging the H1 ON/OFF signal fromPWB-A. (See p. T-3, 4.)

1)2)



NO

Replace PWB-A.

4) Does H1 go out when the data for P1-7is changed from "0" to "1"?

NOReplace SSR.

3

Disconnect CN47 (4P). Is the circuit acrossCN47-2 and 3 on the Fusing Unit sideshort-circuited?

YES Replace TH1

NO Replace PWB-A.

Disconnect CN48 (4P). Is the circuit acrossCN48-2 and 3 on the Fusing Unit sideshort-circuited?

YES Replace TH2.

NO Replace PWB-A.

Port DataP0P1

1H11LH1010111

1136T109CA

T-78

2-7. C0600: Scanner Motor M2 MalfunctionC0601: SCP Board PWB-J MalfunctionC0650: Scanner Reference Position Sensor PC81 MalfunctionC0660: Scanner Load FailureC06F0 to C06F7: SHOME, BASE, TRON, and SCEND Signal Failure

1136C14TAA

Symbol Name

PC81 Scanner Reference PositionSensor

M2 Scanner Motor

PWB-J SCP Board

PWB-A Master Board

T-79

* C0600, C0601


1 Is PJ6J securely plugged into PWB-J? NO Plug it in securely.

2Is the voltage across PJ6J-6 on PWB-J andGND DC5V when the Power Switch isturned ON?

NOCheck the DC5V line.

3 Is C0600 being shown? YES Replace M2.

4 Is C0601 being shown? YES Replace PWB-J.

* C0650


1Is PJ5J securely plugged into PWB-J andPJ43 into PC81?

NOPlug them in securely.

2Is the Light Blocking Plate installed properly? NO Reinstall it.

YES Replace PC81.

* C0660


1Do you feel an overload when you move theScanner manually with the Power SwitchOFF?

YESCorrect or replace the Cables orpart being overloaded.

* C06F0 to C06F7


1Is PJ14AA securely plugged into PWB-Aand PJ2J into PWB-J?

NO Plug them in securely.

YES Replace PWB-A or PWB-J.

T-80

2-8. C0610: Lens Motion FailureC0620: 4th/5th Mirrors Motion Failure

1136C15TAA

Symbol Name

PC86 Mirror Reference PositionSensor

PC90 Lens Reference Position Sensor

M6 Lens Motor

M7 Mirror Motor

PWB-J SCP Board

T-81

* C0610


1Are PJ4J and PJ3J plugged securely intoPWB-J, PJ47 into M6, and PJ31 into PC90?


2Does the voltage across PJ3J-2 on PWB-Jand GND change from DC5V to DC0V whenPC90 is blocked?

NOReplace PC90.

3

Do you feel an overload when you move theLens manually with the Power Switch OFF?

YESCorrect or replace the Cable orpart being overloaded.

NO Replace M6 or PWB-J.

* C0620


1Are PJ4J and PJ3J plugged securely intoPWB-J, PJ48 into M7, and PJ32 into PC86?


2Does the voltage across PJ3J-5 on PWB-Jand GND change from DC5V to DC0V whenPC86 is blocked?

NOReplace PC86.

3

Do you feel an overload when you move the4th/5th Mirrors manually with the PowerSwitch OFF?

YESCorrect or replace the part beingoverloaded.

NO Replace M7 or PWB-J.

T-82

2-9. C0E00: Main Erase Lamp LA3’s Failure to Turn ONC0E01: Main Erase Lamp LA3 turning ON at Abnormal Timing

1136C16TAA

Symbol Name

LA3 Main Erase Lamp

PWB-A Master Board

T-83


* C0E00


1Does LA3 light up when the Start Key ispressed?

YES Replace PWB-A.

2Does the voltage across PJ25-1 on PWB-Aand GND change from DC0V to DC24Vwhen the Start Key is pressed?

YES Replace LA3.

NO Replace PWB-A.

* C0E01


1

2

YES Replace LA3.

NO Replace PWB-A.

Perform the following steps to check theinput signal when LA3 is OFF (LA3 Malfunction signal). (See p. T-3, 4.)1) Port: P9-1

P9P10

HLLHHHHH

1136T110AA

P8 HHHH HLH

T-84

2-10. C0E20: Image Erase Lamp LA2’s Failure to Turn ON

1136C17TAA


1 Is PJ2A plugged securely into PWB-A? NO Plug it in securely.

2 Is CN26 connected securely. NO Connect it securely.

3Is the voltage across CN26-6 and GNDDC5V?

YES Replace LA2.

NO Check the 5V line.

Symbol Name

LA2 Image Erase Lamp

PWB-A Master Board

T-85

2-11. C0F02: Original Size Detecting Board UN2 MalfunctionC0FE1 to C0FFF: Original Size Detecting Sensor Failure

1136C18TAA

Symbol Name

PC115 Original Size Detecting SensorCD1

PC116 Original Size Detecting SensorFD1



T-86

* C0F02


1Is the jumper connector fitted properlyacross J1 and J2 on UN2?

NOChange the position of thejumper connector.

2Are PJ62 plugged securely into UN2 andPJ14A into PWB-A?

NO Plug it in securely.

3Is the voltage across PJ14AB-6 on PWB-Aand GND changing between DC0V and 5V?

YES Replace PWB-A.

NO Replace UN2.

* C0FE1 to C0FFF


1Is the jumper connector fitted properlyacross J1 and J2 on UN2?

NOChange the position of thejumper connector.

2Is each Original Size Detecting Sensorinstalled at the correct position?

NO Install it correctly.

3Does the malfunction code reappear afterthe corresponding Original Size DetectingSensor has been replaced?

YES Replace UN2 or PWB-A.

A to E: Sensor Positions

Metric Areas➊ : PC116, ➋ : PC117, ➌ : PC118 (option), ➍ : PC115, ➎ : PC119 (option)

Inch Areas➊ : PC116 (option), ➋ : PC117, ➌ : PC118 (option), ➍ : PC115

A ➊

B C

➋

E

➌

D

➎

B ➍

A

A ➊

B C

➋

E

➌

D

➍

A

1336C19TAA

T-87

2-12. C0F10: AE Sensor Board PWB-H Malfunction


1

Is the voltage across PJ4AA-6 on PWB-Aand GND 0.18 V or less when the Scanneris at its home position, LA1 OFF, and theOriginal Cover closed?

YESCheck the photo receiver ofPWB-H for contamination orreplace PWB-H.

NO Replace PWB-A.

Symbol Name

PWB-H AE Sensor Board

PWB-A Master Board

T-88

2-13. C0F20: AIDC Sensor UN3 Variation Correction FailureC0F21: AIDC Sensor UN3 Contamination Correction FailureC0F22: AIDC Sensor UN3 VG Correction FailureC0F23: AIDC Sensor UN3 Exposure Correction Failure

Symbol Name

UN3 AIDC Sensor

PWB-A Master Board

1136C20TAA


1 Is PJ20AA plugged securely into PWB-A? NO Plug it in securely.


3 Is UN3 installed at the correct position? NO Install it at the correct position.

4Is the photo receiver or LED of UN3 dirty? YES Clean UN3.

NO Replace UN3 or PWB-A.

T-89

2-14. C0F30: ATDC Sensor UN4 FailureC0F31: ATDC Sensor UN4 Failure

Symbol Name

UN4 ATDC Sensor

PWB-A Master Board

1136C21TAA


1Is the value for "Set" of "ATDC Level" of"Level History" equal to the value given onthe Adjust Label?

NOEnter the value given on theAdjust Label.

2 Is PJ20AB plugged securely into PWB-A? NO Plug it in securely.


4 Is UN4 installed at the correct position? NO Install it at the correct position.

5Is the voltage across PJ20AB-8 on PWB-Aand GND in the range between DC0.18Vand 4.52V while M1 is turning?

YES Replace PWB-A.

NO Replace UN4.

T-90

2-15. C0900: 3rd Drawer Paper Lift-Up FailureC0904: 3rd Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motor’s Failure to Turn (except the U.S.A. and Canada)C0950: 4th Drawer Paper Lift-Up FailureC0954: 4th Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motor’s Failure to Turn

Symbol Name

PC19 3rd Drawer Paper Lift-Up Sensor

PC23 4th Drawer Paper Lift-Up Sensor

PC27 3rd Drawer Paper Lift-Up MotorPulse Sensor

PC28 4th Drawer Paper Lift-Up MotorPulse Sensor

M24 3rd Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motor

M25 4th Drawer Paper Lift-Up Motor



1136C28TAA

T-91

* C0900, C0950



2

NO

Check the Pressure Releasemechanism of the Take-UpRoll/Feed Roll Assy.

Check PC19.


NO Replace PC19.

YESFirst replace PF-202 PWB-A,then replace EP2050 PWB-A ifnecessary.

3

NO

Check the Pressure Releasemechanism of the Take-UpRoll/Feed Roll Assy.

Check PC23.

Block PC19 and make the following checks.(See p. T-5, 6.)1) Port: P21-52) Select the function "Port."

3) Is the data for P21-5 set to "L"?

4) Slide out the 3rd Drawer and press downthe Pressure Release Lever of theTake-Up Roll/Feed Roll Assy (to unblockPC19).

6) Show the data for P21-5. Has the datachanged from "L" to "H"?

Block PC23 and make the following checks.(See p. T-5, 6.)1) Port: P20-12) Select the function "Port."


4) Slide out the 4th Drawer and press downthe Pressure Release Lever of theTake-Up Roll/Feed Roll Assy (to unblockPC23).

P21P22

00LH00HHHHHH

1136T111AA

P20 LL00HL00

Port DataP0P1

1H11LH1010111

1136T112CA

P21P22

00HH00HHHHHH

1136T113AA

P20 LL00HL00

P21P22

00LL00HHHHHH

1136T114AA

P20 LH00HL00

T-92


3


NO Replace PC23.

YES

First replace PF-202 PWB-A,then replace EP2050 PWB-A ifnecessary.

6) Show the data for P20-1. Has the datachanged from "L" to "H"?

Port DataP0P1

1H11LH1010111

1136T115CA

P21P22

00LL00HHHHHH

1136T116AA

P20 HH00HL00

* C0904, C0954


1 Is C0954 being shown? YES Begin with step 5.

2Does M24 turn when the 3rd Drawer is slidout and then into the copier?

YES Perform step 4.

3

Does the voltage across PJ11A-3 on PF-202PWB-A and GND change from DC0V toDC24V, and then back to DC0V, after the3rd Drawer has been slid into position?

NOFirst replace PF-202 PWB-A,then replace EP2050 PWB-A ifnecessary.

YES Replace M24.

4

Does the voltage across PJ11A-3 on PF-202PWB-A and GND change in the rangebetween DC0V and DC5V when the 3rdDrawer is slid out and then into the copier(while M24 is turning).

NOCheck the pulse disk.Replace PC27.

YES

First replace PF-202 PWB-A,then replace EP2050 PWB-A ifnecessary.Check gears for overload.

5Does M25 turn when the 4th Drawer is slidout and then into the copier?

YES Perform step 7.

6

Does the voltage across PJ11A-1 on PF-202PWB-A and GND change from DC0V toDC24V, and then back to DC0V, after the4th Drawer has been slid into position?


YES Replace M25.

7

Does the voltage across PJ10A-9 on PF-202PWB-A and GND change in the rangebetween DC0V and DC5V when the 4thDrawer is slid out and then into the copier(while M25 is turning).

NOCheck the pulse disk.Replace PC28.

YES

First replace PF-202 PWB-A,then replace EP2050 PWB-A ifnecessary.Check gears for overload.

T-93

2-16. C0990: Main Tray Upward Motion FailureC0991: Main Tray Downward Motion FailureC0992: Main Tray Downward Motion FailureC0993: Main Tray Upward Motion FailureC0994: Main Tray Elevator Motor M26’s Failure to Turn

Symbol Name

PC2 Main Tray Lower PositionSensor

PC5 Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor

PC19 3rd Drawer Paper Lift-Up Sensor

M26 Main Tray Elevator Motor



PWB-H Cabinet Transport Board

1136T029AA

T-94

* C0990, C0991



2

3) Is the data for P37-5 set to "H"?

NO

Check the Pressure Releasemechanism of the PaperTake-Up/Feed Roll Assy.Check PC19.

YES


3


NO

Check the Pressure Releasemechanism of the PaperTake-Up/Feed Roll Assy.Replace PC19.

YES


Slide out the 3rd Drawer and check PC19 asfollows. (See p. T-5, 6.)1) Port: P37-52) Select the function "Port."

Move the PC19 actuator to block PC19 andcheck PC19 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6.)1) Port: P37-52) Select the function "Port."

P36P37

LL00HL 00HH00

1136T117AA

P35 HHHH H

P36P37

HL00HL 00LL00

1136T118AA

P35 HHHH L

T-95

* C0992, C0993




NOCheck PWB-H and flat cable andreplace PC2.





Slide out the 3rd Drawer, block PC2, andcheck PC2 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6.)1) Port: P39-72) Select the function "Port."

Unblock PC2 and check PC2 as follows.(See p. T-5, 6.)1) Port: P39-72) Select the function "Port."

P39P40

H LHLL

1136T119AA

P38 LLHHL10

P39P40

H LHHL

1136T120AA

P38 LLHHL11

* C0994


1Does M26 turn when the Paper Descent Keyis pressed?

YES Perform step 3.

2

Does the voltage across PJ11A-1 (down) onPF-102 PWB-A and GND, and acrossPJ11A-2 (up) and GND, change from DC0Vto DC24V when the Drawer is slid in or thePaper Descent Key is pressed? (M26)


YESReplace M26 or check PWB-Hand flat cable.

3

Does the voltage across PJ10A-5 on PF-102PWB-A and GND change in the rangebetween DC0V and DC5V while M26 isturning? (PC5)

NOCheck the pulse disk, PC5, andPWB-H.

YES

First replace PF-102 PWB-A,then replace EP2050 PWB-A ifnecessary.Check gears and for overload.

T-96

2-17. C0998: Shifter Transfer FailureC0999: Shifter Return FailureC099A: Shifter Return FailureC099b: Shifter Transfer FailureC099C: Shift Motor M27’s Failure to Turn

Symbol Name

PC3 Shifter Home Position Sensor

PC4 Shifter Return Position Sensor

PC6 Shift Motor Pulse Sensor

M27 Paper Shift Motor




1136T030AA

T-97

* C0998, C0999



2 3) Is the data for P39-3 set to "L"?NO

Check PWB-H and flat cable andreplace PC4.





Slide out the 3rd Drawer, block PC4 with asheet of paper, and check PC4 as follows.(See p. T-5, 6.)1) Port: P39-32) Select the function "Port."


P39P40

L LHHL

1136T121AA

P38 LLHHL10

P39P40

H LHLL

1136T122AA

P38 LLHHL10

T-98

* C099A, C099b


1 Is C099b being shown? YES Perform step 3.



YES




YES


Block PC3 and check PC3 as follows. (Seep. T-5, 6.)1) Port: P39-82) Select the function "Port."


P39P40

H LHLL

1136T123AA

P38 LLHHL10

P39P40

H HHLH

1136T124AA

P38 LLHHL10

* C099C


1Does M27 turn when the Drawer is slid inwith a paper stack loaded in the Shift Tray?

YES Perform step 3.

2

Does the voltage across PJ11A-3 (moving toright) on PF-102 PWB-A and GND changefrom DC0V to DC24V when the Drawer isslid in with a paper stack loaded in the ShiftTray? (M27)


YESReplace M27 or check PWB-Hand flat cable.

3

Does the voltage across PJ10-12 on PF-102PWB-A and GND change in the rangebetween DC0V and DC5V while M27 isturning? (PC6)

NOCheck the pulse disk and PWB-H.Replace PC6.

YES

First replace PF-102 PWB-A,then replace EP2050 PWB-A ifnecessary.Check gears and for overload.

T-99

2-18. C0996: 3rd Drawer Lock Release Failure C0F79: Paper Empty Sensor Failure

Symbol Name

PC1 Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor

PC7 3rd Drawer Set Sensor

PC20 3rd Drawer Paper Empty Sensor

SL41 3rd Drawer Lock Solenoid



PWB-E Main Tray Paper Empty Board


1136C31TAA

PWB-A (EP2050)

T-100

*C0996


1Is SL41 energized after the Paper DescentKey has been pressed?

YESPerform step 3.

2

Slide out the 3rd Drawer and then slide it inwith no paper loaded in it. Then, check SL41as follows. (See p. T-3, 4.)

1)2)



NO


4) Show the data for P38-7. Is SL41operated when the data is changed from"1" to "0"? (Listen for the sound ofoperation.)

NOCheck wiring up to SL41 orreplace SL41.

YESAdjust the SL41 stroke or checkthe Drawer locking mechanism.

3

Slide out the 3rd Drawer and check PC7 asfollows. (See p. T-5, 6.)

1)2)



NO

Check PC7.

4) Slide the 3rd Drawer back in.


6) Show the data for P37-6. Has the datachanged from "H" to "L"? NO

Replace PC7 and DrawerPushing Spring.

YES


P39P40

H HHHH

1136T125AA

P38 LLHHL10

P36P37

LH00HL 00HH00

1136T126AA

P35 HHHH H

Port DataP0P1

1H11LH1010111

1136T127CA

P36P37

HH00HL 00LL00

1136T128AA

P35 HHHH L

T-101

*C0F79


1Is C0F79 being shown with the Main Tray inthe raised position?

YESPerform step 3.

2

Slide out the 3rd Drawer and make thefollowing checks with no paper on PWB-E.(See p. T-5, 6.)

1)2)



NO

Check PWB-E and flat cable.Check the sensor on PWB-E.

4) Block PWB-E with a sheet of paper.


6) Show the data for P36-1. Has the datachanged from "H" to "L"?

NOCheck PWB-H and flat cable.Replace PWB-E.

YES

First replace PF-102 PWB-A,then replace EP2050 PWB-A ifnecessary.P36

P37LH00HL 00HH00

1136T131AA

P35 HHHH H

Port DataP0P1

1H11LH1010111

1136T130CA

P36P37

HH00HL 00HH00

1136T129AA

P35 HHHH H

T-102


3

Let a sheet of paper push up the actuator ofPC20 and, in that condition, check PC20 asfollows. (See p. T-5, 6.)

1)2)



NO

Check the actuator.Check PC20.

4) Slide out the 3rd Drawer and make surethat no paper is loaded on the Tray.


6) Show the data for P35-8. Has the datachanged from "L" to "H"? NO

Check the actuator.Replace PC20.

YES


P36P37

HH00HL 00LL00

1136T132AA

P35 HHHH L

Port DataP0P1

1H11LH1010111

1136T133CA

P36P37

LH00HL 00HH00

1136T134AA

P35 HHHH H

T-103


4

Slide out the 3rd Drawer and check PC1with no paper on the Shift Tray. (See p. T-5,6.)

1)2)



NO

Check PWB-E and flat cable.Check PC1.

4) Load the Shift Tray with paper.


6) Show the data for P35-3. Has the datachanged from "H" to "L"? NO

Check PWB-H and flat cable.Replace PC1.

YES

First replace PF-102 PWB-A,then replace EP2050 PWB-A ifnecessary.P36

P37HH00HL 00HH00

1136T137AA

P35 LHHH H

Port DataP0P1

1H11LH1010111

1136T136CA

P36P37

LH00HL 00HH00

1136T135AA

P35 HHHH H

T-104

2-19. C0d00: Duplex Unit Front/Rear Edge Guide Plates Home Position Detection Failure C0d20: Duplex Unit Trailing Gate Unit Home Position Detection Failure C0d50: Duplex Unit Drive Motor M31’s Failure to Turn C0d51: Duplex Unit Drive Motor M31 Turning at Abnormal Timing

Symbol Name

PC8 Duplex Gate Home PositionSensor

PC9 Front/Rear Edge Guide PlateHome Position Sensor

M31 Duplex Unit Drive Motor

M32 Gate Motor

M33 Front/Rear Edge Guide DriveMotor




PWB-A (EP2050)

1136C32TAA

T-105

∗ C0d00


1

Does M33 turn when the Power Switch isturned ON or Duplex Unit slid into position?

NO

Replace M33, PWB-G,PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D PWB-A, orEP2050 PWB-A, in that order.


2

Check PC9 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6.)

1)

2)3)

Block PC9. (The Front/Rear Edge GuidePlates are at their home positions.)Port: P43-5Select the function "Port."

4) Is the data for P43-5 set to "L"? NO Replace PC9.

YES

Replace PWB-G,PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D PWB-A, orEP2050 PWB-A, in that order.

P42P43

11LHHH

1136T138AA

P411 01

T-106

∗ C0d20


1

Does M32 turn when the Power Switch isturned ON or Duplex Unit slid into position? NO

Replace M32, PWB-G,PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D PWB-A, orEP2050 PWB-A, in that order.


2

Check PC8 as follows. (See p. T-5, 6.)

1)

2)3)

Block PC8. (The Trailing Gate Unit is atits home position.)Port: P44-8Select the function "Port."

4) Is the data for P44-8 set to "L"? NO Replace PC8.

YES

Replace PWB-G,PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D PWB-A, orEP2050 PWB-A, in that order.

P45P46

0000

1136T141AA

P44110000

HL

T-107

∗ C0d50, C0d51


1 Is C0d51 being shown? YES Perform step 3.

2

Check M31 as follows. (See p. T-3, 4.)

1)2)



NO

Replace PWB-G,PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D, orEP2050 PWB-A, in that order.

4) Does M31 operate when the data forP42-1 is changed from "1" to "0"? (Listenfor the sound of operation.)

NO Replace M31.

YESCheck for possible overloads onrollers and gears.

3

Check the input signal when M31 isstationary (the Duplex Unit Drive Motor Locksignal) as follows. (See p. T-3, 4.)

1)2)


3) Is the data for P44-7 set to "H"?NO

Replace PWB-G,PF-202/PF-102/PF-2D, orEP2050 PWB-A, in that order.

YES

Replace M31.

P42P43

11LHHH

1136T144AA

P411 01

P45P46

0000

1136T145AB

P44110000

HL

T-108

3. Power is not Turned ON

1136C22TAA

Symbol Name

S1 Power Switch

RY1 Main Relay

UN1 Control Panel

PWB-B MSC Board

PWB-A Master Board

PWB-C Power Supply Board

PWB-D Noise Filter Board

PU1 DC Power Supply Unit

T-109


• RY1 is not turnedON. 1

Is the source voltage beingsupplied to the circuitacross PJ-1 and 3 of PU1?

NOCheck the main fuse andsupply power. If they checkokay, replace PWB-D.

2Is the voltage across PJ2-2on PU1 and GND DC24V? NO

Check the fuse on PU1 and,if it checks okay, replacePU1.

3Is the voltage acrossPJ5C-2 on PWB-C andGND 24V when S1 is OFF?

NOReplace PWB-C.

4

Are the voltages acrossPJ5C-1 on PWB-C andGND, and across PJ5C-3on PWB-C and GND,DC24V when S1 is ON?

NO

Check S1.

5

Is the voltage acrossPJ8C-4 on PWB-C andGND DC24V when S1 isON?

NO

Replace PWB-C.

6Is the voltage across PJ4-1on PU1 and GND DC5Vwhen S1 is ON?

NOReplace PU1.

7

Does the voltage acrossPJ5AB-8 on PWB-A andGND instantaneously gofrom HIGH to LOW whenS1 is turned ON?

NO

Replace PWB-A.

8

Are the voltages acrossPJ1C-3 on PWB-C andGND, and across PJ1C-5on PWB-C and GND,DC24V when S1 is ON?

NO

Check RY1.

• No control panelIndicators light up,though RY1 isturned ON.

1Is the voltage across PJ4-2on PU1 and GND DC5V?

NOReplace PU1.

2Are all PJs on PWB-Bplugged securely intoposition?


3Is PJ1I plugged securelyinto PWB-I?

NOPlug it in securely.

4Is PJ5A plugged securelyinto PWB-A?

NO Plug it in securely.

YESReplace PWB-A, PWB-B,UN1, or PWB-I.

T-110

T-111


1 YES

2

1)2)

3)

NO

4)

5)

6) NO

YES

3

1)2)

3)

NO

4)

5)

6) NO

YES

T-112



Printed in Japan



EP2050 SERVICE MANUAL


Printed in Japan


Date post:	01-Nov-2014
Category:	Documents
Upload:	mihaela-fratea
View:	168 times
Download:	13 times

Girlshare.ro_konica-Minolta EP 2050 Service Manual

Documents